JP5815588B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and when a game ball is driven toward the game area, the game ball driven into the game area follows the game board. Flow down. The game area is provided with a number of obstacle nails having a predetermined gauge arrangement, a windmill, a start opening, a big prize opening, and the like arranged at appropriate positions in the middle of the game area in the vertical direction. When a game ball wins at the start opening, a lottery process is performed. If the result of the lottery process is a big hit, a big hit game is performed in which a process for opening / closing the big winning opening is performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state when the jackpot is won. The normal game state is a game in which a lottery process is performed with a relatively low probability, and the probability variation game state is a game in which a lottery process is performed with a relatively high probability.

  By the way, in recent years, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a sense of expectation is increased by performing a transition from a normal gaming state to a probability-changing gaming state when it cannot be expected (for example, Patent Document 1). In this type of gaming machine, a small role is set as a winning type, and when the small role is won, a small role game is performed in which at least one game ball can be won in a variable winning opening (large winning opening). Then, by taking the small role game as a trigger, the probability variation gaming state is apparently given to the player that the player suddenly changes from the normal gaming state to the probability variation gaming state.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-168619 (Claim 2, paragraph [0019], etc.)

  However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 does not play a small role game unless it wins a lottery (see paragraph [0058] of Patent Document 1) as in the case of a big role (big win), The decline still cannot be suppressed, and it is not a fundamental solution.

This invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and an object thereof is to suppress a decrease in Xing flavor.

The invention according to claim 1 for solving the above problem is based on a first receiving port capable of receiving a game ball driven toward a game area, and receiving a game ball in the first receiving port. The first lottery means for performing the lottery including the determination, the symbol variation display means for displaying the symbol variation in the predetermined display area based on the result of the lottery, and the winning probability in the winning determination is set relatively low A winning probability changing means capable of changing from a low probability state to a relatively high set high probability state, a ball winning means for facilitating acceptance of a game ball by operation of a predetermined movable body, and the lottery When the result is the first hit, an opportunity to obtain a winning ball by changing the winning probability by the winning probability changing means and facilitating acceptance of the game ball by the ball winning means by operating the movable body A first profit providing means for providing a player with a first profit, and when the result of the lottery is second, a change to the high probability state by the winning probability changing means, and the first The second profit that gives the player a second profit having a value lower than the first profit by operating the movable body in such a way that fewer prize balls are obtained than when the profit of the first profit is given. And a small hitting condition establishment determining unit capable of performing determination relating to establishment of a small hitting condition that can be established with a certain probability regardless of whether the low probability state or the high probability state in the lottery. When it is determined that the small hit condition is satisfied as a result of the determination related to the establishment of the small hit condition, the second profit is granted although the probability change by the winning probability changing means is not involved. Be done And a specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit for operating the movable body in such a way that fewer prize balls are obtained than when the first profit is given. Based on the second receiving port that is in a normal mode that is unacceptable or difficult to accept the game ball that has been driven toward the gaming area, or an easy-to-accept promotion mode, and the reception of the game ball in the second receiving port And a second lottery means capable of making a hit determination with the same winning probability as the win determination by the first lottery means in any of the low probability state and the high probability state, In the lottery by the first lottery means, the small hit condition establishment determination means performs a determination related to the establishment of the small hit condition so that the small hit condition can be satisfied with a certain probability. In the lottery by the second lottery means, the small hit condition is not satisfied, and the symbol fluctuation display means is a normal loss fluctuation display which is performed without reach display when the result of the lottery is lost. As a result, the result of lottery by the first lottery means in the first state that is difficult to become the promotion mode is displayed. when as or the small hit condition 2 per are satisfied, but performs variable display of the symbols over the plurality of normal loss variation long special per change time than either of the display, the promotion than the first state in the second state and changed becomes easy rather and the high probability state embodiment, the result of the lottery by the first selecting means Serial or is a small hit condition a second per even is satisfied, and having a special per variable display means for performing the variable display of symbols in the shorter time than the special per time varying.
According to a second aspect of the present invention, a lottery including a first reception port capable of receiving a game ball driven toward a game area and a winning determination based on the reception of the game ball into the first reception port. Relative from a low probability state in which the first lottery means to perform, the symbol fluctuation display means for displaying the symbol fluctuation in a predetermined display area based on the result of the lottery, and the winning probability in the hit determination is set relatively low A winning probability changing means capable of changing to a high probability state set to a high level, a ball winning means for facilitating acceptance of a game ball by operation of a predetermined movable body, and the result of the lottery per first When the winning probability is, the change to the high probability state by the winning probability changing means and the opportunity to obtain a winning ball by facilitating acceptance of the game ball by the ball winning means by the operation of the movable body is provided. of The first profit granting means for granting a profit to the player, and when the result of the lottery is second, the change to the high probability state by the winning probability changing means and the first profit are given A second profit granting means for actuating the movable body in such a way that fewer prize balls are obtained than in the case, and giving the player a second profit having a value lower than the first profit; A second receiving port that is a gaming machine that is driven toward the gaming area and that is in an unacceptable or difficult normal mode or an easily accelerating mode, and a game to the second receiving port A second lottery means capable of performing a hit determination with the same winning probability as the win determination by the first lottery means in any of the low probability state and the high probability state based on acceptance of the sphere; First lottery means In the lottery by the second lottery means, regardless of whether the state is the low probability state or the high probability state, the small hit condition that can determine whether the small hit condition that can be established with a certain probability, respectively When it is determined that the small hit condition is satisfied as a result of determination regarding the establishment of the small hit condition, the second determination unit does not involve a change in probability by the winning probability changing unit. The specific profit granting means for granting the specific profit for operating the movable body in a manner that reduces the number of prize balls obtained as compared with the case where the first profit is granted, The small hitting condition establishment determination means further includes a determination regarding the establishment of the small hitting condition performed in the lottery performed by the first lottery means by the second lottery means. The symbol variation display means performs reach display when the result of the lottery is lost, so that the small hit condition is established with a higher probability than the determination regarding establishment of the small hit condition performed in the lottery. The normal losing variation display that is performed without the normal losing variation display means for displaying the variation of any of the plurality of normal losing variation displays with different variation times , and the first state in the first state that is difficult to achieve the promotion mode when the result is the second contact is or the small hit condition lottery by selecting means is satisfied, although performing variable display of the symbols over the plurality of normal long special per change time than any loss variable display in the second state is changed to the easy rather and the high probability state becomes the accelerator mode than in the first state Even if the result of the lottery by the first lottery means is the second hit or the small hit condition is satisfied , the special hit fluctuation display for performing the fluctuation display of the symbol in a time shorter than the special hit fluctuation time. It has the means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in Xing flavor.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which obstruct | occluded the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. BB sectional view (A) in FIG. 8, CC sectional view (B) in FIG. 10 (A), DD sectional view (C) in FIG. 10 (A), E-in FIG. It is E sectional drawing (D). It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a side view of the main body frame before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the 1st surrounding wall and 2nd surrounding wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding frame for the door frame and the sliding frame for the body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding frame for door frames, and the sliding frame for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door lens unit attached to the front side of a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. It is a front view of a door frame at the time of removing the member irradiated to LED among the members which constitute a speaker cover and a decoration member. It is a front view of the dish unit provided in the front of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the plate unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back surface of the plate unit. It is a front view of a game production unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the game production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back surface of the game production unit. It is a front perspective enlarged view of a game production unit excluding a center character and a back unit. It is a back perspective enlarged view of a game production unit except a center character and a back unit. It is a side cross-sectional enlarged view of the game effect unit excluding the center combination and the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective enlarged view which looked at the game production unit shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 from the front. FIG. 38 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the game effect unit shown in FIGS. 36 and 37 as viewed from the back. It is a plane sectional view of a pachinko machine. It is a top sectional view of a pachinko machine, and is a figure where a main part frame opened to an outer frame, and a door frame opened to a main part frame. It is side surface sectional drawing of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of a main control board and a periphery control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd starting opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation pattern for every fluctuation pattern table set in a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a high disappointment fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern for every variation pattern table set in a high anticipation variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a low expectation variation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern for every variation pattern table set in a low expectation | forecast variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of specific condition satisfaction. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory act | operation process. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in an external normal game state (External normal game state A or external normal game state B). It is a figure which shows the image which shows the one aspect | mode of the production | presentation aspect which appears on an effect display apparatus when it exists in an external normal game state. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in time limit mode. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus when it rushes into promotion mode after the long open jackpot game based on the 1st long open jackpot ends. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus when it rushes into promotion mode after the short open big hit game based on the 1st short open big hit ends. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in "retraction mode." It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display aspect in the case of deriving the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode derived | led-out by the effect display apparatus, when a specific condition is satisfied in an external normal game state, or when winning a short opening big hit or the like. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode derived | led-out by the effect display apparatus, when a specific condition is satisfied in an external normal game state, or when winning a short opening big hit or the like. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display aspect in the case of deriving the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect display device in an external advantageous game state. It is a timing chart which shows the said control mode when the production | presentation control concerning "extended extension | expansion and deviation deviation twice" is performed. It is a front view of the game effect unit when the “special light emission effect” is being executed. It is a front view of the game effect unit when the “special light emission effect” is being executed. (A) is a figure which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol in an external normal game state, (b) is a figure which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol in an external advantageous game state. It is a figure which shows the table (reach symbol determination table) used for reach symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the table (re-lottery symbol determination table) used for the process concerning a re-lottery effect. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external advantageous game state.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a perspective view seen from the front of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine.

  1 and 2, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a game frame 409 that includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 3 on which the unit 4 can be mounted and a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable are provided. The locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 are both performed by the locking device 60. The “game panel 409” corresponds to the “game board portion” of the present invention.

In addition, the game production unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) includes a launching device 57 described later.
A game area 20 is formed in which a game ball driven from (see FIG. 4) can flow down, and the door frame 5 includes a glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit that allows the player to visually recognize the game area 20; And a dish unit 300 disposed below the glass unit 190. The dish unit 300 is configured to be able to store game balls to be supplied to the launching device 57, and game balls (so-called prize balls) as prizes that can be given to the player as a result of the game are also stored in the dish unit. To be paid out. In the following, in this specification, the side on which the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 (left side in FIG. 13) is referred to as a pivotal support side. On the other hand, the side on which the main body frame 3 is opened and the right side in FIG. The “shaft support side” corresponds to the “opening / closing shaft side” of the present invention, and the “open side” corresponds to the “free end side” of the present invention.

  A lower decorative plate 6 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 6a is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Although the details will be described later, the outer frame 2 is a connection for connecting upper and lower wooden upper and lower frame plates and left and right light alloy (aluminum) side frame plates at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with members. The upper support bracket 7 provided on the upper side of the outer frame 2 and the lower support bracket 8 provided on one side upper surface of the lower decorative plate 6 are respectively connected to an upper shaft support bracket 47 and a lower By engaging the shaft support bracket 48, the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed.

  As described above, the game effect unit 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 4, a prize ball tank 50 for delivering a prize ball to the back surface thereof, a tank rail A member 51, a ball passage unit 52, and a ball payout device (ball payout unit) 53 are attached, and a substrate unit 54 is attached to the lower part of the back surface thereof. The substrate unit 54 includes various control boards and power supply boards 395 for controlling electrical components provided on the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the launch device 57 and the game effect unit 4 (see FIG. 44). Etc. are provided together. Further, a rear opening 70 (see FIG. 13) is formed in the main body frame 3, and a back cover 58 that covers the rear opening 70 is detachably provided. The “prize ball tank 50” corresponds to the “storage tank” of the present invention, the “ball passage unit 52” corresponds to the “dispensing passage” of the present invention, and the “ball dispensing device 53” corresponds to the “dispensing tank” of the present invention. It corresponds to "apparatus".

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) is provided with a guide rail 482 that partitions the game area 20 and guides the game ball into the game area 20 at the left edge of the game area 20. ing. The guide rail 482 includes an outer rail unit 472 and an inner rail unit 462. Further, the upper end portion of the inner rail unit 462 has a backflow preventing member 463 that prevents a hit ball once launched and taken into the game area 20 from flowing back to the outer rail unit 472 again. On the other hand, when the hit ball that slid on the outer rail unit 472 collides with the upper right edge of the game area 20 when viewed from the front, an impact portion 476 that repels the hit ball on the inside of the game area 20 is provided. Have. In addition, the stopper part 476 is comprised with the elastic body of rubber | gum or a synthetic resin.

  Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle unit 318 in the above-described dish unit 300. Here, the number of the dish units 300 provided in the door frame 5 is one, and the handle unit 318 conventionally provided in the main body frame 3 is provided in the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side. Moreover, since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front.

[Outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. FIG. 8 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the outer frame. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 8A, a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A, a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 10A, and FIG. It is EE sectional drawing (D) of).

  6 and 7, the outer frame 2 connects the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 with connecting members 14 for connecting the respective end portions. By this, it is assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape. The “side frame plates 12 and 13” correspond to the “vertical frame” of the present invention.

  Specifically, the connecting member 14 is formed in a podium shape having a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center portion is formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The engagement notches 10B and 11B are fitted. Then, the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14 that are lowered one step, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are disposed on one side of the left and right portions that are lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact. In this state, the insertion holes 10C and 11C formed on both sides of the engagement notch 10B of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 11B of the lower frame plate 11, respectively, A plurality (two in the case of illustration) of connecting holes 16 (shown in the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side in FIG. 7) formed in the planes of the left and right portions lowered. Is also present in the other connecting members 14), and is fixed by a plurality (two in the illustrated case) of connecting screws 16 </ b> B from above or below.

  Further, a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 12B and 13B drilled in the upper and lower end portions of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a plurality formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions lowered by one step. (In the illustrated case, three) connecting holes 15 (shown on the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the open side frame plate 13 in FIG. 7 but also on the other connecting members 14) Are fixed by a plurality (three in the illustrated case) of connecting screws 15B from the outside of the side, and the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected to each other. Are firmly connected and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 15B, one connecting screw 15B does not connect the side frame plates 12, 13 and the connecting member 14, but the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the connecting member 14. Are directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the short side upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as the conventional one, and the long side frame The plates 12 and 13 are made of an extruded plate of a light metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. That is, the outer frame 2 is composed of two wooden short plate goods and two light metal long plate materials. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is to make nails easier when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island. More specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island, it is necessary to perform an operation for fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are nailed to the island. Therefore, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as the conventional one so that nails can be easily nailed to the island.

  On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. When the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 is reduced, the left and right widths in the front view of the peripheral walls 290 to 293 (see FIG. 13) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 (that is, the pivot support side). Left and right peripheral walls 290 to 293 and the open side peripheral walls 290 to 293 can be widened, and as a result, a large game effect unit 4 in the left and right direction can be mounted on the main body frame 3. It becomes. As a result, the game area 20 can be formed larger as a result, and the effect display device 115 can be enlarged while securing the area where the game ball flows down.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side (the side frame plate 13 on the open side is the side frame plate) in order to reduce the thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the wooden. 12 is a left and right side), and a space portion 12G (the space portion 13G of the side frame plate 13 on the open side is shown in FIG. 9) opened rearward by a rib is formed, and the thickness h2 of the rear portion is It is pultruded to be thick. Of course, the thickness h2 is equal to or slightly smaller than the thickness of a conventional wooden. Further, by forming the space portion 12G in this way, the thickness h2 of the rear portion can be reduced compared to the case where the rib is simply bent from the rear portion of the side frame plates 12 and 13. it can. Note that such pultrusion molding cannot be performed with wood. Therefore, only by making the side frame plates 12 and 13 made of a metal that can be drawn and molded, the strength can be maintained as compared with the conventional wood while reducing the wall thickness. Further, if the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light metal such as an aluminum alloy, the weight of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10B and 10D, one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14 that are lowered by one step is fitted in front of the space portion 12G of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side. A groove 12F (the groove 13F of the open side frame 13 is shown in FIG. 6) is formed. From the groove portion 12F to the front end portion of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side, as shown in FIGS. Although it is in the form of a flat plate that comes into contact, a shallow concave portion for material reduction is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 12F is formed, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 10B, a concave portion 12H (open side) into which the hanging piece portion 7E of the upper support fitting 7 is inserted. A recess 13H of the side frame plate 13 is formed in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above has a hanging piece of the upper support fitting 7 on the upper portion in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 14. A mounting hole 12 </ b> C for fixing the portion 7 </ b> E to the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side with a mounting screw 17 is formed. Further, a mounting hole 12D is formed in the lower part of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side so as to be fixed with the mounting screw 18 so as to coincide with the mounting hole 8C formed in the side bent portion of the lower support fitting 8. Has been. Further, an attachment for fixing the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side and the lower decorative plate 6 to the front portion of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side at the lower portion of the mounting hole 12D with the fastening screw 6E. A hole 12E is formed.

  On the other hand, in the side frame portion 13 on the open side, a mounting hole 13C for mounting the closing projection 22 with a mounting screw 22B is formed in the upper portion in addition to the configuration for mounting the connecting member 14. Further, an attachment hole 13C for attaching the closing projection 23 with the attachment screw 23B is formed in the lower portion of the side frame portion 13C. Furthermore, a mounting hole 13D for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the lower decorative plate 6 with the fixing screws 6E is formed at the lowermost portion of the open side frame portion 13. The closing protrusions 22 and 23 are hook portions (details will be described later) of the locking device 60 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. To engage. Then, as will be described later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 868 of the locking device 60 and turning it to one side, the hook portion of the locking device 60 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are disengaged, and the main body frame 3 is removed. The outer frame 2 can be opened.

  The lower decorative plate 6 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the lower decorative plate 6 are covered with a decorative cover plate 6a, but a fastening protrusion 6C (see FIG. 9) in which an elastic claw is formed at the rear end protrudes from the back surface of the decorative cover plate 6a. Has been established. And this decoration protrusion board 6a is attached to the lower decoration board 6 by making this fixation protrusion 6C penetrate the fixation hole 6D which penetrates the lower decoration board 6. FIG. A guide plate 6F for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer cover 2 on the decorative cover plate 6a.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, an upper support fitting 7 that also functions to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side, and an upper surface on one side of the lower decorative plate 6. A lower support fitting 8 attached along the main body frame 3 is provided.

  The upper support fitting 7 is formed with a support hole 19A formed by bending the support protrusion piece 19 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 19 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin (see FIG. 13) of the upper shaft support 47 of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange hole 19A.

Further, the lower support fitting 8 is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support projection 21 is projected upward from the protruding portion, and the lower shaft support bracket of the main body frame 3 is projected on the support projection 21. 48
A support hole formed in (see FIG. 13) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, the support protrusion 21 of the lower support bracket 8 is engaged with the support hole formed in the lower shaft support bracket 48 of the main body frame 3, and then the main body frame 3. The shaft can be supported in a freely openable / closable manner by hooking the shaft support pin of the upper shaft support metal 47 into the support hole 19A.

[About the body frame]
Next, the launching device 57, the ball dispensing device 53, the locking device 60, the substrate unit 54, and the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 4, 5, and 11 to 13. FIG. 4 and 5 are as described above, and FIG. 11 is a front view of a front component member and a main body frame of a game effect unit described later. FIG. 12 is a side view of the main body frame before the parts are attached. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a main body frame to which components are attached as viewed from the front.

  First, the structure of the main body frame 3 to which the game effect unit 4 is attached will be described. The main body frame 3 is integrally formed of synthetic resin. An upper shaft support bracket 47 and a lower shaft support bracket 48 are attached to the outer frame 2 to support the opening and closing shaft. By engaging the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 with the upper support bracket 7 and the lower support bracket 8 attached to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be pivotally supported.

By the way, when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 11, and is extended from the front to the rear in about 3/4 of the upper part thereof. A game effect unit installation recess 30 (see FIG. 13) surrounded by a thin-walled (for example, 1 to 3 mm) peripheral wall 290 to 293 (details will be described later) is formed. This game production unit installation recess 30
(In other words, the space area surrounded by the peripheral walls 290 to 293) accommodates the game effect unit 4 including rearward protruding portions of various components such as the game panel 409 and the effect display device 115. In addition, a plate portion 32 is formed below the game effect unit installation recess 30. Of the peripheral walls 290 to 293, the peripheral walls 290 to 293 close to the side frame plates 12 and 13 (that is, the peripheral walls 290 to 293 extending rearward from the inner surface on the shaft support side and the inner surfaces on the open side) The peripheral wall 290 to 293) extending rearward from the side surface corresponds to the “main body frame side wall” of the present invention. Moreover, the peripheral wall 290-293 (namely, the peripheral wall 290-293 extended toward the back from the collar part of an upper side part) among the peripheral walls 290-293 is adjoined to the "main body" of this invention. It corresponds to “the frame upper wall”.

  Also, on the front side surrounding the game effect unit installation recess 30, door hook holes 352 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the front right side that is the open side. The door hook hole 352 is provided to penetrate the door frame hook portion 973 provided in the locking device 60 (details will be described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 so as to protrude forward. . Further, a unit positioning protrusion 37 for engaging with a positioning recess 466 formed in the game panel 409 is provided on the inner side surface of the left side portion of the front surface that is the shaft support side.

  Next, the structure provided in the board part 32 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. In addition, the board part 32 is the structure of the front side of the main body frame 3, and is located under the game production | presentation unit installation recessed part 30. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the firing rail 38 is screwed to the plate portion 32 from the center portion of the front surface toward the end portion on the open side. A rail connection member 44 projects from the front surface of the plate portion 32 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 38 (so-called M-shaped rail) on the shaft support side. When the game effect unit 4 is installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the rail connection member 44 is adjacent to the connection passage portion 477 that is the downstream end of the outer rail unit 472. An elliptical game effect for fixing the lower portion of the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) to the side position on the shaft support side of the rail connection member 44 (position opposite to the launch rail 38). A unit fixture 46 is rotatably attached. The game effect unit fixing tool 46 rotates clockwise with the game effect unit 4 placed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, and presses the game effect unit fixing tool 46 against the front surface of the game panel 409. Thus, the entire game effect unit 4 including the game panel 409 is fixed to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when removing the game effect unit 4, the lower part of the game panel 409 can be easily released by turning the game effect unit fixture 46 counterclockwise.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only one dish unit 300 is provided without providing a so-called lower dish as in the prior art. The reason why the lower plate is not provided is to increase the vertical length of the game effect unit 4 in order to enlarge the game area 20. In addition, a firing mechanism including a handle unit 318, a launch rail 38, a rail connection member 44, and the like is disposed in the plate portion 32. The plate portion 32 is located on the front side and below the game effect unit installation recess 30. Therefore, the game area 20 can be expanded in the vertical direction (the height direction seen from the player). Since there is no conventional lower plate, the plate portion 32 and thus the firing mechanism are located generally below the conventional gaming machine.

  By the way, in the position where the rail connection member 44 protrudes, a so-called foul port is formed in the conventional pachinko machine. This foul mouth played a role of receiving a game ball (so-called foul ball) that flowed back without being driven into the game area 20 even though it was launched, and to return the foul ball to the lower plate. The foul port was provided at this position because when the game effect unit is mounted on the main body frame, the rail provided on the game effect unit and the launch rail provided on the main body frame come into contact with each other. This is because there is a risk of damage. Therefore, by providing a gap between the game effect unit side rail and the main body frame side launch rail, the game effect unit side rail and main body frame side fire that may occur when the game effect unit is mounted on the main body frame It prevented contact with the rail.

However, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not provided with a lower plate. Therefore, the foul port 473 is connected to the game panel 409 (more specifically, on the upstream side (shaft support side) of the connection passage portion 477 and between the connection passage portion 477 and the guide rail 482 (outer rail unit 472). ), The foul ball can be returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300. Since the storage unit 361 is below the placement surface on which the game effect unit 4 is placed (the surface of the main body frame 3 on which the game effect unit 4 is placed), the foul port 473 is formed on the game panel 409 side. As a result, the foul ball can be returned to the storage unit 361.

  With the above configuration, the foul ball can be returned to the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300 while increasing the vertical length of the game effect unit 4 without providing a lower dish, and the game frame 3 can be It is possible to prevent contact between the connection passage portion 477 on the game panel 409 side and the firing rail 38 on the main body frame 3 side that may occur when the production unit 4 is mounted.

  Further, a prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided on the side of the game effect unit fixing tool 46 on the side of the shaft support. This prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided in the middle of the prize ball path for paying out the prize balls paid out from the ball payout device 53 to the tray unit 300 on the door frame 5 side, and when the door frame 5 is opened. The prize ball passage is automatically closed to prevent the balls from spilling out from the prize ball passage, while when the door frame 5 is closed, the prize ball passage is automatically communicated and paid out from the ball dispensing device 53. The awarded ball is paid out to the dish unit 300. A fastening hole 41 for fastening with a fastening portion (not shown) and a fastening portion 469 formed on the game panel 409 is formed in the plate portion 32 above the firing position of the firing rail 38.

  In addition, a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 40 is formed on the lower portion of the open side of the plate portion 32 so as to bulge out toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). 57 is fixed to the launcher mounting portion 40 from the back surface of the main body frame 3. A handle connection window 40 a is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 40. A slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 (see FIG. 1) of the slide unit 230 attached to the back side of the door frame 5 is inserted into the handle connection window 40a. When the door frame 5 is closed, a slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 described later is inserted into the handle connection window 40a, and the handle unit 318 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device 57 are linked. In addition, the launching device 57 can adjust the resilience of the game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of turning operation of the handle unit 318, so that it is at the firing position of the launch rail 38. The game ball can be ejected and launched at a desired position in the game area 20.

  The front structure of the main body frame 3 is generally as described above. Next, the rear surface structure of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, a prize ball tank 50 for storing a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball or a rental ball is detachably mounted on the upper back surface of the main body frame 3. A tank rail member 51 that guides the balls from the prize ball tank 50 in a laterally inclined manner is disposed below the prize ball tank 50, and further, a ball path from the lower end of the tank rail member 51 toward the lower side. A unit 52 and a ball dispensing device 53 are provided.

  The tank rail member 51 guides the game balls from the prize ball tank 50 to the downstream side while arranging them in two rows in the front-rear direction, and the ball moves from the downstream end of the tank rail member 51 to the ball path unit 52. When it does, it falls in the ball passage unit 52 in one row. The game balls guided from the ball passage unit 52 to the ball payout device 53 are in accordance with a payout control program executed by a payout control board 720 (see FIG. 44) housed in a payout control board box 55 described below. Thus, a predetermined number of prize balls and rental balls are paid out to the dish unit 300 provided on the front side of the door frame 5. Although not shown in detail, the ball payout device 53 is provided with a payout motor and a rotary payout member that is rotationally driven by the payout motor and pays out the balls one by one.

  Further, a substrate unit 54 is attached to the lower surface of the main body frame 3 (more specifically, on the rear side of a second peripheral wall 291 described later). The board unit 54 includes a game control unit 4 such as a payout control board box 55, an external terminal board 56, and a power supply board box (not shown, but fixed to the back side of the payout control board box 55 and the external terminal board 56). Substrate boxes for storing control substrates that do not need to be replaced even if they are replaced are collectively provided. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, various control boards and various electrical components that do not need to be replaced even when the game effect unit 4 is replaced are collectively arranged below the main body frame 3. Thereby, various control boards and various electric components can be efficiently accommodated. As described above, by efficiently providing the board unit 54 that collects the board boxes for storing various control boards on the rear side of the main body frame 3 and below the main body frame 3, the installation space is made relatively small. be able to. In particular, by providing the board unit 54 in the lower part, the game effect unit 4 having the large game panel 409 in the vertical direction can be accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30.

  Further, when the game effect unit 4 is stored and installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, it is a main control board provided on the game effect unit 4 side and a board provided on the board unit 54 and needs to be connected to the main control board. Electrical connection with a certain board is automatically performed by a drawer connector described later. Thereby, after the game effect unit 4 is stored and installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, it is not necessary to perform an electrical connection work from behind the pachinko machine 1, and work efficiency is improved.

  A unitized launching device 57 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 40 (see FIG. 11) located below the substrate unit 54 described above. Further, a back cover 58 is provided at the rear opening 70 formed along the rear end of the aforementioned peripheral wall 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. This back cover 58 covers the entire rear part of the game effect unit 4, and when the back cover 58 is attached and the rear opening 70 is closed, as shown in FIG. It becomes substantially the same vertical plane as the rear end portion of the tank rail member 51 protruding to the rear.

A locking device 60 is fixed to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3. The locking device 60 is a so-called W lock that locks both the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3. Then, a plurality (three in this embodiment) of door frame hooks 973 and cylinder locks 868 are directed from the locking device 60 toward the front of the main body frame 3.
(Both see FIG. 1) are provided so as to protrude, details will be described later. The “cylinder lock 868” corresponds to the “operation unit” of the present invention.

  Next, the structure of the game effect unit installation recessed part 30 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 12 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the game effect unit installation recess 30 has a front-facing saddle face portion that does not accommodate the game effect unit 4 in a part on the upper side and the open side. Nothing is formed on the surface portion, but the door hook holes 352 through which the door frame hook portion 973 of the locking device 60 penetrates are opened in the upper, middle and lower three portions on the open side surface portion. Yes. That is, the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the open side flange portion (see FIG. 4).

  Thus, as described above, the game effect unit installation recess 30 includes the first peripheral wall 290, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293, so that the left and right sides of the main body frame 3 It is formed in a concave shape in which the rear part of the side and the upper side is surrounded. Here, the first circumferential surface wall 290 surrounds the game effect unit installation concave portion 30 from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the upper side surface portion, the open side surface portion and the lower side surface toward the rear side. It is arranged so that. The second peripheral wall 291 extends rearward from the first peripheral wall 290, the third peripheral wall 292 extends rearward from the second peripheral wall 291, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is the first peripheral wall 293. Extending rearward from the three peripheral walls 292. Thus, the main body frame 3 is integrally formed in a square cylinder shape. However, only the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 are extended from the inner surface of the lower side portion, and the substrate unit 54 is disposed in the vicinity of the rear of the second peripheral wall 291. .

  The first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed to extend straight backward from the upper side and the side on the shaft support side with a step, whereas the side on the open side It is formed in the level | step difference shape (refer FIG. 5) which inclines inside as it goes to the 4th surrounding surface wall 293 from the surface wall 290. FIG. In addition, the inwardly inclined shape from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side toward the fourth peripheral wall 293 can be smoothly opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. It is to make it. That is, when the first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 on the open side are formed to extend straight rearward, the fourth peripheral wall 293 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. In order to avoid this, there is a possibility that the rearmost end portion of the frame abuts against the inner surface of the side frame plate of the outer frame 2 and cannot be opened smoothly. The locking device 60 is attached along the first circumferential wall 290 on the open side. The locking device 60 is attached using a lock mounting hole (not shown) provided in the rear end side of the first circumferential wall 290. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole (not shown), it is preferable to form the fourth peripheral wall 293 from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side in an inclined step shape. Furthermore, since the inner peripheral surface of the first peripheral wall 290 and the outer peripheral surface of the game effect unit 4 need to be brought into contact with each other, the step between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 is formed with a somewhat large step. However, the dimension of the steps of the second peripheral wall 291 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 is very small.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral walls 290 to 293 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 145 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first peripheral wall 290 corresponds to a thickness that can cover the side of the game panel 409, and is formed by the remaining second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293. The rearward protruding portions of various game devices as the game effect unit 4 are stored in the space to be played. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as described below, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed up to a position corresponding to the outer periphery of the game panel 409. The size of the space is secured. Thereby, for example, even when an effect display device 115 or the like occupying most of the game panel 409 as a game board is attached, the display device control board box 119 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. The rear protruding part can be easily stored.

  Further, from the rear end side of the fourth peripheral wall 293, specifically, from the open side, the upper side, and the side of the shaft support side, the open side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the shaft support side rear wall 296 are respectively provided. It extends toward the inside. The “open side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and / or the pivot support side rear wall 296” corresponds to the “rear wall portion” of the present invention.

  The shaft support side rear wall 296 has a flat front surface, and the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53 are detachably attached to the rear surface along the shaft support side rear wall 296. ing. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the shaft support side rear wall 296 to have a width for attaching the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53.

  The upper rear wall 295 has a flat front surface, and the tank rail member 51 is attached to the rear surface. The tank rail member 51 is inclined so that a game ball can flow down, and the lower end side of the upper rear wall 295 is formed in an inclined shape along the tank rail member 51. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 295 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 51 attached in an inclined manner.

  Further, the open-side rear wall 294 has a flat front surface, and a rear cover support cylinder portion 280 that pivotally supports the rear cover 58 is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the open-side rear wall 294 to have a width dimension that forms the back cover support cylinder 280.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the shaft-supporting rear wall 296 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed in a flat plate shape. . In addition, as described above, the size of the space formed by the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is secured up to a position corresponding to the outer periphery of the game panel 409. Therefore, for example, even when the effect display device 115 or the like that occupies most of the game panel 409 as a game board is attached, the display device control board box 119 ( The rear projecting portion according to FIG. 35) can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the pivot support-side rear wall 296 constitute a rear opening 70, and the rear opening 70 is closed by a back cover 58 (see FIG. 4) so as to be opened and closed. It has become so.

<Locking device>
Next, the locking device 60 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the open side of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device and the main body frame. FIG. 15 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a structure for latching the locking device to the main body frame. FIG. 16 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine. FIG. 17 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a detailed relationship between the locking device and the first peripheral wall and the second peripheral wall of the main body frame. FIG. 18: is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. FIG. 19 is a perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, and a perspective view of a sliding frame for a door frame and a sliding rod for a body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. (B), (C). FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device. FIG. 21 is a front view for explaining the operation of the door frame sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod. FIG. 22 is a front view for explaining the operation of the fraud prevention member. The “door frame sliding rod 971 and / or the body frame sliding rod 984” corresponds to the “sliding rod” of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the locking device 60 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and has a U-shaped base 685. . The U-shaped base 685 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) locks formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the outer peripheral side of the main body frame 3 and the rising portion of the first peripheral wall 290. A locking hole 351, a lock mounting hole 350 formed by being cut out in the upper part and middle of the vertical surface of the first peripheral wall 290, and a lock mounting hole 353 formed in the vicinity of the upper part of the cylinder lock through hole 354 , Supported and fixed by. Hereinafter, the structure of the locking device 60 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the locking device 60 includes a U-shaped base 685 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 685. The sliding frame 971 for sliding, the sliding frame 984 for the body frame provided slidably in the U-shaped base 685, and the sliding frame 984 for the body frame cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 882 and 890 attached to the lower part of the U-shaped base 685.

  The U-shaped base 685 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section and providing a sliding slide 971 for a door frame and a sliding rod 984 for a body frame in the interior thereof. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device integrated on an L-shaped base. This is to increase the space surrounded by the peripheral walls 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 by greatly increasing the size of the game effect unit 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction. That is, in order to greatly increase the size of the game effect unit 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction, it is necessary to extremely reduce the dimension between the first peripheral wall 290 and the outer periphery of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the mounting structure is such that the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment can be formed to have a small width so that the locking device 60 can be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross-section of the U-shaped base 685 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 685 is completely covered except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014. That is, since the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are housed in the U-shaped base 685, even if the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame The sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 cannot be directly touched. This makes it possible to provide a highly secure pachinko machine.

  The U-shaped base 685 is provided with a rectangular hook through opening 860 through which the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 are penetrated on the upper and lower sides opposite to the open side. Further, a screw fixing portion 861 protrudes in the horizontal direction on the upper side and the middle of the side surface 685b (see FIG. 20) which is in the opposite side to the open side and is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290. Furthermore, locking protrusions 862 are formed to project from the upper and middle portions of the side surface 685a (see FIG. 20) that are not in close contact with the first circumferential wall 290 on the open side, and the lower ends of the both side surfaces 685a and 685b on the open side. ing. Screw fixing portions 861 and locking protrusions 862 are for attaching the locking device 60 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. When the locking projection 862 is inserted into the lock locking hole 351 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward (see FIG. 15), the screw fixing portion 861 and the lock mounting hole 350 match in this state. The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown). Note that the locking device 60 is attached not only by the upper and middle screw fixing portions 861 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing holes 898 formed in the lock mounting pieces 866 described later and the cylinder lock through holes 354 above. The lock attachment hole 353 is made to correspond to and fixed with a screw (not shown) so that the lower part of the lock device 60 is also attached.

  Further, at the time of the mounting, the locking projections 862 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are inserted into the locking holes 351 to be positioned and locked. Thereafter, screw fixing portions 861 formed at two positions on the upper side opposite to the opening side (rear portion) of the U-shaped substrate 685 and screw fixing formed on the opening side (front portion) of the U-shaped substrate 685. The hole 898 is fixed to the lock mounting hole 350 with screws. Therefore, the front portion of the locking device 60 is locked by the locking projection 862 and the lock locking hole 351, the rear portion of the locking device 60 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 861 and the lock mounting hole 350, and the locking device 60 Is fixed by the screw fixing hole 898 and the lock mounting hole 353, the locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure. In other words, even when the locking device 60 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 685 having a very small width, the locking device 60 is fixed to the main body by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 60. It can be firmly fixed to the frame 3. In particular, in the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 862 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion is formed so as to protrude from the side surface 685a that is not in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. The screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. Therefore, the locking device 60 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290.

  In addition, insertion holes 863 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 685a and 685b of the U-shaped base 685. Then, by inserting the rivet 864 into the insertion hole 863 and crimping the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 in the U-shaped substrate 685, the inside of the U-shaped substrate 685. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be slidably attached. In other words, one rivet slot 974 is formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the door frame sliding rod 971, and one is formed on each of the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the body frame sliding rod 984. By passing the rivet 864 through the rivet slots 989 and 996, the door frame sliding rod 971 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be moved downward. ing. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 19 (B), the rivet 864 penetrates the lower end of the rivet slot 989, 996 of the body frame sliding rod 984, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 864 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 974 of the sliding rod 971.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 865 is formed in the lower part of the U-shaped base 685 on the side opposite to the open side. Further, a lock attaching piece 866 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 is provided projecting toward the side at the front end portion of the side face 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the main body frame 3 on the open side. Further, an insertion vertical opening 878, a spring locking piece 879, and a relief lateral hole 880 are formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 865 is configured such that a stopper piece 885 of a first fraud prevention member 882 described later moves forward and backward, which will be described later. In addition, the lock attachment piece 866 is provided on the side surface 685b of the U-shaped base 685 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game effect unit installation recess 30 in a state where the lock device 60 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It projects from the front end toward the side. The lock attachment piece 866 has a lock insertion hole 867 through which the cylinder lock 868 passes, and two attachment holes 871 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 with screws 870. Screw fixing holes 898 for attaching the lower part of the device 60 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed. The insertion vertical opening 878 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 874 and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 fixed to the cylinder lock 868 enter when the cylinder lock 868 rotates. The spring locking piece 879 is for locking the spring 894 provided on the tamper-proof members 882 and 890, and the clearance lateral hole 880 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 893. It is. This point will be described later.

  Next, the cylinder lock 868 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 866 will be described. In the cylinder lock 868, a cylindrical cylinder lock body is fixed in front of the lock mounting board 869, and a lock shaft 872 of the cylinder lock body protrudes from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 869. The engagement cam 873 is fixed by screws 876. The cylinder lock 868 can be locked and unlocked from the front side of the door frame 5 by the cylindrical portion passing through the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 2, 3, 11, etc.). Further, the cylinder lock 868 is disposed on the lower end side of the game effect unit 4 (more specifically, below the dish unit 300).

  The engagement cam 873 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 874 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 997 of the body frame sliding rod 984 when rotating, and the other end. The side is a second engagement protrusion 875 that engages with the rising engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 when rotating. The cylinder lock 868 configured as described above has a mounting hole (not indicated) and a lock formed at two positions on the lock mounting substrate 869 by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 867. The U-shaped base 685 can be fixed by aligning the mounting hole 871 of the mounting piece 866 with the screw 870 and screwing it.

  Next, fraud prevention members 882 and 890 attached to the U-shaped base 685 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 882 and 890 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 984 from being lowered illegally with, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 868 with an official key. . Accordingly, the tamper-proof members 882 and 890 have a structure in which the first tamper-proof member 882 and the second tamper-proof member 890 are connected by the connecting pin 893. The first tamper-proof member 882 is formed in a vertically long plate shape configured to be swingable around a swing shaft hole 883 at the upper end. The first tamper-proof member 882 has a swing shaft hole 883 at the lowermost of the insertion hole 863 and the rivet 864 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984. It is fixed by being attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 685 described above by the insertion hole 863 and the rivet 864.

  The first fraud prevention member 882 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 884 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 878 on the plate-like surface, and a second engaging protruding piece 875 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 884. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 875 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 884 and the insertion vertical opening 878, the upward engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside the U-shaped base 685 The second engaging protrusion 875 is engaged. In addition, an outer line obliquely above the opening position of the projecting piece insertion hole 884 of the first fraud prevention member 882 is an inclined portion 882a. The inclined portion 882a is in contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 874 when the engaging cam 873 is rotated, and the first engaging protrusion 874 and the inclined portion 882a are rotated when the engaging cam 873 is rotated. , The first fraud prevention member 882 swings about the swing shaft hole 883 (clockwise direction in FIG. 22B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 882 is provided with a stopper piece 885 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 884, and a restricting protruding piece 889 is provided below the stopper piece 885, A pin hole 887 and a connecting hole 888 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 889. The stopper piece 885 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 865 and the engagement notch 1017 of the body frame sliding rod 984 when the body frame sliding rod 984 is locked. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. In addition, the restricting protrusion 889 is connected to the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 by a spring 894. When the restriction protrusion 889 is connected by the spring 894, the biasing direction of the second fraud prevention member 890 is The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 887 is for fixing the guide pin 886. With the guide pin 886 fixed to the pin hole 887 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 882, the guide pin 886 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 878. The first fraud prevention member 882 is guided along the side surface 685b of the U-shaped base 685 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped base. Further, the connection hole 888 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 882 and the second tamper-proof member 890 with a connection pin 893.

  The second tamper-proof member 890 connected to the first tamper-proof member 882 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 892 is formed at one upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 896 is formed, and a contact portion 897 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 892 is for matching with the connection hole 888 of the first fraud prevention member 882 and connecting with the connection pin 893, and the spring locking hole 896 is a spring locking piece having a U-shaped base 685 at one end. The other end of the spring 894 locked to 879 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 897 abuts on the closing protrusion 23 that is fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 will be described later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 685 will be described. The door frame sliding rod 971 is composed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 973 are integrally projected toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Has been. The door frame hook portion 973 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base 685, and when the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3. It protrudes forward from a door hook hole 352 (see FIG. 11) formed on the door and engages with an engagement opening 175 (see FIG. 23) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 973 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 973 and the engagement opening 175 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 971. Can be released.

  Further, a vertically long rivet slot 974 through which the rivet 864 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 971, and the uppermost rivet slot among the rivet slots 974 is formed. A guide protrusion 976 is provided below the elongated hole 974 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 971. The rivet long hole 974 is a hole through which the rivet 864 inserted through the insertion hole 863 of the U-shaped base 685 passes, and the rivet 864 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 971. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 864 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 974. Further, the guide protrusion 976 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 991, 999 formed in the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding bar 984, and the door frame sliding bar 986 The sliding movements of 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are guided.

  A spring hook portion 980 is formed at the upper end of the door frame sliding rod 971. One end of the spring 982 is locked to the spring hook portion 980, and the other end of the spring 982 is the main frame sliding rod. The spring hook portion 993 formed on the upper hook member 985 of 984 is locked. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 971 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 984 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 971, a contact elastic piece 981 is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 981 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding bar 971 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 685 so that the door frame is internally used. This prevents the sliding rod 971 from rattling. Further, a vertically long play hole 978 and a rising engagement hole 979 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 971. When the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the free hole 978 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 874 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 979 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 971 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. In addition, an escape notch 983 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 865 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 971. The escape notch 983 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 885 of the first tamper-proof member 882 in order to reliably engage the tamper-proof notch 865 and the engagement notch 1017.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 984 includes an upper hook member 985 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 986 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 987 connecting the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986, and It is composed of In other words, the main body frame sliding rod 984 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 985 having the hook portions 988 and 1014 and the lower hook member 986 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 987. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 685.

  By the way, the upper hook member 985 has a hook portion 988 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet slot 989 and a projecting piece moving hole 991 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 993 and a connection hole 994 are formed at the lower end portion of the vertical side, and contact portions 1015 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 988 penetrates the hook penetration opening 860 above the U-shaped base 685 and engages with the closing protrusion 22 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 989 corresponds to the rivet slot 974 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 971. In a normal state where the rivet 864 is penetrated through the rivet slot 989, The rivet 864 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 989. Thereby, the upper hook member 985 can move downward. In the protruding piece moving hole 991, the guide protruding piece 976 above the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted as described above, and the door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 993 is for locking the other end of the spring 982 as described above. The connecting hole 994 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 987. Further, when the abutting portion 1015 is housed in the U-shaped base 685, the abutting portion 1015 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 685, and the sliding operation of the upper hook member 985 is smoothly performed without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 986 is provided with a hook portion 1014 projecting rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper side to the lower side of the plate surface portion with a long rivet hole 996, a lowering engagement hole 997, and a play hole 998. One moving hole 999 is sequentially formed. Further, a connecting hole 995 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1017 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and contact portions 1016 are formed at the upper and lower sides. The hook portion 1014 penetrates the hook penetration opening 860 below the U-shaped base 685 and engages with a closing projection 23 provided at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 996 corresponds to the rivet slot 974 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 971. In a normal state where the rivet 864 is penetrated through the rivet slot 996, The rivet 864 is in a state of passing through the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 996. Thereby, the lower hook member 986 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 997 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 984 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 998 has a distal end portion of the second engagement protrusion 875 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 976 below the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 999, so that the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are connected to each other. It is designed to guide the movement. The connecting hole 995 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 987. Further, when the abutting portion 1016 is housed in the U-shaped base 685, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 685, and the sliding operation of the lower hook member 986 is smoothly performed without rattling. It is for doing so.

  As mentioned above, although each member which comprises the locking device 60 was demonstrated, the method of assembling this locking device 60 is as follows. First, the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 are connected by a connecting wire rod 987. In this state, the guide projection 976 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted into the projection moving holes 991, 999 of the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986, and the rivet long hole 974 and the rivet The long holes 989 and 996 are aligned and overlapped. Then, in the overlapped state, the door frame sliding rod 971 is passed through the hook portion 988 of the upper hook member 985 and the hook portion 1014 of the lower hook member 986 through the hook penetration opening 860 of the U-shaped base 685. The body frame sliding rod 984 is inserted into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 685. Thereafter, the rivet 864 is inserted from the insertion hole 863. At this time, the rivet 864 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 989, 996, 974. However, when the lowermost rivet 864 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 864 also into the swing shaft hole 883 of the first fraud prevention member 882 and attach the first fraud prevention member 882 to the U-shaped base 685 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 882 to the U-shaped base 685, the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 are connected by the connection pin 893, and the guide pin 886 is illustrated in the pin hole 887. The guide pin 886 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 878.

  With the rivet 864, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 685, and the spring 982 is spanned between the spring hook portions 980 and 993, and is used for the door frame. The sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are biased in opposite directions. Furthermore, the spring 894 is stretched over the spring locking pieces 879 and 594 so that the second tamper-proof member 890 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 889. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 868 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 867 of the lock attachment piece 866, and the cylinder lock 868 is fixed to the attachment hole 871 with the screw 870. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 882a and into the insertion vertical opening 878, and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted. The cylinder lock 868 is attached to the lock attachment piece 866 so that the distal end portion thereof is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 884 and the insertion vertical opening 877 of the first fraud prevention member 882.

  In order to attach the locking device 60 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is formed on the main body frame 3 as described above. While being inserted into the hook hole 352, the locking protrusion 862 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the lock locking hole 351 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. Then, in this state, the screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 that protrude in the horizontal direction are aligned with the lock mounting hole 350, and a screw (not shown) is screwed into the aligned hole, as shown in FIG. The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 862 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to project from the side surface 685a that does not adhere to the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685, while the rear portion The screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 that constitute the fixing structure are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 685b that is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. Therefore, the locking device 60 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290.

  By the way, the effect | action of the locking device 60 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG.

  First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hooks 988 and 1014 of the body frame sliding rod 984 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 and the engagement opening 175 of the door frame 5 are locked. ing. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 868 and rotated in a direction in which the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 enters the insertion vertical opening 878, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement protrusion 874 engages with the lower engagement hole 997 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 to push down the lower hook member 986 against the urging force of the spring 982. Further, the connecting wire rod 987 and the upper hook member 985 connected thereto are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, the locking state between the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 is released, and the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. Can be opened to the outer frame 2. When closing the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 is forcibly pressed against the outer frame 2. At this time, the hook portions 988 and 1014 are in a state of being lifted by the urging force of the spring 982 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. And tilted down. Therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 988 and 1014 come into contact with the lower end portions of the closing projections 22 and 23, and the main body frame sliding rod 984. Descends downward. Finally, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 988 and 1014 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are locked again, and the main body frame sliding rod 984 rises to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 868 and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 878, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the second engagement protrusion 875 engages with the ascending engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 971 upward against the biasing force of the spring 982. . For this reason, since the engagement state of the engagement opening 175 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is released, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. Can be opened to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3. At this time, the door frame hook portion 973 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 982 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 21A), but the lower side of the door frame hook portion 973 is outside. Inclining up towards Therefore, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 973 comes into contact with the upper end portion of the engagement opening 175, and the door frame sliding rod 971 is Ascend upward. Finally, the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 973 and the engagement opening 175 are locked again, and the door frame sliding rod 971 is lowered to return to the locked state.

  The door frame sliding rod 971 in the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base 685, and the U-shaped base 685 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. It is attached over the entire length. In addition, since the door frame hook portion 973 that is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 971, the door frame 5 and the main body Locking of the entire length of the frame 3 in the longitudinal direction is ensured. Therefore, there is also an advantage that it is not possible to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from there.

  As described above, the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 868 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 without lowering the key without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 868 may be performed. Cannot perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism including a first fraud prevention member 882 and a second fraud prevention member 890, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 685. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are housed in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 882 rotates counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 894, the stopper piece 885 enters the fraud prevention notch 865, and the stopper piece 885 becomes the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with an engagement notch 1017 formed on the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 at a position corresponding to 865. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked on the main body frame sliding rod 984 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 885 and the engagement notch portion 1017 are engaged. It is not possible to perform an illegal act of pulling down and opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 868, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 873 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 874 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 878. When the first engagement protrusion 874 rotates, the inclined portion 882a of the first fraud prevention member 882 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 874 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 885 also starts to rotate away from the tamper-proof cutout 865, starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around the 883. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece 885 and the engagement notch 1017 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 890 is in a position where the spring 894 is extended and the contact portion 897 is retracted. When the engagement cam 873 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 874 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 874 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 997 of the lower hook member 986. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 984 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 988 and 1014 and the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 890 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 889, so the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 890 is almost the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 897 of the second fraud prevention member 890 come into contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. . For this reason, the 1st fraud prevention member 882 and the 2nd fraud prevention member 890 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 prevent only the downward movement of the main body frame sliding rod 984 from being illegally performed. This is because if the body frame sliding rod 984 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 971 can be easily opened manually after the release, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is This is because it is extremely difficult to do. Thus, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 984.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 882 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, even if the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in this embodiment, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside is provided. The main body frame sliding rod 984 is housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 685 except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014, and is completely covered. Thus, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 984 provided in the closed space of the U-shaped base 685, the both side surfaces 685a and 685b of the U-shaped base 685 can Since entry into the enclosed space is prevented, cheating cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 685 which is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device integrated in the L-shaped base. A sliding rod 971 and a body frame sliding rod 984 are slidably provided, and the cylinder lock 868 for operating the locking device 60 is attached to the U-shaped base 685 at the lower end side of the game effect unit 4. It was set as the position which becomes lower than. Thereby, the storage space of the game effect unit 4 (particularly the game panel 409) is not obstructed by the cylinder lock 868, and the size of the game effect unit 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction can be extremely increased. Therefore, even if the space surrounded by the peripheral walls 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the locking device 60 can be firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside and the main body The frame sliding rod 984 is completely covered with the U-shaped base 685 except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014. Accordingly, it is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a main body frame sliding rod 984 provided by inserting a piano wire or the like. Further, when the locking device 60 is attached, the locking projections 862 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are inserted into the lock locking holes 351 and positioned and locked. The screw fixing portions 861 and the screw fixing holes 898 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides opposite to the open side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 350 with screws. Therefore, the front portion of the locking device 60 is locked by the locking protrusion 862 and the lock locking hole 351, and the rear portion of the locking device 60 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 861, the screw locking hole 898, and the lock mounting hole 350. The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In the above-described embodiment, the screw fixing hole 898 formed in the lock mounting piece 866 and the cylinder lock through hole 354 of the main body frame 3 are formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 866 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685. However, instead of this, a screw 870 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 to the lock attachment piece 866 is used, and the tip of the screw 870 penetrates the lock attachment piece 866. Alternatively, a structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 354. Further, the locking device 60 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685 is not screwed, or only by fixing the screw fixing portion 861 at the rear portion of the locking device 60 and the lock mounting hole 350. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 685 having the left and right side surfaces 685a and 685b. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 685a that is not in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 is attached. L-shaped base body (lock base body) is omitted, and a sliding frame 971 for a door frame and a main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 685a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and the first peripheral wall 290. It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 984. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[About the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the door frame 5 includes a door frame main body 100 formed in a square shape, a door lens unit 120, a reinforcing sheet metal 160, a glass unit 190, a dish unit 300, a security cover 210, and the like. Installed. A vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 having an opening area that occupies approximately 3/4 of the door frame main body 100 when viewed from the front is formed in an upper portion of the door frame main body 100. In other words, the door frame main body 100 formed of a synthetic resin in a frame shape is formed with a gaming window 101 in the upper part thereof, and a lower part of the gaming window 101 is a plate-like part. Note that circular speaker openings 102 that allow the speakers 144a and 144b to pass therethrough are formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101. A stop lever 108 for locking the stopper piece 194 of the glass unit 190 is rotatably provided below the speaker opening 102.

  In the door frame 5, the door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface of the gaming window 101, while the dish unit 300 is provided on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. A handle unit 318, which will be described later, protrudes and is fixed to one side (open side) of the dish unit 300. A reinforcing sheet metal 160 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 190 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101. Furthermore, the slide unit 230 corresponding to the handle unit 318, the mounting base 220, and the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 are attached to the back surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, respectively. A security cover 210 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 190.

  In the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passing port 103 through which a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 30 and 31) of the dish unit 300 passes is provided in the upper part on the pivot support side. Further, a lid opening 105 for attaching and detaching the side surface opening lid 383 (see FIGS. 30 and 31) is provided near the oblique center of the prize ball passing port 103. Further, a ball feed opening 104 for mounting the ball feed unit 226 is opened at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. A lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 868 to pass therethrough is further opened near the opening side of the ball feed opening 104.

  Further, a slide unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the slide unit 230 is formed at a position below the ball feed opening 104 on the back side of the plate-like portion below the game window 101. Further, engagement receiving pieces (not shown) for hooking the latching protrusions 195 of the glass unit 190 are formed at the lower left and right of the gaming window 101. A mounting opening 110 is formed on the side of the engagement receiving piece to which the mounting elastic piece 213 of the crime prevention cover 210 is mounted.

  Further, at the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, the engagement is inserted into the guide hole 436 (see FIG. 31) of the dish unit 300 toward the front (that is, the front side) of the door frame 5. A protrusion 111 is formed. On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101, a door frame protrusion 112 protruding rearward (that is, on the back side) of the door frame 5 is formed along the lower side of the door frame main body 100. . The door frame protruding piece 112 is engaged with engaging grooves 42 and 43 (see FIG. 1) formed in the main body frame 3, and an outer protrusion that is engaged at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured as a pair.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the structure of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part of the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door lens unit attached to the front side of the door frame. FIG. 27 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. FIG. 28 is a front view of the door frame when a member that irradiates the LED is removed from members constituting the speaker cover and the decorative member.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the door lens unit 120 includes reflectors 122, 130a, 130b, cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b, LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b, a lens cover 140, and a speaker 144a. 144b and the lens base body 121.

  More specifically, the front surfaces of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b are reflecting surfaces. The cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b are attached to the front surfaces of the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b, respectively. In addition, LED boards 137, 138a, and 138b are attached to the inside of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b, respectively. Furthermore, a light-transmissive lens cover 140 that covers the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b is provided in front of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b. The lens cover 140 is disposed with a lens base body 121 described later as a base, and a pair of left and right speakers 144a and 144b are attached to the upper portion of the lens cover 140.

  The lens base body 121 is formed of a synthetic resin so as to form an inner hollow triangular shape having a circular arc at the front and a linear shape at the rear in plan view and a rear surface (that is, a back surface) opened. An inverter board 136 that supplies a high-voltage current to the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b is housed and fixed in the hollow interior of the lens base body 121. Further, an upper reflector 122 having an L-shaped cross section is attached so as to contact the front and bottom surfaces of the lens base body 121. The upper reflector 122 is formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white, and has a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surface of the upper reflector 122 is a reflection surface that reflects light emitted from the upper cold cathode tube 132 and the upper LED substrate 137. Note that side reflectors 130a and 130b, which will be described later, are similarly formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white.

  Incidentally, electrode support portions 125 for supporting both ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 are formed at both ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively. Further, in order to support the upper cold cathode tube 132 at an appropriate interval, a cathode tube support piece 123 having a tip portion formed in a U shape is projected from the front surface of the upper reflector 122. This is because the central portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is bent into a "<" shape and is bent, so that the bent portion at the center is stressed and is easily damaged. is there. That is, by supporting the horizontally long upper cold cathode tube 132 not only by the electrode support portions 125 at the left and right ends but also by the cathode tube support piece 123 at an appropriate interval, the upper cold cathode tube 132 is preferably not damaged. Can be supported. Further, by supporting the upper cold cathode tube 132 so as not to move with the cathode tube support piece 123 in a state where the upper cold cathode tube 132 is sandwiched between heat-resistant rubber packings (not shown), a support structure that is more difficult to break. It can be.

  In addition, the electrode support portions 125 at the left and right ends are open at the top, and an electrode insertion hole (not shown) that is open to receive the end portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is formed in the peripheral wall facing inward. ing. On the other hand, rubber sleeves 133 that can be elastically deformed are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 to which wiring is connected. Then, the electrode cover 127 is fitted from above the electrode support 125 in a state where the rubber sleeve 133 is inserted from above into an electrode insertion hole (not shown) formed in the electrode support 125. As a result, the upper cold cathode tube 132 can be attached to the front surface of the upper reflector 122.

  Thus, the rubber sleeve 133 is attached to both ends of the upper reflector 122, and the rubber sleeve 133 is supported in the electrode insertion hole (not shown) of the electrode support portion 125 in a loosely fitted state. With this structure, even if the upper cold cathode tube 132 vibrates due to an impact or the like, when the rubber sleeve 133 absorbs the vibration, the end portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is swung at the electrode support portion 125 or The sliding stress is weakened by sliding. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper cold cathode tube 132 from being damaged at the electrode support portion 125 and the bent portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132. Note that speaker through holes 128a and 128b through which the speakers 144a and 144b penetrate are formed on the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively.

  By the way, the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122 are connected to the side reflectors 130a and 130b so as to hang down. The side reflectors 130a and 130b are also formed of a polycarbonate resin colored white like the upper reflector 122, and have a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surfaces of the side reflectors 130a and 130b are reflecting surfaces that reflect the light emitted from the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b and the side LED substrates 138a and 138b. The side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b attached in front of the side reflectors 130a and 130b are formed in a straight line extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, electrode support portions 131a and 131b that support the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are formed at two locations on the upper and lower ends of the side reflectors 130a and 130b, respectively. Of course, the structure for supporting the side cold-cathode tubes 134a and 134b with the electrode support portions 131a and 131b is the same as that of the upper cold-cathode tube 132 and the electrode support portion 125 described above. That is, rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are attached to the end portions of the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b, and the rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are in contact with and supported by the electrode support portions 131a and 131b. . Thereby, it can be set as the support structure which is hard to be damaged even if the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b vibrate.

  In addition, LED boards 137, 138a, and 138b on which a large number of LEDs are mounted are attached to the inner side of the upper reflector 122 and the side reflectors 130a and 130b (positions that border the gaming window 101). The inner peripheral surface of the lens cover 140 described later is decorated by the LEDs mounted on the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b.

  The lens base body 121, the upper reflector 122 to which the upper cold cathode tube 132 is attached, and the side reflectors 130a and 130b to which the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are attached are arranged on the back side of the lens cover 140. Fixed. The lens cover 140 includes an upper lens cover portion 141 and side lens cover portions 142a and 142b as a cover body made of a transmissive resin. The upper lens cover portion 141 is a cover body provided corresponding to the upper reflector 122 to which the lens base body 121 and the upper cold cathode tube 132 are attached. The side lens cover parts 142a and 142b are cover bodies provided corresponding to the side reflectors 130a and 130b to which the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are attached, respectively.

  More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 141 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are both formed as a white lens portion, and a front bulge portion having a wedge-shaped cross section is formed of a synthetic resin. Further, on the rear end side of the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b, a red lens portion 150 formed of a synthetic resin having a different color from that of the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b borders the gaming window 101. Each is formed along the peripheral surface. In the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b, the white lens portion and the red lens portion 150 are connected and formed in a series. The red lens portion 150 is illuminated by a plurality of LEDs mounted linearly on the upper LED substrate 137 and the side LED substrates 138a and 138b.

  By the way, the upper lens cover part 141 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section in which the inside is hollow and the rear side is open, and is configured in a boomerang shape in plan view. The inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip end portion of the upper lens cover portion 141 is close to the above-described upper cold cathode tube 132 formed in a “<” shape. Further, a front lens portion 141c colored in silver is bonded to the outer side of the wedge-shaped tip portion of the upper lens cover portion 141. With this structure, the front bulging surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 141 is illuminated by the upper cold cathode tube 132.

  Further, the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are similar to the upper lens cover portion 141 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. However, the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are configured in a boomerang shape having a wedge-shaped protrusion amount smaller than that of the upper lens cover portion 141 in a side view and having a gentle curve as a whole. Further, the inner surfaces of the wedge-shaped tips of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are close to the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b formed in the above-described linear shape. Furthermore, a front lens portion 142c colored in silver is bonded to the outside of the wedge-shaped tip portions of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b. With this structure, the front bulging surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire side lens cover portion 142a, 142b is illuminated by the side cold cathode tubes 134a, 134b.

  In the above-described embodiment, the light source disposed in the space defined by the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b is the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b. Then, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b corresponding to these light emitting sources were molded and connected with synthetic resins having different colors (in this case, white and red). Specifically, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b corresponding to the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b are white lens portions, while the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b corresponding to the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b are red. The lens unit 150 was used. In this manner, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b can be molded with a structure and color that are suitably irradiated by the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b. Of course, different types of light emitting sources are not limited to the combination of the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b, and both may be configured as LED substrates.

  By the way, speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b for attaching the speakers 144a and 144b are formed in a connecting portion between the upper lens cover portion 141 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b of the lens cover 140. A speaker cone 145a is provided in front of the speakers 144a and 144b. Therefore, the cone support that supports the speaker cone 145a is attached from the back surface of the speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b using a predetermined attachment member (not shown). The front surfaces of the speakers 144a and 144b attached to the speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b are covered by speaker covers 146a and 146b having mesh-like covers 147a and 147b (punching metal).

  Further, decoration member attachment areas 148a and 148b are formed below the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b, and the decoration members 149a and 149b are attached to the decoration member attachment areas 148a and 148b. The decorative members 149a and 149b have shapes similar to the speaker covers 146a and 146b described above. With this structure, when the lens cover 140 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, it is possible to give an impression that the upper left and right and the lower left and right of the lens cover 140 are balanced.

  Incidentally, the speaker covers 146a, 146b and the decorative members 149a, 149b not only simply cover the front of the speakers 144a, 144b or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 140, but the surroundings are light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

  Specifically, in the speaker covers 146a and 146b, the LED substrate 152 is in close contact with the back surface of the cover base plate 151 formed of a synthetic resin in a flat plate shape. The speaker frame 154 is covered with an inner lens and a front lens (not shown) with the speaker frame 154 built in front of the cover base plate 151. Further, the front surfaces of the speaker covers 146a and 146b are closed with mesh covers 147a and 147b.

  Further, inside the decorative members 149a and 149b, the LED substrate 156 is in close contact with the back surface of the decorative base plate 155 formed into a flat plate shape with a synthetic resin. The decoration base plate 155 is covered with an inner lens and a decoration lens (not shown) with the decoration frame 158 built in front of the decoration base plate 155. Further, the front surfaces of the decorative members 149a and 149b are closed by the decorative plates 159a and 159b.

  Thus, the speaker covers 146a, 146b and the decorative members 149a, 149b are light decorations by the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LED boards 137, 138a, 138b in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5. Separately, the four corners of the door frame 5 are mainly light-decorated. Therefore, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a strong tendency to arrange only speakers. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, since the light decoration around the speaker is not performed, the light decoration around the outer periphery of the game window 101 has an impression. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery of the door frame 5 excluding the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively light-decorated.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 161, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 162, an open side reinforcing sheet metal 163, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 that are fastened with screws or the like. It is configured in a shape. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 is attached along the rear surface of the upper side of the door frame main body 100. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 is attached along the shaft support side side part back surface of the door frame main body 100. The open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 is attached along the open-side side portion back surface of the door frame main body 100. The lower reinforcing metal plate 164 is attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the game window 101 of the door frame main body 100.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the width dimension of the door frame body 100. And the both ends of the long side in the upper side reinforcement sheet metal 161 are the upper bending protrusion piece 165 and the lower bending protrusion piece 166 which each bent toward the back. The upper bent protrusion 165 and the lower bent protrusion 166 are fitted in the upper crime prevention double groove 33 (see FIG. 11) of the main body frame 3.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 is also formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame main body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 are a shaft support side short bent projecting piece 172 and a shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 167 which are bent backward. However, the shaft support side short bent protrusion 172 that is the inner bent protrusion is extremely short, while the shaft support side L-shaped bent protrusion 167 that is the outer bent protrusion is the tip of the bent portion. Is formed in an L shape. The shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 167 is configured such that a tip portion bent in an L shape contacts the inside of the shaft support side portion 49 of the main body frame 3 described above.

  The opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame main body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 are an open-side outer bent protrusion 173 and an open-side inner bent protrusion 174 that are bent rearward. The open-side outer bent protrusion 173 is inserted into the side crime prevention groove 34 (see 11) of the main body frame 3 described above, and the open-side inner bent protrusion 174 is the security recess 35 of the main body frame 3. (See FIG. 11). Engagement openings 175 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 so that the door frame hook portion 973 of the locking device 60 can enter. A hook cover 176 with which the door frame hook portion 973 engages is fixed so as to cover the back side of these engagement openings 175.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the width of the door frame body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 are a lower bent protrusion piece 178 and an upper bent protrusion piece 179 which are bent toward the rear. However, the lower bent protrusion 178 is formed by bending the lower long side edge of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 toward the rear, and the upper bent protrusion 179 is the upper long side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164. The both sides of the edge are bent rearward, and the portion sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 179 on both sides is a vertical bent protrusion 180 extending in the vertical direction. Yes. The vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed in a concave shape so that the upper end edge shape thereof matches the lower end shape of a unit frame 191 of a glass unit 190 described later. Then, when the glass unit 190 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the upper end piece of the vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed along the substantially central outer periphery in the width direction of the unit frame 191 of the glass unit 190. The mating groove 200 is engaged. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 177 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit>
Next, the glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the glass unit 190 is configured by bonding a unit frame 191 and a glass plate 201 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate). The unit frame 191 is a frame having an annular vertically long octagon shape molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101. The glass plate 201 is two transparent plates disposed on the front and rear surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 191.

  Stopping pieces 194 are formed on the left and right sides of the upper portion of the unit frame 191 so as to project outward. In addition, on the left and right sides of the lower part of the unit frame 191, hooking protrusions 195 are formed so as to protrude toward the outer side of the ring. The stopper piece 194 and the latching protrusion 195 are for attaching the glass unit 190 to the back surface of the door frame 5 as described above. Note that the glass unit 190 of the present embodiment is integrally formed with a unit frame 191 with a pair of security projection plates 199 (see FIG. 9) that project obliquely upward in a front view. Therefore, when the glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame 5, the security protruding plate 199 is connected to the lateral positions of the speakers 144a and 144b without any gap.

<Security cover>
Next, the crime prevention cover 210 provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 190 described above and prevents an unauthorized tool from entering the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the security cover 210 is formed in a flat plate shape with a transparent synthetic resin so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 190 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 162 and 163. And the upper side part of the crime prevention cover 210 is formed as the arc-shaped contact recessed part 211 along the downward circular arc surface of the inner rail unit 462, and after crime prevention toward the back along the contact recessed part 211 A projecting piece 214 is projected.

  The rear surface of the crime prevention cover 210 is provided with a crime prevention rear end projecting piece 215 that protrudes obliquely on the rear surface of the door frame 5 with the door frame 5 attached thereto. Yes. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 210, the security cover 210 is attached to the door frame 5 and the pre-crime projection piece 212 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 191 and both lower ends of the unit frame 191. A mounting elastic piece 213 formed in a U-shape is formed so as to project forward.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the mounting base 220 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100. And like the crime prevention cover 210, it is formed in the horizontal rectangular parallelepiped shape which the front open | released with the transparent synthetic resin. A ball flight guide surface 227 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 220, and the launch rail 38 is held between the ball flight guide surface 227 and the plate portion 32 when the door frame 5 is closed. Thereby, the ball launched from the launch rail 38 is smoothly guided to the game area 20.

  By the way, an opening for a prize ball passage opening that penetrates a rearward protruding portion of a prize ball passage opening covering portion (not shown) formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is provided at the upper part of the mounting base 220 according to the present embodiment. 221 is formed. A ball feed unit mounting recess 222 for mounting the ball feed unit 226 is formed in the lower part on the open side of the mounting table 220. In addition, the area | region of the diagonal direction from this ball feed unit attachment recessed part 222 is the above-mentioned ball flight guide surface 227. The ball feed unit 226 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 222 is provided with a ball feed member (not shown) that swings in response to the reciprocating motion difference of the hitting ball of the launching device 57. By this swinging movement of the ball feeding member, the balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 38. Further, a lid opening 223 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 383 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 220. Further, a vertical wall 224 is formed on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 220. When the security cover 210 is attached, the standing wall 224 is in contact with the front surface of the security cover 210 so as to restrict the lower part of the security cover 210 from moving forward.

<Frame decoration relay terminal board>
As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting table 220. Further, a relay board cover 241 is attached so as to cover the rear surface of the frame decoration relay terminal board 240. The frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 includes an electrical component and electrical components (cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b, LED boards 137, 138a, 138b, speakers 144a, 144b, 341a, 341b, handles provided on the door frame 5. Wiring from a switch, a ball rental unit 324, an operation button unit 326, and the like provided in the unit 318 are collectively connected. Then, the wiring from the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 is connected to the payout control board of the payout control board box 55 and the main control board box 25 via the relay board incorporated in the board unit 54 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. Connected to the main control board.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is a front view of the dish unit provided on the front surface of the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the dish unit, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the dish unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the dish unit 300, members such as a lower speaker unit 330, a dish body 360, a second ball extraction link unit 400, and a dish lid body 430 are attached to a unit frame 301 constituting the appearance. Is configured. Specifically, the lower speaker unit 330 is attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, while the dish 360 is provided so as to face the upper surface of the unit frame 301 above the lower speaker unit 330. The second ball removal link unit 400 performs the ball removal operation of the ball removal valve 375 provided in the dish body 360, while the dish lid body 430 closes the rear surface of the unit frame 301.

  First, the unit frame 301 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, in the unit frame 301, the upper surface cover portion 302 and the front surface cover portion 303 are integrally formed of synthetic resin. The upper surface cover portion 302 has a semi-elliptical shape in plan view in which the upper surface is gently inclined toward the near side, and constitutes the upper surface of the unit frame 301. Further, the front cover portion 303 continuously extends from the front side to the rear side and constitutes the front and bottom surfaces of the unit frame 301. A vertical cover portion 302 a that contacts the front side of the door frame main body 100 is also integrally formed on the back side of the upper surface cover portion 302. The vertical cover portion 302a has a ball rental button unit opening 323 at the center thereof. The ball rental unit 324 can be attached to the ball rental button unit opening 323 from the back side. When a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the lending unit 324 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like.

  Further, a dish body upper surface opening 305 is opened from the rising portion of the vertical cover portion 302a of the upper surface cover portion 302 toward the front. An operation button unit concave space 306 is formed at the front center of the dish upper surface opening 305. Further, an LED decoration space portion 307 is formed along the front end portions of the left and right upper surface cover portions 302 from the operation button unit concave space portion 306. Further, a first ball extraction button opening 313 a for attaching the first ball extraction button 313 is provided on the side of the dish upper surface opening 305. The dish body upper surface opening 305 is formed in the same shape as the storage part 361 of the dish body 360 and the upper surface opening of the guide passage part 362 communicating therewith. When the dish body 360 is attached to the unit frame 301, the storage section 361 and the guide passage section 362 of the dish body 360 face the dish body upper surface opening 305.

  In addition, a space portion forming member 310 is attached to the operation button unit concave space portion 306, and the operation button unit 326 is attached to the space portion forming member 310. The space forming member 310 has a wiring housing opening 310b. The wiring storage opening 310b stores a connector 310a for wiring to be connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the bottom surface of the operation button unit 326 when the operation button unit 326 is inserted into the space forming member 310. It is. The operation button unit 326 includes a plurality (three in the illustrated example) of operation buttons 327. The plurality of operation buttons 327 are operated when the player participates in the game content performed on the effect display device 115 or the like.

  Further, the first ball removal button 313 is attached to the upper surface cover portion 302 via a sliding support member 314 attached to the first ball removal button opening 313a of the upper surface cover portion 302. The member 314 is slid in the vertical direction. When the first ball removal button 313 is pressed by the player, the rotation member 366 positioned below the first ball removal button 313 rotates about the rotation shaft 367 in the clockwise direction. Then, in conjunction with the operation of the rotating member 366, the slide valve 365 linked to the lower end of the rotating member 366 moves. The slide valve 365 is always biased by the spring 369 and is in a position where the downstream end of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 is closed. When the first ball removal button 313 is moved as described above, the first passage extraction portion is retracted from the guide passage portion 362 and is continuous to the downstream side of the guide passage portion 362 and the guide passage portion 362. 364 is communicated. Thereby, the balls stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 can be extracted from the dish body 360. This structure will be further described in detail when the dish 360 is described.

  Next, the configuration of the front cover portion 303 of the unit frame 301 will be described. As described above, the front cover portion 303 forms the front surface and the bottom surface of the unit frame 301 continuously from the front side of the upper surface cover portion 302. Therefore, the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303 is inclined to the back side as the central portion protrudes most forward and moves left and right. Speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed on the left and right sides of the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303 (that is, the central protrusion). The speaker openings 315a and 315b are covered with a mesh-like speaker cover 316a and 316b (punching metal). Then, two speakers 341a and 341b that are housed and fixed in the lower speaker unit 330 are located behind the speaker covers 316a and 316b. Note that the speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed in an inclined surface that inclines from the protruding portion at the center of the front surface of the front cover portion 303 toward the back side. Therefore, when the unit frame 301 is viewed from the front, the unit frame 301 is opened outward from the central vertical line of the pachinko machine 1. And the front decoration board 304 is attached so that the protrusion from the center of the front surface of the front cover part 303 may be bordered to the upper and lower opening edges of the speaker openings 315a and 315b.

  Further, a handle attachment hole 317 for attaching the handle unit 318 is formed below the open side end of the front cover portion 303. As is well known, the handle unit 318 is for adjusting the resilience of the hit ball. Therefore, the handle unit 318 is provided with a rotation operation member 318a that can be operated by the player. When the turning operation member 318a is turned, the engaging cam 319 fixed to the rear end of the turning shaft is turned. As described above, by converting the rotational movement of the engagement cam 319 into the slide movement movement of the slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 of the slide unit 230, the strength of the elastic force of the launching device 57 can be adjusted. It is like that.

  Here, the second ball removal link unit 400 includes a second ball removal button 401, a pressing swing member (not shown), a first link 414, and a second link 419. The pressing swing member (not shown) is a member that swings when the second ball extraction button 401 is locked. The first link 414 and the second link 419 are members for transmitting a pressing operation of a pressing swing member (not shown) as a ball swinging motion of the ball release valve 375.

  A second ball extraction button opening 320 for opening the second ball extraction button 401 constituting a part of the second ball extraction link unit 400 is opened at the center lower portion of the front cover portion 303. In addition, a ball discharge port for discharging a ball, which has been removed according to the operation of the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401, to the outside of the dish unit 300 is provided at the center of the bottom surface of the front cover portion 303. 322 is formed. A fastener insertion hole 325 for attaching the operation button unit 326 is formed obliquely in front of the ball discharge port 322. In the present embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 313 and 401 of the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401 are provided for the following reason. That is, all the spheres stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish 360 can be extracted by operating the first ball release button 313, but are aligned in a line at the guide passage portion 362. It takes some time to remove the sphere. On the other hand, since the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 361 of the dish body 360 can be quickly extracted from the large-diameter extraction opening 388 by operating the second extraction button 401, the extraction time is shortened. Can do. In other words, it is possible to arbitrarily select the length of time that the player spends removing the ball. In addition, when a big hit is made during the game and a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, if the game is continued with this being left, the saucer full tank switch 730 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 44). ) Is expected to work. Then, due to the operation of the saucer full tank switch 730, the payout operation is stopped or the ballistic operation is stopped, and there is a possibility that the game cannot be continued despite the big hit. In such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 401, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained, The game can be continued.

  Next, the configuration of the dish lid 430 that closes the back surface of the unit frame 301 of the dish unit 300 will be described. The dish lid 430 is formed of a synthetic resin as a rectangular flat plate so as to close almost the entire back surface of the unit frame 301. In addition, a ball escape passage rear bar 433 is formed integrally and projectingly at substantially the center of the front side of the dish lid 430. A curved upper guide rod 434 and a lower guide rod 435 are formed on the rear ball passage 433 so as to guide the ball upward and downward. Then, when the dish lid 430 is attached to the back surface of the unit frame 301, it is integrated by facing the ball extraction passage front rod 337 and the ball extraction passage rear rod 433 formed in the speaker box body 331 of the lower speaker unit 330. This constitutes a ball passage in the dish. At this time, the guide rod 338 formed on the ball extraction passage front rod 337 is positioned between the upper guide rod 434 and the lower guide rod 435 of the ball extraction passage rear rod 433. For this reason, the in-dish ball extraction passage is formed in a meandering shape, and the extracted ball is discharged to the outside from the ball discharge port 322 while weakening the momentum.

In addition, an opening lid attachment window 432 is formed in the dish lid body 430 on the upper side of the rear punching passage 433. Further, a square cylindrical award ball connecting rod 431 protrudes from the upper back of one end side (the pivot support side) of the dish lid 430. When the dish unit 300 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the prize ball communication rod 431 penetrates the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the lower part of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100 and It penetrates to the back side. Then, with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the end of the prize ball passage formed in the main body frame 3 faces in a superposed manner. The opening lid attaching window 432 is an opening for detachably attaching the side opening lid 383 that closes the side wall opening (not shown) of the second ball extraction passage portion (not shown) of the dish body 360. And it is provided in the position corresponding to the opening 105 for lid | covers (refer FIG.25 and FIG.26) formed in the door frame main body 100. FIG.

[About Game Direction Unit]
The configuration of the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32 is a front view of the game effect unit. FIG. 33 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game effect unit. FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the game effect unit. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the game effect unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the game effect unit 4 of this embodiment includes a front component member 680, a game panel 409 as a game board part, a panel holder 540, a back unit 510 as a wide space holding part, and a panel back It mainly includes a plate 504, a center accessory 620, a substrate holder 505, and an effect display device 115. The “back unit 510” corresponds to the “wide area holding unit” of the present invention.

  The game panel 409 is a plate-like panel made of a transparent resin having a size corresponding to the game area 20. The panel holder 540 is a frame-shaped holder made of a resin to which the game panel 409 is detachably fitted. The front component member 680 is disposed on the front side of the panel holder 540 and sandwiches the game panel 409 in cooperation with the panel holder 540. Further, the front component member 680 includes a guide rail 482 that partitions the game area 20 and guides the game ball into the game area 20. The guide rail 482 includes an outer rail unit 472 and an inner rail unit 462. A center accessory 620 described later is attached to the approximate center of the game panel 409.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 includes a plate-like panel back plate 504 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540, and a substrate disposed on the rear surface side of the panel back plate 504. A holder 505 is provided. The substrate holder 505 has a box shape with the front and upper sides opened, and the peripheral control substrate box 24 and the main control substrate box 25 are supported on the rear side. Specifically, the peripheral control board box 24 in which the peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 45) is housed is mounted on the board holder 505, and the main control is performed while being superimposed on the rear side of the peripheral control board box 24. A main control board box 25 in which a board 710 (see FIG. 44) is housed is mounted. The board holder 505 is electrically connected to a main control board or the like in the main control board box 25 supported on the rear side of the board holder 505 and can be slidably connected from the rear. Is further provided with a panel relay terminal plate 750 for supporting the above.

  Furthermore, the game panel 409 is further provided with a back unit 510 attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 540, and an effect display device 115 including an LCD capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. The back unit 510 has a frame-like box-shaped back box 514 that can form a wide space of a predetermined volume behind the game panel 409. The effect display device 115 is detachably supported by the back box 514 so as to close the opening 514a formed on the rear surface side of the back box 514.

  A display device control board box 119 having a display device control board 816 (see FIG. 44) for controlling the effect display device 115 and the like is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. In addition, the effect display device 115 is provided with a larger one (for example, about 21 inches) than the effect display device used in the conventional pachinko machine.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 11, 32, and 33, the front component member 680 has an arc-shaped opening 680 a that connects the upper end of the outer rail unit 472 to the lower end of the inner rail unit 462 in a clockwise direction. The game area 20 having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front is defined by the guide rail 482 and the opening 680a. The guide ball 482 guides the game ball launched along the launch rail 38 by the game ball launching device 57 to the upper part of the game area 20. In addition, a connection passage portion 477 that is connected to a rail connection member 44 that is provided as an extension of the firing rail 38 is formed obliquely at the downstream end of the outer rail unit 472. A foul port 473 is formed on the upstream side adjacent to the connection passage portion 477.

Furthermore, a security protrusion 465 (see FIG. 11) is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail unit 472 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The crime prevention projection 465 overlaps with the rear end projection piece 215 (see FIG. 23) of the crime prevention rear end protruding from the crime prevention cover 210 (see FIG. 23) in a state where the door frame 5 is closed. This prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5.

  Also, at the center of the lower portion along the inner rail unit 462 (that is, the most downstream side in the game area 20), none of the winning ports such as the start ports 600, 602, 604 and the general winning ports 614 were won. An out port 471 for discharging the game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. Between the inner rail unit 462 and the outer rail unit 472 from the out port 471 to the backflow prevention member 463, a guide passage through which the hit ball is guided to the game area 20 is configured. Then, the hit ball that has flowed back through the guide passage without reaching the game area 20 is taken into the foul port 473 and discharged again to the dish body 360 (see FIG. 2) of the dish unit 300. Further, a rail security groove 464 (see FIG. 11) is formed in the front component member 680 on the way from the out port 471 of the inner rail unit 462 to the stop portion 476. The rail crime prevention groove 464 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime protrusion piece 214 (see FIG. 23) protruding from the crime prevention cover 210 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed enters. Then, by the uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 464 and the post-crime projection piece 214, the piano is overlapped in the vertical direction and inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the open side. Finally, the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as wires is prevented.

  Further, a substrate holder 505 is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the back unit 510. The substrate holder 505 is formed with a space so as to collect the winning balls in front of the substrate holder 505, and a drop opening (not shown) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 471 and further communicates with an out ball passage (not shown) formed in the substrate unit 54. The substrate holder 505 has a peripheral control board box 24 for storing a peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 45) for controlling a gaming operation and a main control board box for storing a main control board 710 (see FIG. 44) on the back surface thereof. 25 and a panel relay terminal plate 750 (see FIG. 44) for connecting to a payout control board, a power supply board, and the like provided in the board unit 54 are attached. The panel relay terminal plate 750 is provided with drawer connectors 751 and 752 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 731 and 732 provided on the board unit 54 only by attaching the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3. The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

  Further, the center accessory 620 provided on the game panel 409 is an accessory that is formed in the game area 20 with various decorative bodies and winning holes, and is attached from the front side of the game panel 409. ing. Specifically, as described above, the game panel 409 is appropriately formed with an opening 409e for attaching the center accessory 620, and the center accessory 620 is fitted into each opening 409e from the front side of the game panel 409. Later, it is fixed with screws.

  The center accessory 620 has a frame-shaped decorative body 622 as a main component, and the effect display device 115 disposed behind can be visually recognized through an opening 621 formed in the center of the frame-shaped decorative body 622. ing. However, a transparent plate 621 a made of a transparent resin is formed in the opening 621 so as to cover the entire back surface of the frame-shaped decorative body 622. Therefore, from the front side of the game effect unit 4, the effect display device 115 can be visually recognized through the opening 621 (transparent plate 621 a), while the game ball can be viewed through the opening 621 (transparent plate 621 a). It is impossible to enter behind the center actor 620.

  In the state where the center combination 620 is attached to the game panel 409, the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a form substantially the same plane (become substantially flush). Therefore, in the game effect unit 4, light can pass in the back direction or the near side beyond the position where the game panel 409 is disposed (the plane position formed by the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a). In principle, the game ball is prevented from entering beyond the position where the game panel 409 is disposed (the plane position formed by the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a).

  Further, the rear unit 510 is configured such that the effect display device 115 is detachably attached to the rear unit 510. Specifically, the back unit 510 is formed so as to be separated from the upper and lower sides on one side (left side in rear view) extending vertically on the inner periphery of the opening 514a formed in a substantially rectangular shape in the back box 514. Two attachment / detachment grooves 516 and an attachment / detachment mechanism 518 having an attachment / detachment lever are provided on the rear surface of the back box 514 on the opposite side to the attachment / detachment groove 516 (right side in the rear view).

On the other hand, the effect display device 115 has an outer shape formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and two detachable protrusions 116 formed at positions separated from each other in the vertical direction on one of the left and right side surfaces (the left side surface when viewed from the back). An attachment / detachment locking portion 118 is provided on the other side surface (the side surface on the right side in the rear view) opposite to the side surface on which the attachment / detachment protrusion 116 is formed, and is formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction. These attachment / detachment protrusion 116 and attachment / detachment locking portion 118 both protrude outward, are formed so as to correspond to the attachment / detachment groove 516 and attachment / detachment mechanism 518 of the back unit 510, and the effect display device 115 is attached to the back side. The unit 510 is detachable.

  Furthermore, the wide space of the back unit 510 is provided with a rotation distribution accessory and a decoration accessory which will be described later. Here, the back unit 510 is arranged such that the wide space of the back unit 510 is formed over the entire back side of the game panel 409. Therefore, the wide space of the back unit 510 functions as an effect area formed over the entire back side of the game panel 409. In addition, a plurality of electrical components and light emitters described later are disposed on the front side of the back unit 510. A lamp driving board box 508 that houses a lamp driving board 850 (see FIG. 45) that is connected to these accessories, electrical components, and the like and controls driving is disposed at the lower back of the back unit 510. .

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 11, a positioning recess 466 that fits into a unit positioning projection 37 formed on the main body frame 3 is formed on one side (shaft support side) of the game effect unit 4. On the other side (open side), a game effect unit stopper 467 inserted into a unit stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 3 is provided. When the game effect unit stopper 467 is pushed and fixed, its end is inserted into the unit stopper insertion hole. Thus, in order to fix the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3, after inserting the game effect unit 4 from an oblique direction so that the positioning recess 466 fits into the unit positioning protrusion 37 from the front side of the main body frame 3. Then, the entire game effect unit 4 is pushed into the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, and the game effect unit stop 467 that is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end is inserted into the unit stop. Insert it into the hole and fix it. Thereafter, the game effect unit fixing tool 46 that is rotatably provided on the upper front surface of the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game panel 409. Thus, the entire game effect unit 4 including the game panel 409 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game effect unit 4, the procedure may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure. However, in the case of the illustrated embodiment, a fastening portion 469 is formed by cutting out a part of the lower end side on the lower side of the game panel 409, and is formed on the fastening portion 469 and the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3. It is also possible to prevent the game effect unit 4 from being removed from the main body frame 3 by fastening the fastening hole 41 to be performed with a fastener (not shown).

  Furthermore, the drawer connectors 751 and 752 provided on the game effect unit 4 side and the drawer connectors 731 and 732 provided on the main body frame 3 side, when the game effect unit 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front, Each of them is disposed at a position where they can be fitted to each other. Further, the board unit 54 is formed with a fitting hole 733 (see FIG. 13) extending in the back direction at a substantially intermediate position between the drawer connectors 731 and 732. On the other hand, the panel relay terminal plate 750 is formed with a fitting protrusion (not shown) extending rearward at a substantially intermediate position between the drawer connectors 751 and 752. With this structure, when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 from the front surface, the fitting protrusion (not shown) is fitted into the fitting hole 733 while being guided. At the same time, the drawer connectors 751 and 752 on the game effect unit 4 side are positioned so as to face the drawer connectors 731 and 732 on the main body frame 3 side. Therefore, since the drawer connectors 751 and 752 are interconnected to the drawer connectors 731 and 732 simply by attaching the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3, it is necessary to carry out electrical connection work from the back of the pachinko machine 1. Work efficiency is improved.

  Note that the game panel 409 is formed with speaker cutouts 468 on the upper left and right sides of the game panel 409 so as to be able to receive the rearward protruding portions of the speakers 144a and 144b provided on the back surface of the door frame 5. Further, a passage cutout portion 478 into which a part of the passage for discharging the prize ball is inserted is formed obliquely below the side of the foul port 473.

  As described above, in the game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment, at least the game panel 409 is configured by the transparent member, and the electrical decorations and the like arranged behind the game panel 409 can be visually recognized. In other words, it is not necessary to provide an electric decoration or the like in the game area, and the area where the game ball can actually flow down in the game area 20 can be widened as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Further, since the game panel 409 in which the game area 20 is formed is configured by a transparent member, the player can visually recognize what is arranged behind the game panel 409. For example, a large effect display device 115 extending over the entire game area 20 is arranged behind the game panel 409 to display an unprecedented large effect image, and various effects and decorations are displayed in depth. It can be set as the structure of the game production | presentation unit 4 with the sense of depth which is arrange | positioned in the direction and has not existed until now. Thereby, it becomes possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract the player's interest.

<Assembly structure of game production unit>
Here, the assembly structure of the main members (the front component member 680, the game panel 409, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, and the board holder 505) constituting the game effect unit 4 described above will be specifically described. FIG. 36 is an enlarged front perspective view of the game effect unit excluding the center accessory and the back unit. FIG. 37 is a rear perspective enlarged view of the game effect unit excluding the center combination and the back unit. FIG. 38 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the game effect unit excluding the center accessory and the back unit. FIG. 39 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the game effect unit shown in FIGS. 36 and 37 as viewed from the front. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective enlarged view of the game effect unit shown in FIGS. 36 and 37 as seen from the back.

In the following FIGS. 36 to 40, the assembly structure of the game effect unit 4 will be described except for the center accessory 620 and the back unit 510 for easy understanding. In addition, since the shape, position, size, and the like of the opening 409e in the game panel 409 vary depending on the structure of the center accessory 620 attached to the opening 409e, the opening 409e is not shown here. However, in FIG. 38, only the back box 514 is schematically illustrated among the components of the back unit 510 in order to explain the mounting structure of the back unit 510 to the game panel 409.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 36 to 40, the front component member 680 is provided with a plurality of positioning fixing bosses 680c and positioning protrusions 680d that protrude rearward on the rear surface side. The positioning fixing boss 680c and the positioning projection 680d can be positioned with the panel holder 540 and the substrate holder 505 disposed on the rear side, as will be described in detail later. A plurality of positioning protrusions 680d are also provided on the rear surface side of the inner rail unit 462, and are fitted and fixed in an inner rail fixing hole 409d of a game panel 409 described later.

  The game panel 409 in the game effect unit 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 20, and is formed of a transparent resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin. . Note that the gaming panel 409 is thinner than the panel holder 540 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when an obstacle nail (see FIG. 38) is implanted. .

  The game panel 409 includes a plurality of fitting holes 409a that are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the upper portion and are formed of round holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes that are disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the left and right lower portions and extend in the front-rear direction. 409b is provided. The fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b are disposed outside the game area 20 and are positioned with the panel holder 540.

  In addition, the game panel 409 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 409c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 409c has a shape in which approximately half of the thickness of the game panel 409 is cut out, and is disposed outside the game area 20 as well as the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b. The panel holder 540 and the game panel 409 are engaged and fixed.

  Furthermore, the game panel 409 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 409d at predetermined positions. The inner rail unit 462 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion 680d protruding from the rear side of the inner rail unit 462 into the inner rail fixing hole 409d.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 38 in an enlarged manner, the game panel 409 has a lower hole 409f for planting the obstacle nail 410 so as to penetrate the game panel 409. The lower hole 409f The inner diameter of the hanger 410 is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the obstacle nail 410 on the planting side. A plurality of lower holes 409f are drilled at predetermined positions in the game panel 409, and obstacle nails 410 are implanted into the lower holes 409f from the front side using an obstacle nail planting device (not shown). A large number of obstacle nails 410 are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

  The obstacle nail 410 according to the present embodiment has a head diameter of 4 to 5 mm and a total length of 25 to 30 mm. And the driving | running | working part formed in the axial part of the obstruction nail 410 is rounded at the front-end | tip, and the helical part cut | disconnected helically is formed. That is, since the tip shape of the driving portion of the obstacle nail 410 is rounded, the obstacle nail 410 can be easily inserted into the small-diameter pilot hole 409f. Furthermore, the obstacle nail 410 can be easily embedded in the game panel 409 by the twisted portion formed in the driving portion of the obstacle nail 410. The depth at which the obstacle nail 410 is implanted with respect to the game panel 409 (so-called driving dimension) is preferably about 10 mm.

  Further, on the front side of the game panel 409 (that is, the surface on which the game area 20 is formed), in addition to the many obstacle nails 410, a windmill (not shown) is disposed at an appropriate position. Further, the game panel 409 is appropriately formed with an opening 409e (not shown) having a predetermined shape so that the front component member 680 having the guide rail 78, the frame-shaped center accessory 620, and the like are fixed by screws. Has been.

  By the way, when the gaming panel 409 is a transparent resin plate formed by extrusion, the material may be taken so that the vertical direction of the gaming panel 409 is inclined by about 45 degrees with respect to the extrusion direction. Thereby, the dot matrix of the effect display device 115 arranged behind the game panel 409 interferes with a plurality of fine molding marks formed by extrusion molding, and the occurrence of moire is suppressed as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 from being difficult to see due to moire.

Subsequently, the panel holder 540 in the game effect unit 4 has a substantially square shape with a size including the game panel 409 in a front view, and is a member made of wooden plywood in the game effect unit of a conventional pachinko machine (for example, a game effect). It is made of a thermoplastic resin having a thickness (in this example, about 20 mm) substantially the same as the thickness of the unit base or the like. The panel holder 540 is detachably fitted with a game panel 409 and is fitted with a fitting step 540a that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side. The inside of the fitting step 540a is substantially the same size as the game area 20. Now, it mainly includes a through-hole 540b penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The fitting step portion 540a of the panel holder 540 has a depth from the front surface substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 409, and the front surface of the game panel 409 fitted to the fitting step portion 540a is the panel holder 540. It is designed to be substantially flush with the front surface of the. In addition, the fitting step portion 540a has a front inner peripheral surface that has a predetermined amount of clearance C with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 409. The clearance C can absorb the expansion and contraction even if the game panel 409 expands and contracts relatively due to a change in temperature or a change with time. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with an engaged portion that engages with the engagement step portion 409c at a position corresponding to the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409. More specifically, the engaged portion disposed in the fitting step portion 540a on the lower side of the panel holder 540 corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 409c in the game panel 409, and is in contact with the front surface of the fitting step portion 540a. An engagement protrusion that extends a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 540 with a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409 to be inserted therebetween. 540c is formed. On the other hand, the engaged portion disposed in the fitting step portion 540a on the upper side of the panel holder 540 corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 409c in the game panel 409, and projects forward from the front surface of the fitting step portion 540a. The engaging claw portion 540d is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 409c. The engagement claw portion 540d has such a size that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 540. By engaging the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409 with the engagement protrusion 540c and the engagement claw portion 540d, the panel holder 540 can hold the game panel 409 in a detachable manner. .

  Further, the panel holder 540 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b formed in the game panel 409 fitted and supported by the fitting step portion 540a, from the front surface of the fitting step portion 540a. A plurality of projecting pins 540e that extend forward and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b of the game panel 409 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 540e into the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b of the game panel 409, the panel holder 540 and the game panel 409 can be positioned relative to each other.

  The panel holder 540 is formed with a boss insertion hole 540f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning fixing boss 680c provided in the front component member 680 can be inserted. The panel holder 540 and the front component member 680 are positioned relative to each other by inserting the positioning fixing boss 680c of the front component member 680 into the boss insertion hole 540f.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with a mounting support portion 540g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower side and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface side. The rear surface of the panel holder 540 is recessed by a mounting support portion 540g above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of depression (depth Is a depth that can accommodate a flange-shaped fixing portion of a predetermined member such as the back box 514 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 540g (in this example, about 2.5 mm, between 1 to 3 mm) It is desirable that By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 540g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 540, and the panel holder 540, that is, the game effect unit 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1. The main body frame 3 can be securely attached.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504 is accommodated while being recessed toward the front side below the position where the mounting support portion 540g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height. A possible accommodation recess 540h is formed. Further, a locking portion 540i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the housing recess 540h in the front-rear direction and that can lock the locking claw 504c formed on the panel back plate 504 is further formed. The housing recess 540h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 504 by engaging the locking claw 504c of the panel back plate 504 with the locking portion 540i, and the rear surface of the accommodated panel back plate 504 is a panel. The holder 540 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface.

  Furthermore, as shown in the drawing, a plurality of first mounting holes 540j and a plurality of second mounting holes 540k are provided in a predetermined arrangement on the mounting support portion 540g formed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540. A small-diameter first screw 515 disposed on the upper side of the housing recess 540h can be screwed into the plurality of first mounting holes 540j. A second screw (not shown) having a diameter larger than that of the first screw 515 can be screwed into the plurality of second mounting holes 540k on the upper side of the mounting support portion 540g. In this example, the diameters of the screw portions of the first screw 515 and the second screw are about 2.1 mm and about 3 mm, respectively, and the diameters of the first mounting hole 540j and the second mounting hole 540k are these. The first screw 515 and the second screw have a diameter that can be screwed together.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 540l disposed so as to correspond to the first mounting hole 540j and the second mounting hole 540k. The positioning hole 540l has a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion 514c formed on the fixing portion 514b of the back box 514) formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the first mounting hole 540j or the second mounting hole 540k. Is to be inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 540l is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the back.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 540m that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 540 is reduced by the thinned portions 540m. It has become. On the other hand, these thinned portions 540m are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 540h, that is, the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 540 to a predetermined height. That is, within this range, since the front surface of the panel holder 540 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the guide rail 482 of the front component member 680 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface. Thereby, the game ball launched from the launching device 57 is smoothly guided in the guide rail 78. In addition, the panel holder 540 is formed with a thinned portion 540m so that the first mounting hole 540j, the second mounting hole 540k, and the like are formed in a boss shape. At the same time, in order to support the first mounting hole 540j, the second mounting hole 540k, etc., or to maintain the strength of the panel holder 540, grid-like ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 540 is formed with an existing obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning portion 540n corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and the game panel 409 is attached to the obstacle nail planting device. It can be set while holding. In addition, a communication hole 540o that communicates with the foul port 473 of the guide rail 482 in the front component 680 and a communication hole 540p that communicates with the out port 471 of the front component 680 are further provided in the lower portion of the panel holder 540. ing.

  Next, the panel back plate 504 of the game effect unit 4 is arranged on the rear side of the panel holder 540 so as to cover the lightening portion 540m within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height. At the same time, the housing recesses 540h of the panel holder 540 can be accommodated so that the rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. Further, a plurality of screw holes 504a arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the flat rear surface and capable of screwing the first screws 515, a plurality of positioning holes 504b arranged so as to correspond to the screw holes 504a, and the panel holder 540 A locking claw 504c that can be locked to the locking portion 540i and a concave portion 504d for reducing the weight so as not to penetrate from the front surface side are provided.

  The screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 504b in the panel back plate 504 have substantially the same configuration as the first mounting holes 540j and the positioning holes 540l in the panel holder 540. Similarly to the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504 is also formed in a boss-like portion where the screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 504b are formed by the recessed portions 504d. At the same time, in order to support the screw holes 504a, the positioning holes 504b, etc., and to maintain the strength of the panel back plate 504, grid-like ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 504 is provided with an opening 504e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the communication holes 540o and 540p and the boss insertion hole 540f of the panel holder 540.

  The panel back plate 504 is housed in the housing recess 540h of the panel holder 540, and the locking claw 504c of the panel back plate 504 is locked to the locking portion 540i of the panel holder 540, so that it is integrated with the panel holder 540. Assembled. In such a state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 504 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 540. Thus, by integrating the panel holder 540 and the panel back plate 504, the first mounting holes 540j are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 in a predetermined arrangement over the entire outer periphery of the through-hole 540b. The mounting holes including the second mounting holes 540k and the screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 540l and 504b are disposed. And the presence of these attachment holes makes it possible to attach and fix a predetermined member at an arbitrary position.

  The substrate holder 505 in the game effect unit 4 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel back plate 504 and has a box shape in which the front and upper sides are opened, and the game ball discharge port 505a, the bottom plate 505b, the escape portion 505c, and the substrate support. Part 505d. The game ball discharge port 505a is a game medium discharge port having a size through which a game ball can pass. The bottom plate 505b is a plate-like portion that is inclined so that the upper surface thereof becomes lower toward the game ball outlet 505a. The escape portion 505c is a predetermined amount of a gap formed between the panel back plate 504 and the rear surface side. The board support portion 505d is disposed on the rear side where the escape portion 505c is formed, and supports the main control board box 25 having the main control board 710 and the like.

  The substrate holder 505 collects game balls that have been driven into the game area 20 and can discharge them downward from the game ball discharge port 505a. Further, the relief portion 505c has a depth (in this example, approximately about a flange-like fixing portion in a member (not shown) attached and fixed to the panel back plate 504, similarly to the mounting support portion 540g of the panel holder 540. 1 mm, preferably between 0.5 and 3 mm).

  Further, the substrate holder 505 is provided with a cylindrical fixing boss 505e that fits with the positioning fixing boss 680c of the front component member 680 at a predetermined position on the front side thereof. Then, the fixed boss 505 e is fitted to the positioning fixed boss 680 c of the front component 680 with the panel holder 540 sandwiched between the fixed boss 505 e and the front component 680. At the same time, a predetermined screw is screwed into the positioning fixing boss 680c of the front component 680 through the through hole 505f penetrating the fixed boss 505e from the rear of the substrate holder 505, so that the front component 680, the panel holder 540, and the substrate holder 505 are screwed. Can be fixed together.

  Further, the substrate holder 505 is provided with an opening receiving portion 505g communicating with the foul port 473 of the front component member 680 at the lower part of the front surface thereof. The opening receiving portion 505g can guide the game ball to the lower side of the substrate holder 505 at a position different from the game ball discharge port 505a. The “dead ball” received inside the substrate holder 505 can be distinguished from the game ball that was missed when the game ball was driven into the game area 20.

  The assembly structure of each member constituting the game effect unit 4 has been described above. With this structure, the main members (the front component member 680, the game panel 409, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, the board holder 505, etc.) constituting the game effect unit 4 can be easily and integrally assembled. In particular, a transparent resin game panel 409 is suitably held, and a center role 620, a back unit 510, an effect display device 115, and the like are arranged before and after the game panel 409, thereby providing an unprecedented depth game. The production unit 4 can be realized.

  In this example, the game panel 409, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, and the substrate holder 505 are formed of a thermoplastic resin except for a part of the front component member 680 so that these members can be recycled. It has become. As the resin, acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, polypropylene, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, and the like can be used. In addition to the thermoplastic resin, a thermosetting resin is appropriately used according to the function and application. It may be used. In addition to the game panel 409, a transparent resin may be used for the front component 680, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, and the like.

<About Center Title>
Next, the center accessory 620 disposed from the front side of the game panel 409 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, a frame-shaped center accessory 620 is arranged at the center of the game area 20. The center accessory 620 occupies a width of 4/5 or more in the width direction of the game area 20. The center accessory 620 has a substantially rectangular opening 621. The center accessory 620 includes a frame-shaped decorative body 622, and the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is provided along the opening edge of the opening 621.

  And the effect display apparatus 115 is arrange | positioned behind the transparent plate 621a arrange | positioned so that the opening part 621 may be obstruct | occluded so that it can visually recognize through this opening part 621 by front view. That is, the inside of the center combination 620 (that is, the opening 621) is an image display area 20a in which the effect display device 115 is exposed in the game area 20. And the game area 20 is divided into the above-mentioned image display area 20a and the ball flow-down area 20b where game balls mainly flow down by the center accessory 620. In principle, the game ball enters the image display area 20a only when the game ball passes through warp paths 550 and 650 described later.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large number of game balls enter the opening 621 and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the behind-the-scenes display device 115 due to the game balls. In particular, in the present embodiment, despite the fact that the larger display device 115 is used than before, the image display area 20a keeps various effects displayed on the effect display device 115 in a good state for easy viewing. The person can surely visually recognize various effects displayed on the effect display device 115.

  In the gaming panel 409, the center role 620 is arranged so as not to come into contact with the front component 680, and a game ball driven into the game area 20 passes through the right side or the left side of the center role 620. It flows down toward an out port 471 provided below the center accessory 620. In the present embodiment, the arcuate side wall extending from the upper side of the center accessory 620 (specifically, the frame-shaped decorative body 622) in the clockwise direction in the clockwise direction is between the inner peripheral wall of the front component member 680. They are close enough to form a gap through which only one game ball can pass. Therefore, most of the game balls that have been driven into the game area 20 flow down to the left side of the game area 20 in which a second starting port 602 and a passage gate 612, which will be described later, are disposed. On the other hand, among the game balls that are driven into the game area 20, a part of the game balls that are driven with a large elasticity by the launching device 57 can flow down the right side of the game area 20 one by one.

  A first start port 600 capable of receiving a game ball that is driven toward the game area 20 is disposed below the center accessory 620. A third start port 604 (a second start port will be described later) having a pair of movable pieces 606 is disposed below the first start port 600. When the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the closed state, the third start port 604 is unable to receive the game ball or difficult to receive, and when the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the open state, It becomes easier to accept game balls than the one start port 600.

  An opening / closing device 500 is provided between the first start port 600 and the out port 471, specifically, below the third start port 604 and above the out port 471 (directly above in the present embodiment). Yes. The opening / closing device 500 includes a prize winning opening 500a and a prize winning opening / closing door 500b provided corresponding to the prize winning opening 500a. The special winning opening 500a is an opening through which a game ball can be received. The special prize opening / closing door 500b is a member for switching the special prize opening 500a between an open state in which a game ball can be received and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received or difficult. It should be noted that when the special winning opening 500a is in the closed state, it is not necessarily limited to the fact that it is not always possible to accept the game ball that is driven toward the game area 20, and it is difficult, preferably extremely difficult. good.

  On the left side of the first starting port 600, a passing gate 612 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Further, three general winning ports 614 are provided on the left and right sides of the third starting port 604 slightly below the passing gate 612.

  The most downstream side of the game ball flow direction is an out port through which game balls that have not won any of the start ports 600, 602, 604, the opening / closing device 500 and the general winning port 614 are discharged behind the game panel 409. 471 is formed. That is, a game ball that has not won any of the start ports 600, 602, 604, the opening / closing device 500 and the general winning port 614 provided on the upstream side of the out port 471 in the flow direction of the game ball It flows down toward the mouth 471.

  The opening / closing device 500 is disposed immediately above the out port 471. As a result, during the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500, game balls that have not won any of the start ports 600, 602, 604, the opening / closing device 500 and the general winning port 614 gather near the opening / closing device 500. You can have a sense of expectation for winning a prize.

  An LED display area 80 composed of a plurality of LEDs is formed at the lower right of the center accessory 620. In this LED display area 80, a first special symbol display 84 for displaying a lottery result by a first special symbol lottery means 900 to be described later, and a second special symbol display for displaying a lottery result by a second special symbol lottery means 910. 86, a first special symbol hold indicator 88 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (the number of lottery processes performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 in the hold state) and the second A second special symbol hold display 90 is provided for displaying the number of lotteries held by the special symbol lottery means 910 (the number of lottery processes performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910 in the on-hold state). The LED display area 80 is provided with a normal symbol display 82 for displaying a lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920 and a normal symbol hold indicator 92 for displaying the number of lottery holds by the normal symbol lottery means 920. ing. These displays can recognize that a plurality of processes relating to the progress of the game sequentially executed by a main control board 710 described later are functioning based on control data stored in a RAM 713 described later. It can also be said to be a main control function diagnostic display.

  Each of these indicators 82, 84, 86, 88, 90, 92 is composed of, for example, an LED, and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the second special symbol lottery means, depending on the lighting state of this LED. The lottery result by 910, the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920, the holding number of lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the holding number of lotteries by the second special symbol lottery means 910, and the holding number of lotteries by the normal symbol lottery means 920 Is notified.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the “number of lottery holds” refers to the number of holds for the determination (lottery process) of whether or not the acquired random number for determination is correct, although the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired. This means, but is not limited to this, and it may be the number of determinations of the randomness for success / failure determination that suspends acquisition of the randomness for determination of success / failure and suspends the acquisition.

  Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold indicator 90 may be the number of lots to be held instead of the lottery hold number. In other words, although it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained and whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the determination result is not displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. , The number of such hold may be displayed.

  The center accessory 620 has a shelf-like stage 660 near the lower frame of the frame-shaped decorative body 622. In addition, in order to guide the game ball flowing down the game area 20 to the first stage 660 near the center of the left frame of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 in the vertical direction (that is, to the side of the frame-shaped decorative body 622). A first warp inlet 652 that can be received in the first warp passage 650 that is a stage guide path is provided. The game ball received at the first warp inlet 652 is discharged from the first warp outlet 654 and guided to the first stage 660. That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area 20 enters the first warp inlet 652, the game ball is transferred to the first stage 660 provided inside the center accessory 620 via the first warp passage 650. It is comprised so that.

  The first warp inlet 652 is provided below the second start port 602 in the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area 20. A warp guide piece 658 for guiding the game ball to the first warp inlet 652 is provided below the first warp inlet 652. The warp guide piece 658 protrudes leftward from the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, from the center accessory 620 to the game area 20), so that the game ball is easily guided to the first warp inlet 652. Therefore, even when the game ball is not guided to the second start port 602, the expectation that the game ball is received at the first warp inlet 652 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

  The first stage 660 has a curved surface formed in a wave shape from the first warp outlet side end 666 to the first warp counter-exit side end 668. Specifically, a crest portion 662 that bulges upward is formed at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the stage 660, and a trough portion 664 continuously connected to the crest portion 662 is formed on the left and right sides of the crest portion 662. Is formed.

  In addition, the height of the peak portion 662 is lower than the first warp outlet side end portion 666 and the first warp opposite outlet side end portion 668. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the first warp outlet 654 can get over the mountain portion 662 and reciprocates between the first warp outlet side end 666 and the first warp counter-exit side end 668. Can roll.

  As a result, the flow direction of the game ball in the first warp passage 650 and the rolling direction of the game ball in the first stage 660 are substantially collinear, so that the game ball flowing down the first warp passage 650 has kinetic energy. There is little loss. That is, kinetic energy is lost when a game ball that has flowed down the first warp passage 650 changes its traveling direction. Accordingly, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp passage 650 rolls on the first stage 660 vigorously. In the present embodiment, the game ball is not guided to the first stage 660 from the right side of the center accessory 620. That is, since the game ball is guided to the first stage 660 only from the left side of the center role 620, the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 is inhibited from rolling by the game ball guided from the opposite direction. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the time for the game ball to roll on the first stage 660 vigorously and stay on the first stage 660 becomes longer, and as a result, the game ball plays in the first stage 660 and the interest is enhanced.

  In addition, a guide groove that is inclined downward toward the front side is formed in the peak portion 662 of the first stage 660 in order to guide the game ball to the first start port 600. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 loses the momentum of rolling near the mountain portion 662, the game ball is easily guided to the first start port 600 by the guide groove. On the other hand, a trough 664 of the first stage 660 is formed with a guide groove that is inclined downward toward the front side in order to guide the game ball to the side of the first start port 600. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 loses the momentum to roll in the vicinity of the valley 664, the game ball is relatively easily guided to the first start port 600 by the guide groove. . Therefore, even when the game ball is not guided to the second start port 602, the expectation that the game ball is received at the first start port 600 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

<About back unit>
Next, the back unit 510 disposed on the back side of the game panel 409 will be described. As described above, the back unit 510 in which the effect display device 115 is arranged at the center is attached to the back side of the game panel 409, and the opening 621 of the center accessory 620 is provided from the front side of the game effect unit 4. The effect display device 115 and the back unit 510 can be visually recognized through the.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the back unit 510 has a shelf-like second stage 560 formed near the bottom wall of the opening 514 a of the back box 514. A second warp passage 550 is provided on the left side wall of the opening 514a of the back box 514. The second warp passage 550 is a stage guide path for guiding the game ball won in the second start port 602 to the second stage 560. . In addition, the game ball received in the second start port 602 is discharged from the second warp outlet 554 and guided to the second stage 560. That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area 20 enters the second start port 602, the game ball is provided inside the back box 514 (that is, the bottom wall of the opening 514a) via the second warp passage 550. The second stage 560 is conveyed.

  The game ball received in the second start port 602 flows down in the second warp passage 550 provided on the front side of the back unit 510 (that is, behind the game panel 409). 550 is configured as a transparent member. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the gap between the game panel 409 and the back unit 510 through the transparent game panel 409. Therefore, the player can observe the state that the game ball received in the second start port 602 is conveyed to the second stage 560, and the interest is enhanced.

  The second stage 560 is provided with a rotation distributing tool 580 that has a rod-like body whose diameter is reduced toward both left and right ends, with the left-right direction of the game effect unit 4 being the longitudinal axis direction. Then, the second stage 560 has a substantially intermediate height in the left-right direction on the front side of the rotational distribution member 580 lower than the second warp outlet side end portion 566 and the second warp counter-exit side end portion 568. Inclined so that Therefore, the game ball guided to the second stage 560 is the second warp outlet side end portion 666 and the second warp counter-exit side on the front side (front stage 560a) of the rotation distribution combination 580 in the second stage 560. It can roll back and forth between the end portions 668.

  The rotary distribution combination 580 provided on the second stage 560 rotates in one direction from the near side to the far side with the horizontal direction of the game effect unit 4 as the axis line center. A magnetic body (not shown) is provided in the magnetized portion 580a, which is a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the rotational distribution member 580, and the game ball is attached to the magnetized portion 580a by the magnetic force of the magnetic body. It is possible to contact. That is, when the game ball rolling on the front stage 560a of the second stage 560 loses the momentum to roll in the vicinity of the magnetized portion 580a of the rotary distribution role 580, it is attached to the magnetized portion 580a by the magnetic force. Will be.

  In addition, on the rear side (rear stage 560b) of the rotary distribution role 580 in the second stage 560, a special receiving port 562 that can receive a game ball is provided at the approximate center in the left-right direction. Adjacent to each other. In addition, on the left and right sides of the special receiving port 562, a normal receiving port 564 is formed adjacent to the rotary distribution combination 580, respectively. Then, the game ball attached to the magnetically attached portion 580a of the rotary distribution role 580 is transported to the back side of the second stage 560 as the rotary distribution role 580 rotates, and the special receiving port 562 and the normal receiving port 562 It is received by being distributed to any of the receiving ports 564.

  As described above, by using the game ball won at the second start port 602 to perform the sorting operation by the rotary sorting tool 580 in the second stage 560, the game ball won at the second start port 602 or more. It is possible to give the player a sense of joy and superiority. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is received at the special receiving port 562, a certain point is given to the player, and when the accumulated point becomes equal to or greater than a specific value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. (For example, a special effect that is not normally displayed is displayed). Therefore, when a game ball wins at the second start port 602, the player will be watching whether or not the game ball is received by the special receiving port 562, so that the excitement of the game can be enhanced. .

  Note that the rear stage 560b of the second stage 560 is inclined so that the height of the substantially intermediate position in the left-right direction is higher than the second warp outlet side end 666 and the second warp counter-exit side end 668. ing. Therefore, if the game ball attached to the magnetically attached portion 580a of the rotary distribution role 580 is not received by either the special receiving port 562 or the normal receiving port 564, the game ball moves on the rear stage 560b. After rolling toward the second warp outlet side end 666 or the second warp counter-exit side end 668, it is again guided to the front stage 560a. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the second stage 560 is surely received in either the special receiving port 562 or the normal receiving port 564.

  On the other hand, a disk-like accessory 590 that is a decorative body imitating an unidentified flying object (so-called UFO) is provided in the vicinity of the upper wall of the opening 514a of the back box 514. An electrical decoration member is provided. More specifically, three hemispherical lower electrical decoration bodies 592 projecting downward are provided on the bottom surface side of the main body 591, and two upper parts simulating a circular window are provided on the front side of the main body 591. An electrical decoration body 594 is provided, and a line-shaped middle electrical decoration body 596 extending left and right is provided between the lower electrical decoration body 592 and the upper electrical decoration body 594.

  Inside the main body portion 591 of the disk-shaped accessory 590, there is an LED substrate (not shown) having LEDs as light emitting sources corresponding to each of the electric decorations 592, 594, 596 in the back. The driving of these electric decorators 592, 594, 596 is also controlled by a lamp driving board 850 (see FIG. 45) housed in a lamp driving board box 508 provided in the back unit 510.

  Note that the opening 514a of the back box 514 is formed so as to partially protrude upward, and a disk-shaped accessory 590 is fitted into the protruding portion. Therefore, when the game effect unit 4 is viewed from the front, only the lower electric decoration 592 of the disk-like accessory 590 overlaps the displayable area of the effect display device 115. As described above, even if the disk-like accessory 590 having a relatively large volume is provided in the back unit 510, the range in which the disk-like accessory 590 overlaps the displayable area of the effect display device 115 is narrow. It is prevented that the effect display device 115 becomes difficult to visually recognize by the object 590.

  By the way, the back unit 510 is provided with a second stage 560 for performing an effect of distributing the game balls, a rotary sorting tool 580, a large disk-shaped tool 590 for decorating the game panel 409, and the like. Further, since the effect display device 115 larger than usual is attached to the back unit 510, the rear projecting portion of the game effect unit 4 is necessarily increased. However, in the present embodiment, the rear projecting portion of the game effect unit 4 can be easily accommodated by the structure for mounting the game effect unit 4 by the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 described above. Therefore, the game effect unit 4 can adopt various parts and shapes not only on the front side of the game panel 409 but also on the back side, and the game effect unit 4 can have a more diverse and deep structure. it can.

<About the electrical decoration member of the game production unit and its light emission mode>
A plurality of electric decoration parts and light emitters are arranged behind the game panel 409, and the driving of these electric parts and the like is accommodated in a lamp driving board box 508 provided in the back unit 510. It is controlled by 850 (see FIG. 45). Hereinafter, the main ones of these electric parts will be described in detail. Note that an electrical decoration component or a light emitter provided behind the game panel 409 corresponds to the center decoration lamp 853 in FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, the center accessory 620 is formed with a plurality of wing-shaped decorative bodies 630 having a substantially wing shape when viewed from the front. The plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 are slightly curved from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409 in front view from the upper side to the lower right side in the clockwise direction in the frame-shaped decorative body 622 of the center accessory 620. However, it is formed at substantially equal intervals so as to extend (that is, radially). Each feather-shaped decorative body 630 has a blade-shaped shape that gradually becomes wider in front view as it extends in the extending direction (the direction toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409).

  In addition, a blade-type decorative body 632 protruding from the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is formed on the left side of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 of the center accessory 620. This feather-shaped decorative body 632 is formed to extend while slightly curving from the left edge of the effect display device 115 to a position where it is joined to the inner rail unit 462 in front view. It should be noted that the blade-type decorative body 632 is also a blade-type decorative body that gradually becomes wider in the front view as it extends in the extending direction (the direction toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409), like the blade-type decorative body 630 described above. Make a shape.

  However, the plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 are formed in the inner region of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, the image display area 20a) where the game balls do not flow down, whereas the blade-shaped decorative bodies 632 It protrudes from the outer region of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, the ball flow-down region 20b). For this reason, the wing-shaped decorative body 632 provided in the ball flow down region 20b allows a game ball to pass behind it, so that a space slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between it and the game panel 409. In addition, the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is installed to the inner rail unit 462. Further, unlike the plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 630, the blade-shaped decorative body 632 is formed with a slit-shaped window portion 632a so that a game ball flowing down behind can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, the back unit 510 is also formed with a plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 530 that are substantially blade-shaped when viewed from the front. The plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 530 extend while curving slightly from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409 in a front view from the lower left to the upper clockwise in the opening 514a of the back box 514. (Ie, radially), they are formed at substantially equal intervals. Each feather-shaped decorative body 530 becomes wider in front view as it extends in the extending direction (direction toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409), like the blade-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 of the center accessory 620. It has a blade shape like this.

  On the front side of the back unit 510, an LED substrate 535 (see FIG. 34) having a plurality of LEDs as a light emission source is provided at a position corresponding to the above-described blade-type decorative body 630, 632 in front view. Yes. In other words, the LED boards 535 are respectively provided behind the feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 of the center accessory 620 via the game panel 409. Each blade-type decorative body 630, 632 emits white light at the outer edge portion of each blade-type decorative body 630, 632 when viewed from the front by driving the LED substrate 535 provided behind each blade-type decorative body 630, 632.

  Similarly, in the back unit 510, an LED substrate 535 is also provided behind the plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 530. Each blade-type decorative body 530 emits white light at the outer edge portion of each blade-type decorative body 530 when viewed from the front by driving the LED substrate 535 provided behind each blade-type decorative body 530.

  Here, the feather-shaped decorative body 530 is provided in the back unit 510, while the blade-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 are provided in the center accessory 620. However, when the game effect unit 4 is viewed from the front, the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 form a series of decorative members that extend radially from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 toward the outline of the game panel 409. When the wing-shaped decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 emit light by driving the corresponding LED substrates 535, an effect is provided in which light extends radially from the effect display device 115 in the outer direction of the game panel 409. Thereby, the impression as if the effect display device 115 emitted light toward the outline of the game panel 409 beyond the displayable region (that is, the impression that the light emission display extends outward from the effect display device 115). And the illusion that the displayable area of the effect display device 115 temporarily increases.

  Further, the back unit 510 is formed with a plurality of third light-like decorative bodies 520 in front view. These light-like decorative bodies 520 are configured as a set of one blue lens body and two red lens bodies adjacent to the blue lens body. In the light decorative body 520, the blue lens body and the red lens body have a circular shape, and the red lens body has a smaller diameter than the blue lens body.

  The plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 are arranged at substantially equal intervals on the front side of the back unit 510 so as to surround the entire circumference of the opening 514a of the back unit 510. Further, behind each light-like decorative body 520, an LED substrate (not shown) including LEDs corresponding to each of the three lens bodies (one blue lens body and two red lens bodies) is provided. . By driving the LED substrate (not shown), each light-like decorative body 520 emits light through the red lens body or the blue lens body.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the back unit 510 provided on the rear side (behind the game panel 409) in the game effect unit 4 includes various electric decoration members (particularly, a plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520), The electric decoration member projects light to the front side of the game effect unit 4. Further, many of the main components constituting the game effect unit 4 are made of a light transmitting member, such as the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a made of transparent resin. Therefore, an electric lighting member such as a plurality of light decorative bodies 520 gives an impression that the entire game effect unit 4 is lit up in a front view, and the depth of the game effect unit 4 is strongly emphasized. The

  More specifically, when only the blue lens body is caused to emit light among the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520, the back unit is connected via the game panel 409, the transparent plate 621 a, etc. by the blue light emission of each light-like decorative body 520. In addition to 510, the center accessory 620, the front component 680, and the like are illuminated in blue. On the other hand, when only the red lens body is caused to emit light among the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520, not only the back unit 510 but also the game panel 409, the transparent plate 621a, etc. due to the red light emission of each light-like decorative body 520. The center accessory 620, the front constituent member 680, and the like are also illuminated in red. That is, using the fact that the depth of the game effect unit 4 is deep, each light-like decorative body 520 irradiates light from the back side of the game effect unit 4 to the front, so that the entire game effect unit 4 is illuminated. So that it can be decorated. This not only gives a strong visual impact to the player, but also gives the impression that the depth of the game production unit 4 can be seen deeper than it actually is. be able to.

  In addition, when the blue lens body and the red lens body are caused to emit light simultaneously in each light-like decorative body 520, the light-like decorative body 520 emits pink light from a player spaced a predetermined distance from the game panel 409. To be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to cause not only the back unit 510 but also the center accessory 620 and the front constituent member 680 to illuminate in pink by the light emission of each light-like decorative body 520 through the game panel 409.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the decorative design displayed on the effect display device 115 is represented by one of red, blue, and pink. That is, the three colors of red, blue, and pink can be said to be image colors that symbolize the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The red, blue, and pink light emission control by the light decorative body 520 has an effect of impressing the player with the image color of the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in a conventional pachinko machine, a game window (glass unit) formed on the door frame is usually formed in a substantially circular shape in accordance with the game area of the game effect unit. However, in the present embodiment, the gaming window 101 (glass unit 190) formed in the door frame 5 is vertically long and has a size that greatly exceeds the gaming area 20 in front view and encompasses substantially the entire gaming panel 409. It is formed in a substantially octagonal shape. That is, the area of the game window 101 (glass unit 190) is extremely large compared to the conventional one. Thereby, the player can experience the depth of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment more strongly, and light emitted from various electrical decoration members from the back side of the game effect unit 4 is the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make it easy to express to the side (that is, the player can easily grasp the light emission mode).

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the depth in which the game effect unit 4 is arranged is deep, it is difficult for light to enter the game area 20 from the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in a state where the effect display device 115 and various electric decoration members are not driven, the game area 20 is darker than the conventional pachinko machine. And the effect display apparatus 115 and various electrical decoration members are located in the back | inner side of the game effect unit 4 which is hard to be illuminated by the light from the outside.

  From this, the situation display device 115 and various electrical decoration members are prevented from being prevented from visually recognizing the display mode and the light emission mode by the light entering from the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, the effect display device 115 and various illumination members are displayed or light-emitted on the back side of the game effect unit 4 that is kept in a relatively dark state. It is easy to visually recognize the light emission mode of the decoration member.

  Further, by using a structure that blocks the entrance of light from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and intentionally darkening the effect display device 115 and various electric decoration members, the gaming area 20 is darker than the conventional gaming machine. State. Then, using the intentionally darkened game area 20, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the game area 20 is a space or a concert venue. For example, in this game area 20, it is possible to produce a UFO that floats in outer space in a pseudo manner by illuminating or emitting light from the disk-shaped accessory 590. In the game area 20, more various effects can be realized by using the image display on the effect display device 115 and the light emission modes of various electric decoration members.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can effectively perform light decoration on the entire periphery of the door frame 5 except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. In the conventional pachinko machine 1, the light-decorated range is mainly limited to the game area 20, while the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is light-decorated including the game area 20 and the door frame 5 when viewed from the front. The range is extremely large. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a two-dimensional spread of light decoration that could not be achieved with a conventional gaming machine.

  In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an unprecedented depth feeling due to the light decoration is realized by performing the light decoration with the electric decoration member from the back side of the game effect unit 4. In other words, combined with the flatness and depth of light decoration, players will feel as if they are wrapped in light decoration, and they will be able to concentrate on the game while experiencing an unprecedented interest. it can.

  Further, by performing light decoration with an electric decoration member from the back side of the game effect unit 4, the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are illuminated by the light. Thereby, an impression can be given to the player as if the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is floating. Furthermore, since the light that illuminates the game ball is diffusely reflected on the surface of the game ball, the color of the game ball can have a complex variety, and the game ball is a meteor flowing through outer space for the player. An image like that can be given.

[Relationship between outer frame, main frame and game effect unit]
Next, the positional relationship when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the game effect unit 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. 41 is a plan sectional view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 42 is a plan sectional view of the pachinko machine, in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame.

  Of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of wood having a thickness of 19 mm. On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are thin-walled members constituted by an aluminum alloy extruded plate. In the present embodiment, the side frame plates 12 and 13 have a thickness of 3 mm. Further, as described above, ribs are formed on the inner side of the rear portion of the side frame plates 12 and 13 so that the thickness h2 of the rear portion (see FIG. 10C) is increased. That is, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of vertically long outer wall portions 12a and 13a (a portion having a thickness of 3 mm), and thickness portions 12b and 13b in which ribs directed toward the inner side of the rear portions of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed. (The outer wall portion 13a and the thickness portion 13b of the open side frame 13 are shown in FIG. 7). The thickness sections 12b and 13b are formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section so as to have a space section 12G opened behind the side frame plates 12 and 13.

  The outer wall portions 12a and 13a are substantially flat plate members, and the thickness portions 12b and 13b are erected inwardly from the rear end portions of the outer wall portions 12a and 13a. Thereby, the thickness of the left-right direction in the front-end part of the side frame boards 12 and 13 becomes the thickness of the outer wall parts 12a and 13a, and there is no structure which increases this thickness elsewhere. Further, outer frame spaces 12A and 13A having a rib width are formed inside the outer wall portions 12a and 13a. Accordingly, a part of the main body frame 3 (more specifically, the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291) can be accommodated in the outer frame inner space 12A, and the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 are accommodated. The outer frame 2 can be made closer. As a result, the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral surface walls 290-293 on the pivot support side and the peripheral surface walls 290-293 on the open side can be widened to the limit, and the left-right width of the game area 20 can be increased. Moreover, the effect becomes remarkable by making the side frame plates 12 and 13 thin. In this way, while the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made thin by reducing the thickness, not only can the strength equal to or higher than that of the conventional wood be maintained, but also the game area 20 can be enlarged. Can also be achieved. The “outer frame spaces 12A, 13A” correspond to the “vertical frame spaces” of the present invention.

  Furthermore, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 of the locking device 60 are also provided in the outer frame inner space 13A on the open side in a state where the main frame 3 is confined to the outer frame 2. Be contained. Thereby, the lateral width of the gaming panel 409 (the lateral width when viewed from the player) is substantially equal to the thickness of the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 from the lateral width of the entire pachinko machine 1 (more specifically, the thickness of the outer wall portion). ) Is subtracted. As a result, a sufficient width of the game area 20 can be secured. When the main body frame 3 is confined to the outer frame 2, the second peripheral wall 291 of the main body frame 3 is close to the open side thick portion 13 b of the side frame plate 13. It is difficult to insert a finger or the like from between b and the second peripheral wall 291). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress injustice such as operating the door frame sliding rod 971 or the body frame sliding rod 984 from behind the outer frame 2.

  The main body frame 3 is formed with peripheral wall 290 to 293 along the inner peripheral surface of the outer frame 2. That is, the main body frame 3 is configured such that the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is provided along the surface of the inner peripheral wall of the outer frame 2 while maintaining the width of the left and right when viewed from the front. Specifically, the inner side wall surface of the pivot side frame 12 and the outer side surface of the first peripheral wall 290 on the pivot side are closely adjacent to each other and formed on the side frame plate 12 on the pivot side. A first peripheral wall 290 is extended to the ribs. Further, the open side frame plate 13 and the open side first peripheral wall 290 are formed on the open side frame plate 13 with the thin side locking device 60 (details will be described later) sandwiched therebetween. A first peripheral wall 290 is extended to the ribs. In this way, the first peripheral wall 290 is closest to the outer frame 2 on both the pivot support side and the open side. Thereby, the width in the left-right direction of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the shaft support side and the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the open side can be maximized. Note that almost no openings are formed in the peripheral walls 290 to 293.

  Further, on the pivot support side, the main body frame 3 is bent at a substantially right angle about 18 mm inside just before the rib formed on the open side frame plate 13, and the second peripheral wall 291 avoids this rib. Is extended substantially in parallel with the first peripheral wall 290 toward the rear.

  The third peripheral wall 292 is substantially parallel to the second peripheral wall 291 from the rear end of the second peripheral wall 291 (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) to the rear. Is extended. The third peripheral wall 292 is slightly (about 1 mm) inside the second peripheral wall 291. That is, on the shaft support side, a fine step having a thickness of about a thickness is formed between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292.

  Furthermore, from the rear end portion (boundary portion between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) of the third peripheral wall 292 toward the rear, the fourth peripheral wall 293 is substantially parallel to the third peripheral wall 292. Is extended. The fourth peripheral wall 293 is slightly (about 1 mm) inside the third peripheral wall 292. That is, on the shaft support side, a fine step of about the thickness is formed between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293.

  In addition, since the thickness of the level | step difference between the 2nd surrounding wall 291 and the 3rd surrounding wall 292 and between the 3rd surrounding wall 292 and the 4th surrounding wall 293 is as thin as about thickness, the main body frame 3 is 2nd. From the front end portion of the peripheral wall 291 to the rear end portion of the fourth peripheral wall 293, it extends substantially linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the game panel 409. Moreover, although the second peripheral wall 291 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 are substantially straight, the strength of the main body frame 3 is increased by forming a fine step of about the thickness.

On the other hand, on the open side, the main body frame 3 is connected to the first peripheral wall 290 from the rear end of the first peripheral wall 290 (the boundary between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291) toward the rear. A second peripheral wall 291 extends substantially in parallel. The second peripheral wall 291 is slightly inside (about 5 mm) from the first peripheral wall 290. In other words, on the open side, a fine step with a thickness of approximately 1 is formed between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291.

Further, a third peripheral wall 292 extends from the rear end portion of the second peripheral wall 291 (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) toward the rear inner side. Note that a fine step having a thickness of about a thickness is formed at the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292. In other words, the third peripheral wall 292 extends from the front end (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) to the rear end (the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293). It will be formed diagonally backward.

  Further, a fourth peripheral wall 293 extends from the rear end portion of the third peripheral wall 292 (boundary portion between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) toward the rear inner side. In addition, a fine step having a thickness of about 3 mm is formed at the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293. That is, the fourth peripheral wall 293 on the open side is the boundary between the front end (the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) and the rear end (the fourth peripheral wall 293 and the open rear wall 294). Part), it will be formed obliquely rearward.

  In this way, the main body frame 3 is formed obliquely rearward from the front end portion of the third peripheral wall 292 toward the rear end portion of the fourth peripheral wall 293 without interfering with the side frame plate 13 on the open side. The body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 around the axis connecting the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 (see FIG. 2) (see FIG. 2). 42). In particular, in the present embodiment, when the axis connecting the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 (see FIG. 2) is used as the center of rotation, the open-side peripheral walls 290 to 293 have the axis It is formed along an arc shape having a radius from the center to a portion close to the inner end of the side frame plate 13 (specifically, the first peripheral wall).

  In other words, the main body frame 3 has a plurality of peripheral walls 290 to 293 as strip-shaped plate portions whose longitudinal direction is the vertical direction, and is thicker so that the rear peripheral wall is arranged on the inner side. A slight level difference is formed. That is, the second peripheral wall 291 is inside the first peripheral wall 290, the third peripheral wall 292 is inside the second peripheral wall 291, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is inside the third peripheral wall 292. Very few step portions are formed so as to be arranged respectively. As a result, the strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased, and the open peripheral wall 290 to 203 can be brought close to the inner end (inner side surface) of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2. While adopting the effect display device 115, the width of the game panel 409 (the width in the left-right direction as viewed from the player), that is, the width of the game area 20 can be sufficiently secured. Further, on the open side, the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293 are inclined obliquely inward toward the rear, so that the main body frame 3 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Can smoothly open the main frame 3 without interfering with the outer frame 2.

  Of the peripheral walls 290 to 293, the surface close to the open side frame plate 13 (that is, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 extending rearward from the open side inner surface) is the “free end” of the present invention. It corresponds to the “side wall portion”. Moreover, the surface (namely, the peripheral wall 290-293 extended toward the back from the inner surface of a shaft support side) among the surrounding surface walls 290-293 close to the side frame board 12 by the side of a support is "" This corresponds to the “opening / closing axis side wall”. Furthermore, among the peripheral walls 290 to 293, the first peripheral wall 290, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 adjacent to the side frame plates 12 and 13 are respectively “strips” of the present invention. Corresponding to the “shaped plate part”.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 is inserted and attached to the main body frame 3 described above. More specifically, the front structural member 680 and the panel holder 540 that partition and form the game area 20 are arranged without a gap along the inner wall of the first peripheral wall 290. Further, the transparent game panel 409 is sandwiched between the front component member 680 and the panel holder 540.

Further, the game effect unit 4 is inserted into the main body frame 3 so as to be accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. That is, the foremost part (the surface of the game panel 409) of the game effect unit 4 is the main body. The position is deeper than the foremost part of the frame 3 (the foremost surface of the first circumferential wall 290), and the open-side rear wall 294 is inside (left side in front view) from the rear end of the open-side third circumferential wall 292. The upper rear wall 295 is molded at a substantially right angle from the rear end portion of the upper fourth peripheral wall 293 toward the inside (lower side in a front view), and the pivot support side rear wall 296 is a shaft. The game effect unit 4 is molded in a depth direction by the peripheral wall 290 to 293 of the outer frame 2 from the rear end of the third peripheral wall 292 on the support side toward the inside (right side of the front view). All of this will be occluded. Intrusion of foreign objects from the side of the channel 409 to suppress illegal acts such as operating the starting members 600, 602, 604, the general winning port 614 and the opening / closing device 500 provided on the gaming panel 409. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with excellent security.In particular, since the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is not formed with an opening other than the lock locking hole 351, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is Thus, the game effect unit 4 functions as a covering portion that covers the game effect unit 4 from the side, and illegal acts from the side of the game effect unit 4 can be suppressed.

  Behind the panel holder 540, a back unit 510 having a frame-like box-shaped back box 514 that forms a space of a predetermined volume is disposed. An opening 514a is formed on the rear surface side of the back box 514, and the effect display device 115 is arranged so as to close the opening 514a. Behind the effect display device 115, a main control board box 25 that houses a main control board 710 (see FIG. 44) and a peripheral control board box 24 that houses a peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 45) are mounted.

  Thus, the front structural member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25, and the peripheral control board box 24 are accommodated in the main body frame 3. That is, the front structural member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25 and the peripheral control board box 24 are mounted on the main body frame 3 as a box-like game box. Is done.

  Here, in other words, the positional relationship among the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the game effect unit 4 is a state in which the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The side portions (longitudinal outer surfaces) of the pivot support side and the open side game panel 409 are brought close to the inner ends (inner side surfaces) of the side support plates 12 and 13 on the pivot support side and the open side, respectively. Is formed. In addition, for each of the pivot support side and the open side, a thin first peripheral wall 290 extends from the front toward the rear between the side portion of the game panel 409 and the inner ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is installed. Further, the upper side portion (outer side surface in the short side direction) of the game panel 409 is formed so as to be close to the inner end (inner side surface) of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper side portion and the upper frame plate of the game panel 409 are formed. A thin-walled first peripheral wall 290 extends from the front to the rear also between the inner ends of the tenth. Thereby, the game area 20 formed in the game panel 409 can be designed sufficiently large. In addition, the left limit, right limit, and upper limit of the accommodation space of the game effect unit 4 are easy to understand, and the design of the game effect unit 4 can be facilitated.

  By the way, in the space formed by the back unit 510, a light-like decorative body 520 and a decorative board 521 are arranged. The light decorative body 520 is an electrical decoration member as described above, and projects light toward the front side of the game effect unit 4. On the other hand, the decorative plate 521 is a decorative member molded in a mesh shape, and is arranged in a spiral shape in the front-rear direction in the space formed by the back unit 510 and supports the light-like decorative body 520. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, many of the main components constituting the game effect unit 4 such as making the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a made of transparent resin are light transmitting members. Furthermore, in the space formed by the back unit 510, effect devices such as a light-like decorative body 520 and a decorative board 521 are arranged. Accordingly, the game area 20 is not narrowed by the light decorative body 520 and the decorative plate 521, and a sufficient space for the game ball to flow down can be secured. Moreover, since the main body frame 3 extends rearward while maintaining a wide state, a wide-area production space 510G (nets shown in FIGS. 41 to 43) for accommodating the production device is provided behind the game panel 409. A hanging portion) is formed, and it is possible to play a three-dimensional game with a wide and deep sense of reality. In particular, an electric lighting member such as a plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 can give an impression that the entire game effect unit 4 is lit up in front view, and the decorative plate 521 is front and rear as viewed from the player. By arranging in a spiral manner in the direction, it is strongly emphasized that the depth of the game effect unit 4 (more specifically, the depth of the effect space 510G) is deep. In addition, this wide production space 510G is widely formed behind the game panel 409 (particularly, formed up to the back of the guide rail 482).

In addition, the main body frame 3 has a housing part (a game production unit installed) formed so as to be surrounded by the peripheral wall 290 to 293 with almost no opening on the side surface from the first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293. In addition, the main body frame 3 is integrally molded, so that there are no gaps or the like that may be generated when a plurality of plate members are screwed, and the security is improved. A box-like game effect unit comprising main body frame 3, front component member 680, panel holder 540, game panel 409, back unit 510, effect display device 115, main control board box 25 and peripheral control board box 24 as main components. 4 can be accommodated as it is, so that the game production unit 4 can be designed in consideration of only the space secured by the peripheral walls 290 to 293. In addition, since it is not necessary to consider the balance with other components constituting the pachinko machine 1, it is easy to design the game presentation unit 4. Further, the game panel 409 has the start ports 600, 602, 604, Winning members such as the general winning opening 614 and the opening / closing device 500 are provided. However, it is possible to suppress fraud such as inserting foreign objects from the side of the game panel 409 and operating these winning members. A pachinko machine 1 with excellent properties can be provided. "

  Moreover, the main body frame 3 is from the peripheral wall 290-293 (the side wall of the 1st peripheral wall 290 and the 2nd peripheral wall 291 in this embodiment) which opposes the side frame plates 12 and 13 among the peripheral walls 290-293. It extends toward the rear. In addition, the main body frame 3 is integrally molded, and the back cover 58 is provided on the rear end surface of the main body frame 3 (open side rear surface wall 294, upper rear surface wall 295, shaft support side rear surface wall 296). Thereby, the back cover 58 can be provided without worrying about interference between the hinge for opening and closing the back cover and the outer frame (more specifically, the side frame plate) as in the prior art. Accordingly, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 can be made closer to the inner ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the pivot support side and the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the open side can be increased. Can be wide.

  Next, the flow of game balls flowing through the prize ball tank 50, the tank rail member 51, the ball path unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 43. FIG. FIG. 41 is as described above, and FIG. 43 is a side sectional view of the pachinko machine.

  The prize ball tank 50 is disposed in front of the open side rear wall 294 and above the outer frame 2 (more specifically, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 extending from the upper side of the main body frame 3 toward the rear. Placed on the top surface). By the way, since the prize ball tank 50 receives the game balls circulated and supplied from the island facility, the position of the pachinko machine 1 is uniquely determined. That is, since the island facility cannot be remodeled unnecessarily, it is necessary to be able to receive a game ball supplied from the island facility even if any pachinko machine is installed on the island. However, the prize ball tank 50 of this embodiment includes a position (region) for receiving a game ball supplied from the island facility, and is disposed over a wide region extending from the upper surface of the peripheral wall 290 to 293. Thereby, even if the prize ball tank 50 is formed in a shallow dish shape, a large amount of game balls can be stored. As a result, the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged in the vertical direction (the height direction viewed from the player). Therefore, the game area 20 can be enlarged both in the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and the effect space 510G provided behind the game panel 409 can be enlarged both in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. As a result, the game area 20 and the effect space 510G that are enlarged in both the left and right directions and the up and down direction can be formed, so that it is possible to provide a game full of three-dimensionality and profound feeling.

  The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 50 flow to the tank rail member 51 by a gravitational action. The tank rail member 51 is a double rail, and game balls are alternately sent from the respective rails to the ball path unit 52 by the ball feeding mechanism 63. The tank rail member 51 is disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294.

  The ball passage unit 52 is a single rail, and is meandered in the width direction (left and right direction as viewed from the player) so that the game ball flowing down by its own weight meanders and flows down. Thereby, the ball pressure more than necessary is not applied to the game ball flowing down in the tank rail member 51. Then, the game balls flowing through the ball passage unit 52 are sent to the ball payout device 53 one by one. The ball passage unit 52 is disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294. Further, by making the ball passage unit 52 a single rail, the thickness of the ball passage unit 52 can be reduced in both the front-rear direction and the left-right direction as viewed from the front, and the ball passage unit 52 can be made compact. Can do. Furthermore, since the ball passage unit 52 can meander in the left-right direction, a wide-area effect space 510G formed by the back unit 510 over the entire back side of the game panel 409 can be secured.

  The ball payout device 53 is a device that pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 in accordance with a prize, and has a payout motor 61 (see FIG. 11) for ball cutting. And along the rear surface of the open side rear wall 294, it is disposed below the ball passage unit 52. However, since the game ball paid out from the ball payout device 53 is supplied to the storage unit 361 by the action of gravity, the ball payout device 53 needs to be arranged at a position higher than the storage unit 361. In the present embodiment, the ball payout device 53 is disposed behind the open-side rear wall 294 and slightly higher than the storage portion 361, and is disposed as low as possible ( At least below the effect display device 115).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11, a ball supply passage 59 formed in the internal space is formed between the ball payout device 53 and the storage unit 361 so that the flow path of the game ball meanders. A ball outlet 440, which is an opening formed on the most downstream side of the game ball in the ball supply passage 59, communicates with a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 30 and 31) of the dish unit 300 described later. Then, the game balls paid out from the ball payout device 53 are paid out to the storage unit 361 through the ball supply passage 59 and the prize ball communication rod 431. The ball supply passage 59 can store game balls as much as possible from the rear of the open side rear wall 294 to the storage unit 361. That is, although this ball supply passage 59 cannot be visually recognized by the player, it can substantially store the paid-out game balls, so that there are more game balls than the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage unit 361 (part that can be viewed). Can actually be stored. In particular, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can store the same or more game balls in the storage unit 361, although there is no conventional lower dish.

  On the other hand, on the most upstream side of the game ball in the ball supply passage 59, the above-described ball payout device 53 is connected, and a ball inlet 438 which is an opening through which the game ball can flow is formed. The ball entrance 438 communicates with the foul port 473 on the back side of the game effect unit 4. Here, among the game balls that have been ejected by the launching device 57 and entered the game effect unit 4, they do not reach the game area 20 and are formed in the ball guide path (the gap between the outer rail unit 472 and the inner rail unit 462). The hit ball that has flowed backward through the game ball injection path falls into the foul port 473. Then, the game ball dropped into the foul port 473 is guided from the back side of the game effect unit 4 to the ball supply passage 59 via the ball inlet 438, and the ball supply passage 59 and the prize ball contact box 431 are the same as described above. After that, it is discharged to the storage unit 361. The ball dispensing device 53 is also provided with a ball removal connecting passage 415 that is a flow path for discharging the game balls with the ball removed from the bottom of the pachinko machine 1 to the inside of the island.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the tank rail member 51, the ball passage unit 52, and the ball dispensing device 53 are all disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294 (that is, the above-mentioned). It will be arranged on the rear side of the game box. Thereby, it does not interfere with the display device control board box 119 which is arranged behind the above-mentioned wide-area effect space 510G and attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. Therefore, it is possible to freely design the arrangement positions of the tank rail member 51, the ball path unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 while ensuring the wide production space 510G and increasing the size of the production display device 115. In particular, it is necessary for the ball passage unit 52 to escape the ball pressure by folding back so that a load exceeding a predetermined ball pressure is not applied. However, since the ball passage unit 52 in the present embodiment is a compact single rail, and is arranged meandering in the left-right direction along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294, the arrangement position and the meandering method can be changed. It can be designed freely, and it is possible to avoid clogging due to abnormal ball pressure.

  In addition, since the ball payout device 53 is arranged as low as possible, it is possible to secure a certain amount or more of the game balls present in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a ball shortage trouble. That is, if a certain amount or more of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be secured, for example, when a large amount of game balls are paid out, the game paid out more than the amount of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 There is concern that the amount of spheres will exceed. Since the amount of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 is determined by the amount of game balls existing between the prize ball tank 50 and the ball payout device 53, the ball payout device 53 is arranged as low as possible. Trouble caused by the shortage of balls can be suppressed.

  If the ball payout device 53 is arranged below, the time from winning a game ball to paying out a game ball as a winning ball is shortened, and it is confirmed that the game ball as a prize ball has been paid out reliably. May not be able to confirm. In other words, if there is a certain time lag between winning a prize and paying out a prize ball and paying out a game ball as a winning ball, rather than a series of actions of winning and winning a ball being performed instantaneously It is easy to perform both checks. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the ball supply passage 59 is provided between the ball payout device 53 and the storage portion 361, and the ball passage unit 52 is a single rail. By disposing 53 below, it is possible to provide a certain time lag between winning a prize and paying out a prize ball while suppressing a problem of running out of balls.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the game board attached to the main body frame is a mountain shape in which only the center portion where the effect display device is provided in the lateral width direction protrudes backward in plan view (that is, when viewed from above). It was common to have a shape or a pyramid shape. However, the game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment has a square shape having substantially the same protruding width in the rear direction in the horizontal width direction in plan view (that is, when viewed from above). Therefore, the game effect unit 4 has a substantially box-like appearance as a whole, but such a characteristic shape is caused by the following points.

  That is, in the game effect unit 4, the effect display device 115 is disposed behind (in the depth direction) the game panel 409 as described above, and a wide effect space 510G is formed in the gap between the effect display device 115 and the game panel 409. doing. With this structure, the substantially center portion of the game effect unit 4 in the front view largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (in the depth direction).

Further, in the game effect unit 4, a feather-shaped decorative body 530 or a light-shaped decorative body 520 as a plurality of light emitting members each having an LED substrate behind is provided behind the game panel 409 around the effect display device 115 in a front view. It is arranged. Various substrates such as lighting / flashing control of the LED substrate behind the light emitting member behind these light emitting members (more specifically, on the back side of the decorative plate 521 inside the back box 514). Is provided.

  In this way, the game effect unit 4 has a plurality of light emitting members and various substrates related to them on the outer peripheral portion with respect to the substantially central portion in front view. Therefore, the outer peripheral portion with respect to the substantially central portion of the game effect unit 4 also largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (depth direction). With this structure, almost the entire area of the game effect unit 4 in the front view protrudes greatly behind the game panel 409 (in the depth direction), and forms a substantially box-shaped appearance as a whole. Then, the substantially box-shaped game effect unit 4 can be closely fitted into the effect space 510G having a space shape substantially equal to that of the game effect unit 4.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
Next, control configurations of the main board and the peripheral board of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. FIG. 44 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main board. FIG. 45 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the peripheral substrate. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  The control of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 700 (shown in FIG. 44) and a group of peripheral boards 800 (shown in FIG. 45). The group of main boards 700 controls game operations (winning detection, random number acquisition and winning determination, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 800 has stage operations (issue decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display). And the operation of the decorative body).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the main board 700 includes a main control board 710 and a payout control board 720. The main control board 710 includes a CPU 711 as a central processing unit, a ROM 712 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 713 as a readable / writable memory.

  The CPU 711 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 712, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 800 or the payout control board 720.

  The RAM 713 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 710.

  Note that the main board 700 is connected to the power supply board 395 so that operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395. Specifically, operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395 to the payout control board 720, and operating power is supplied to the main control board 710 via the payout control board 720.

  The input interface of the main control board 710 detects the winning state to the first starting port sensor 780 and the second starting port 602 for detecting the winning state to the first starting port 600 via the panel relay terminal plate 750. The second start port sensor 782 that performs, the third start port sensor 784 that detects the winning state to the third start port 604, the gate sensor 760 that detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 612, and the general winning port 614. A general winning opening sensor 762 for detecting that the ball has won is connected.

  Further, an opening / closing device count sensor 776 is connected to an input interface of the main control board 710 via an opening / closing device relay terminal plate 754 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 750.

  Detection signals from the sensors are input to the main control board 710.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display substrate 768 is connected to an output interface of the panel relay terminal board 750 via a symbol limiting resistor substrate 766. Thereby, the main control board 710 can output drive signals to the normal symbol display 82, the first special symbol display 84, and the second special symbol display 86.

  Also, the output interface of the switchgear relay terminal plate 754 is connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid 774 and a switchgear open / close solenoid 778. From the main control board 710, the normal electric accessory solenoid 774 and the switchgear open / close solenoid 778 are connected. A drive signal is output toward. The ordinary electric accessory solenoid 774 drives a pair of movable pieces 606 provided above the third starting port 604, and the switching device opening / closing solenoid 778 is a switching device 500 (more specifically, a prize winning port). The door 500b) is driven.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 720 includes a CPU 722 as a central processing unit, a ROM 724 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 726 as a readable / writable memory.

  Then, the payout control board 720 processes the command signal input from the main control board 710 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 53 and the launching device 57 including the launching handle and the firing motor. Thereby, the ball payout device 53 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch device 57 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  Also connected to the input interface of the payout control board 720 are an inner frame opening switch 736 for detecting the opening state of the front frame (not shown) of the main body frame 3 and a door opening switch 738 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5. Has been.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 710 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 720 to the main control board 710.

  The payout control board 720 is also connected to a tray full tank switch 730 for detecting that the game balls stored in the dish 360 are full. “Please remove from 360”.

  An external terminal board 56 is connected to the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720. Various information such as a winning state at each start opening 600, 602, 604, a variation state of a normal symbol / special symbol, and a gaming state based on a lottery result are provided in a hall provided in a gaming facility via the external terminal board 56. Output to a computer or the like.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 800 includes a peripheral control substrate 810 and a display device control substrate 816 as shown in FIG. Note that communication in only one direction is performed between the output interface and the input interface between the main control board 710 and the peripheral control board 810. That is, even if a command is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810, no command is transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 to the main control board 710. Further, the operating power supplied to the peripheral board 800 is supplied via the main control board 710.

  The peripheral control board 810 also includes electronic components such as a CPU 811, ROM 812, and RAM 813, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 810 includes a ROM 819 that stores sound sources that are the basis for effect sounds and musical effects such as music, and effects such as sound effects and music that are based on the contents of the effects based on the sound sources stored in the ROM 819. A sound source IC 818 that outputs sound is provided.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 810 and the display device control board 816 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 115 is connected to the display device control board 816. The display device control board 816 processes the command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 and outputs a drive signal to the effect display device 115. Note that the display device control board 816 includes a CPU 832, a RAM 834, a ROM 836, a VDP 838, and an image ROM 839.

  The CPU 832 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 810 via the input / output interface, performs arithmetic processing based on the command, and controls the VDP 838.

  The RAM 834 provides a work area for the CPU 832 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 836 holds a program for the CPU 832 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 838 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 838, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 838, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 832 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode on the effect display device 115 can be changed variously.

  The image ROM 839 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  As described above, the peripheral board 800 (peripheral control board 810 and display device control board 816) performs effect control for an image displayed on the effect display device 115, including a variable display effect for a decorative symbol 1153 described later. It is a part to do.

  Further, a lamp driving board 850 and a frame decoration relay terminal board 240 are connected to the peripheral control board 810.

  A panel decoration lamp 852 and a center decoration lamp 853 are connected to the output interface of the lamp driving board 850. Thereby, the lamp drive board 850 can switch the lighting state of each of these lamps. Further, a discharge port detection sensor 854 that detects a game ball (that is, an out ball) discharged to the rear side of the game panel 409 is connected to the input interface of the lamp driving board 850.

  The frame decoration relay terminal board 240 connected to the peripheral control board 810 is connected to speakers 144 and 341 connected to the door frame 5, operation buttons 327, a frame decoration lamp 842, and the like. In other words, the effect mode output to the effect display device 115 is switched based on the operation state of the operation button 327 and a drive signal is output to the speakers 144 and 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, functional configurations of the main control board 710 constituting the main board 700 of the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control board 810 constituting the peripheral board 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a functional block diagram schematically showing functional configurations of the main control board and the peripheral control board.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the main control board 710 includes a gaming state control means 934, a first special symbol lottery means 900, a first special symbol display control means 702, a first special symbol hold display control means 930, First special symbol hold counter 903, second special symbol lottery means 910, second special symbol display control means 704, second special symbol hold display control means 932, second special symbol hold counter 913, hold order Storage means 940, success / failure determination random number storage area 5131, processing area 5132, jackpot game execution means 715, special electric accessory operation processing means 714, opening / closing operation control means 938, normal symbol lottery means 920, Normal symbol display control means 716, normal symbol hold display control means 718, normal symbol hold means 923, movable piece open / close control means 928, command transmission means It is provided with a 46, a.

  The gaming state control means 934 determines which gaming state the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is, and controls the gaming state based on the determined gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is an external game state in which the game state can be grasped from the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and the player is more external than the external normal game state (normal game state) and this external normal game state. The game state is controlled to any one of the external advantageous game states (chance game state) that is advantageous to the game.

  The external normal game state is a game state in which a later-described opening extension function (so-called time-shortening function) is not activated, and is a game state in which the pair of movable pieces 606 are not controlled in a later-described promotion mode. That is, as will be described later, the pair of movable pieces 606 opens and closes when triggered by the lottery process by the normal symbol lottery means 920, and thereby, the winning probability of the game ball to the third start port 604 As the operation mode when the movable piece 606 operates, the first operation mode and the second operation mode (promotion mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first operation mode are provided. And are prepared. Of these, in the external normal gaming state, the first operation mode is adopted as the operation mode when the movable piece 606 operates. In addition, this 1st operation | movement aspect is an aspect in which the winning of a game ball to the said 3rd starting port 604 is hard to be promoted, for example, the aspect by which the 3rd starting port 604 is maintained in a closed state, or A mode in which the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened to the extent that they do not affect the winning of the game ball as compared to the case where the third start port 604 is maintained in the closed state (ie, even if the movable pieces 606 are opened and closed) This is a mode in which the winning frequency at the third start port 604 is substantially the same as when the closed state is maintained. “To the extent that it does not affect the winning of the game ball” is almost equivalent to the case where the winning frequency at the third start port 604 is maintained in the closed state even if the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed. That is, even if the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened, it means that the winning of the game ball to the third starting port 604 is hardly promoted.

  On the other hand, the external advantageous game state is a game state in which an opening extension function to be described later operates, and a game in which the second operation mode (promotion mode) is adopted as an operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 606 operate. State. Here, the “promotion mode” is a mode in which winning of the game ball to the third starting port 604 is promoted, and for example, a mode in which a longer time is adopted as the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 606. It is. That is, the “promotion mode” means that the winning probability in the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 is increased, the lottery time by the normal symbol lottery means 920 is shortened (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened), and the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 606. Up is equivalent. However, it is good also as a promotion aspect by performing only any one or two among these three aspects, and is good also as a promotion aspect by performing all three.

  In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 includes an internally controlled gaming state that is difficult to grasp from the appearance. In the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a later-described probability changing function (so-called probability variation function) operates and a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate correspond to it.

  When the probability variation function is not activated, the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 performs the lottery process with a predetermined low probability (first probability) of winning the jackpot. On the other hand, when the probability changing function is activated, the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 causes the probability of winning the jackpot to be at least twice as high as the first probability (in this embodiment, the first symbol lottery means 910). The lottery process is performed with a second probability (winning probability B) that is 10 times the probability of 1 (winning probability A). In this way, when the probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot is at least double that when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is activated. This is to reduce the interest by reducing the number of fluctuations in the special symbol so that it can win the jackpot.

  In this embodiment, a gaming state in which neither the opening extension function nor the probability changing function is operated is referred to as “external normal gaming state A”, and a gaming state in which the opening extension function is not operated but the probability changing function is operated is referred to as “external normal gaming state B”. The game state in which the release extension function operates but the probability change function does not operate is referred to as “external advantageous game state A”, and the game state in which both the release extension function and the probability change function operate is referred to as “external advantage game state B”. Called. The above-mentioned “external normal gaming state” means both “external normal gaming state A” and “external normal gaming state B”, and the above “external advantageous gaming state” means “external advantageous gaming state” It is meant to include both “A” and “external advantageous gaming state B”.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player cannot distinguish between the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B. Similarly, the external advantageous gaming state A and the external advantageous gaming state B Can not be distinguished. Therefore, the player determines that the game state is advantageous to him if the game is in the external advantageous game state, and determines that the game state is not advantageous to him in the normal normal game state.

  In addition, a change from any gaming state to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player is performed only when the condition device is activated. Of the four game states (external normal game state A, external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A, external advantageous game state B), the most advantageous game state for the player is external advantageous game state B. Yes, the most disadvantageous game state for the player is the external normal game state A. Accordingly, a change from the external normal game state A to another game state (external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A and external advantageous game state B), a change from the external advantageous game state A to the external advantageous game state B, etc. Is not performed unless the condition device is activated.

  The first special symbol lottery means 900, when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780 based on the winning of the first start port 600, out of the random numbers for the validity determination generated in the random number range of 0 to 652. One random number is acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquiring means 902. The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held to a first predetermined number (for example, 4) by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Then, when the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 is released, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to be determined are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and the first special symbol determination unit 904 performs the determination. It is determined whether the jackpot is won or whether a specific condition is met.

  In the case of the external special gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 determines whether or not the randomness value is acquired by the first special symbol appropriateness determination random number acquisition unit 902. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the figure determination table 906. In this embodiment, since 19 and 457 are jackpot random numbers (random numbers determined to be jackpot winning), first, whether or not the random number values acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 are these jackpot random numbers. If it is a jackpot random number, the jackpot game execution means 715 executes the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, in the case of the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 is performed by using the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 and the first random symbol value. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the probability variation special figure determination table 908. In this embodiment, 19, 41, 71, 97, 101, 137, 167, 181, 191, 199, 233, 263, 277, 331, 353, 373, 419, 457, 499 and 509 are jackpot random numbers. Then, it is determined whether or not the random value acquired by the first special symbol winning / determining random number acquiring means 902 is a big hit random number.

  When the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port sensor 784 based on the winning of the second start port 602 or the third start port 604, the second special symbol lottery means 910 The second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 acquires one random number among the special symbol success / failure determination random numbers generated with a random number range of 0 to 652 in the same manner as when the first start opening 600 is won. . The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 up to a second predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913 is released, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and are determined by the second special symbol determination unit 914. It is determined whether the jackpot is won or whether a specific condition is met.

  In the case of the external special gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, whether the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 914 determines whether or not the random number value acquired by the second special symbol appropriateness determination random number acquisition unit 912 and the second normal special event determination unit 914 It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the figure determination table 907. Note that the jackpot random number stored in the second normal special figure determination table 907 is the same as the jackpot random number stored in the first normal special figure determination table 906.

  On the other hand, in the case of the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is made by using the random number value acquired by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 and the second random symbol value. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the probability variation special figure determination table 909. The jackpot random number stored in the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 is the same as the jackpot random number stored in the first probability variation special figure determination table 908.

  When a jackpot game is being executed, even if a game ball wins the first start port 600, the winning / nothing determination is not performed, and the acquired random number for determining whether or not the winning ball is determined is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not the game is successful. At the same time, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is counted up. Also, the first normal special figure determination table 906, the second normal special figure determination table 907, the first probability variation special figure determination table 908, and the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 are all stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 44). ing.

  In this way, different tables are used for the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 and the hit determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. In this way, by varying the lottery process depending on which start port among the start ports 600, 602, and 604 is awarded, it is possible to increase variations in game content and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure stores a lottery order for each special symbol lottery means (that is, a lottery order by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and a lottery order by the second special symbol lottery means 910). However, the lottery order in which both are merged (that is, the order in which the game balls are detected by the start port sensors 780, 782, 784) is not stored. Order in which the game balls are detected by the start port sensors 780, 782, 784 (that is, the order in which random numbers are acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 or the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912) Is stored by the hold order storage means 940. Accordingly, the first special symbol lottery means 900 (specifically, the first special symbol determination unit 904) or the second special symbol lottery means 910 (specifically, the second special symbol lottery means 904) based on the order stored by the holding order storage means 940. The special symbol success / failure determination means 914) determines whether the acquired random numbers are correct or not (performs the determination for each random number).

  By the way, when the result of the success / failure determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is determined to be a big hit, a symbol generated by a random number range of 0 to 99 by a symbol random number acquisition means (not shown). One random number is acquired from the random numbers. And if this acquired random number value is 39-68, it will be determined as 1st long open big hit, if it is 76-99, it will be determined as 2nd long open big hit, and if it is 3-38, 3rd long open will be determined. If it is determined to be a big hit, 0 to 2 is determined to be a first short open big hit, and if it is 69 to 75, it is determined to be a second short open big hit. When the determined jackpot type is the first long open jackpot, the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, an effect image indicating that the jackpot is won by the long open jackpot game execution means 715a is displayed. A long open jackpot (a jackpot game that prompts the player to pay out a certain amount of game balls) is executed to open and close the opening / closing device 500 under the situation displayed on the display surface of the effect display device (effect image display device) 115. Is done. On the other hand, in the case of the first short open big hit or the second short open big hit, an effect image indicating that the big win is won is displayed on the effect display device (effect image display device) 115 by the short open big hit game execution means 715b. A short open big hit (a big hit game in which the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls) is executed in which the opening / closing device 500 is opened / closed under a situation that is not displayed on the screen.

  On the other hand, if the random numbers acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 and the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 are not big hit random numbers, whether the specific condition is satisfied or not is determined. The determination is made by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. Specifically, in the first normal special figure determination table 906 and the first probability variation special figure determination table 908, 1, 3, 31, 211 among the random numbers for determination of success / failure are stored as specific condition establishment random numbers. On the other hand, in the second normal special figure determination table 907 and the second probability variation special figure determination table 909, only three of the random numbers for determination of validity are stored as specific condition establishment random numbers. When it is determined that the acquired random number is a random number that satisfies these specific conditions, the special electric combination in which the opening / closing apparatus 500 is opened / closed by the special electric combination actuating processing means 714 to approximate the opening / closing operation of the short open big hit. An object operation process is executed.

  Thus, in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is always constant regardless of whether or not the probability changing function is operating. Similarly, also in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is always constant regardless of whether or not the probability changing function is operating. However, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is different from the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (first special symbol lottery). The probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the means 900 is higher than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910).

By the way, in the case of an external advantageous game state in which the opening extension function is activated, a longer time is adopted as the opening time for the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 (promotion mode). The lottery frequency by the special symbol lottery means 910 is increased (the special symbol lottery opportunities increase). In other words, the expectation of winning the jackpot increases as the special symbol lottery opportunities increase as compared to the case of the external normal gaming state. Therefore, by making the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 relatively lower than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the player The frequency with which a specific condition with a small profit given to is satisfied is reduced. Thereby, the troublesomeness resulting from frequent establishment of a specific condition can be reduced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the case of the external normal game state A where the opening extension function does not operate, for example, a longer time is not adopted as the opening time for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 606. There are fewer lottery opportunities for special symbols compared to the gaming state in which. Here, since the special electric accessory act processing and the second short open jackpot game are very similar to each other, it is expected that the probability variation function may be activated by increasing the frequency at which the specific condition is satisfied. The frequency given to a player becomes high, and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Thus, by making the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 relatively lower than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, In any gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as described above, whether the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the second special symbol lottery means 910 are successful or not is determined by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 being released. Based on. The release condition in the present embodiment is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but is not limited thereto. For example, when a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained is determined, the determination result may be stored until the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

  The result of the determination by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 is determined by the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display control unit 704 by the first special symbol display control unit 702 or the second special symbol display control unit 704. 2 is displayed on the special symbol display 86. However, since the display is displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs, it is difficult for the player to grasp the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 or the second special symbol appropriateness determination unit 914. .

  The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 is set by the first special symbol hold display control means 930 or the second special symbol hold display control means 932, respectively. It is displayed on the display 88 or the second special symbol hold display 90.

  The jackpot game execution means 715 and the special electric accessory act processing means 714 perform the jackpot game or special electric accessory act processing based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. Run. Here, the jackpot game is a game accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the special electric accessory act is a game not accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

  The condition device operates only when the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a big hit, and from one gaming state to the one gaming state. A change (transition) to a gaming state advantageous to the player is possible only when the condition device is activated. For example, a change (transition) from the external normal gaming state A to the external normal gaming state B is a condition that the condition device operates. Therefore, the game state does not change when the special electric accessory act is executed. For example, when the special electric accessory act is executed in the external normal game state A, the external normal game state A is not changed. The external normal gaming state B continues even if the special electric accessory act is executed when the external normal gaming state B is in effect.

  Note that a change (transition) from one gaming state to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the one gaming state is not only the operation of the condition device, but also a gaming state changing lottery (from one gaming state to the one gaming state). In the case of winning a lottery (whether or not to change to a disadvantaged gaming state by the player than the gaming state of), or when a special symbol change is performed a certain number of times is there. Therefore, for example, the change (transition) from the external normal gaming state B to the external normal gaming state A, the change (transition) from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external advantageous gaming state A, etc. are cases where the condition device does not operate. May also be performed when the other conditions described above are satisfied.

  The jackpot game execution means 715 operates the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 by the opening / closing operation control means 938 if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is large. The opening / closing device 500 is opened and closed to execute a jackpot game.

  More specifically, as the type of jackpot game, the long open jackpot game in which the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 (for example, 30 sec) is relatively long and the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 (for example, 0.6 sec) are relative. There is a short short-open big hit game. If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit, the big hit game execution means The long open jackpot game execution means 715a as 715 executes the long open jackpot game. On the other hand, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is the first short open big hit or the second short open big hit, the short as the big hit game execution means 715 The open big hit game execution means 715b executes the short open big hit game.

  Here, the long open jackpot game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed 15 rounds by the opening / closing operation control means 938. The short open big hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed two rounds by the opening / closing operation control means 938. When a game ball wins the open / close device 500, the open / close device count sensor 776 counts the number of winning balls. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls as prize balls are paid out from the ball payout device 53 to the tray by the payout control board 720.

  The types of jackpot games are not limited to long-open jackpots and short-open jackpots, and the maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 is substantially the same (for example, 30 seconds), but the maximum number of times of opening is relatively There may be a large jackpot (for example, 15 rounds) and a jackpot (for example, two rounds) with a relatively small maximum number of times of opening. Further, although the maximum number of times of opening is substantially the same (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 is relatively long (for example, 30 sec) and the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 is relatively short (for example, 15 rounds). For example, it may be 0.3 sec).

  Here, “round” is an opening / closing operation unit of the opening / closing device 500 at the time of the big hit game, and after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, the closing condition is satisfied from the opened state until the opening / closing device 500 is closed. Round. The closing condition is that a predetermined time elapses after the opening / closing device 500 is opened or that the maximum number of game balls wins the opening / closing device 500. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing device 500 is closed.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the closing conditions at the time of a long open big hit game and the closing conditions at the time of a short open game are different. The closing condition in the long open jackpot game is that 30 seconds elapse after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, or that nine game balls win. On the other hand, the closing condition in the short open big hit game is that 0.6 sec elapses after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, or that three game balls win.

  The closing conditions of the opening / closing device 500 are not limited to these. However, in the long open big hit game, the closing condition is set so that the maximum number of winning game balls can be won by the opening / closing device 500 before the opening / closing device 500 is opened until a predetermined time elapses. It is preferable. On the other hand, in the short-open big hit game, it is preferable that the closing condition is set so that one or two game balls can be won by the opening / closing device 500 while the opening / closing device 500 is open.

  Thus, even if the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot is a long open jackpot and a short open jackpot The profits given to the players are greatly different. That is, when the winning jackpot type is the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit, a large amount of game balls can win the opening / closing device 500. On the other hand, when the winning jackpot type is the first short-open jackpot or the second short-open jackpot, the game device can barely win one or two game balls. Thereby, the profit given to the player is greatly different between the case where the long open jackpot game is executed and the case where the short open jackpot game is executed.

  The special electric accessory activation processing means 714 determines that the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is out of place and the specific condition is satisfied. Then, the special electric accessory actuating process for opening / closing the opening / closing device 500 is performed in a manner very similar to the short open big hit game. The “similarity (approximate) mode” includes both the mode that is exactly the same as the short open jackpot game and the mode that is very similar to the short open jackpot game.

  It should be noted that “a very similar aspect” means that the player cannot determine whether a short-open big hit game or a special electric-worker operation process has been performed simply by visually recognizing the opening state of the opening / closing device 500. It means that it is an aspect similar to. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determining unit 904 or the second special symbol appropriateness determining unit 914 is out of place and the specific condition is satisfied, the opening / closing is performed. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed twice with the closing condition of 0.6 seconds from the opening of the device 500 or the winning of three game balls (the opening / closing device 500 in the big hit game). The open / close operation unit is referred to as “round”, whereas the open / close operation unit of the open / close device 500 in the special electric accessory operation processing is referred to as “time”).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the effect display device 115 and the sound effect and effect sound output from the speakers 144 and 341 are the same as when the special electric accessory actuating process is completed and when the second short opening jackpot. It is very similar to each other when the short open big hit game based on is over. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not include a state notification unit such as a state notification lamp for notifying which gaming state the internal gaming state is (a general gaming machine has a state notification lamp). Therefore, the internal game state (whether or not the probability changing function is activated) is not notified at all (in fact, the player may not even know the existence of the external normal game state B). Thereby, even if the player notices that the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 has been performed, the player grasps whether the opening / closing device 500 is based on the second short opening jackpot or on the establishment of a specific condition. (In a general gaming machine in which the gaming state is notified, the probability changing function is activated when the short open big hit game is executed, and it is notified that the probability changing function is activated). In addition, since the opening extension function operates after the short opening jackpot game based on the first short opening jackpot is completed, it can be understood that the game was the first short opening jackpot game. Further, “very similar” means not only the same thing but also a very similar thing.

  In this way, in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910, there is a possibility that a specific condition may be satisfied even if the big win is not won, and the short open big hit game And the special electric accessory actuating process are very similar to each other, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in the normal gaming state.

  In addition, the jackpot determination by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 is performed separately from the determination of establishment of the specific condition. Here, assuming that the determination of establishment of the specific condition is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the jackpot is successful, the winning determination of the jackpot is not performed when the specific condition is satisfied. That is, the determination of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied is based on the premise that the jackpot determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 is out of order, and therefore the determination of whether or not the jackpot is determined If the determination of establishment of the specific condition is made first, the opportunity to win a jackpot will be lost when the specific condition is satisfied. Accordingly, by determining whether or not the jackpot is won prior to the determination of the establishment of the specific condition, whether or not the jackpot is determined in all the special symbols drawn by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910. As a result, the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the establishment of the specific condition is not treated as a failure (that is, treated as a winning type), and the jackpot determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a win, It is possible to make the winning and the establishment of the specific condition overlap, but in this case, it is necessary to decide which one is to be given priority, which is complicated in terms of control. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, control complexity can be avoided by determining whether the specific condition is satisfied only when the jackpot is not won (only when the winning combination is lost). Furthermore, two lottery opportunities for determining whether or not the jackpot is successful and determining whether or not the specific condition is satisfied can be given, and the player can be given a feeling of feeling, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is set higher than the probability of winning the jackpot, and whether the special electric accessory act is executed or the short open jackpot game is executed. I can't. Therefore, when the player is in the external normal gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, the expectation that the player may win a short open jackpot that may cause the probability variation function to operate each time a specific condition is satisfied. It can have a feeling and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, by giving the player a sense of expectation that is changed from the external normal gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A to the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the player cannot stop stopping the game. As a result, the operation rate of the pachinko machine is improved, and a profit is also provided for the game shop.

  On the other hand, even if the specific condition is satisfied or the short open jackpot is won in the external normal game state B or the external advantageous game state B, the external normal game state B or the external advantageous game state B is continued (that is, The operation of the probability variation function continues), so that the player can feel secure. That is, even if the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed twice (or two rounds) in the external normal game state B or the external advantageous game state B, the external normal game state A or the external advantageous game state A is changed. Since there is nothing, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  It should be noted that the same special table need not be used as the table used for the determination of the success / failure by the first special symbol determination unit 904 and the second special symbol determination unit 914. The first special symbol determination unit 904 and the second special symbol determination unit 904 are not necessarily used. Different tables may be used for each of the determination units 914. In this case, the winning probability in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 may be different from the winning probability in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910. Furthermore, a mode (for example, given to a player) is different between the jackpot game mode when winning in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the jackpot game mode when winning in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which profits differ.

  Next, lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 will be described.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 612 and is detected by the gate sensor 760, the normal symbol lottery means 920 obtains one random number among the normal symbol appropriateness determination random numbers generated in the random number range of 0 to 250 as the normal symbol. It is acquired by the random number acquisition means 922 for determining whether or not it is correct. The acquired random number is stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by a normal symbol holding means 923 having a storage area for storing the acquired random number and a normal symbol holding counter for storing the number of the acquired random numbers as a counter value. Deferred. When the normal symbol holding means 923 cancels the hold, the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 determines whether or not the normal symbol is determined.

  In the normal normal game state, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 924 is determined based on the random number value acquired by the normal symbol determination unit 922 and the normal general symbol determination table 926. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934. In this embodiment, since 246 to 250 are hit random numbers, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are those hit random numbers. The opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the means 928. At this time, the variation time of the normal symbol is 4000 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 performs an opening / closing operation once for an opening time of 180 ms (normal mode).

  On the other hand, in the case of an external advantageous game state, the success / failure determination by the normal symbol success / failure determination unit 924 is performed based on the random number value acquired by the normal symbol determination / rejection determination random number acquisition unit 922 and the open extended general symbol determination table 927. As described above, the game state control means 934 controls the game. In the present embodiment, since 1 to 250 is a hit random number, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are those hit random numbers. The opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the means 928. At this time, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1024 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 executes the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 1300 msec three times and the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 856 msec twice (promotion mode).

  As described above, when the game is in the external advantageous game state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the third start port 604 is dramatically improved as compared to the case of the external normal game state. Therefore, in the case of an external advantageous game state, the number of special symbol lottery opportunities increases dramatically, and a sense of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed increases, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Here, the normal map determination table 926 and the open extended map determination table 927 are both stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 44).

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 924 is determined to be a win even in the external normal gaming state, and the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 can be executed. Thus, the hit probability may be zero when in the external normal gaming state. That is, the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 may be performed only in the external advantageous gaming state.

  The determination result by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 924 is displayed on the normal symbol display 82 by the normal symbol display control unit 716. Also, the number of holds by the normal symbol holding means 923 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 718.

  The movable piece opening / closing control means 928 operates the normal electric accessory solenoid 774 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 606 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 is winning. However, as described above, the opening / closing operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 606 is different between the case of the external advantageous gaming state and the case of the external normal gaming state (in the case of the external advantageous gaming state, the third start The winning of the game ball to the mouth 604 is made easier than in the case of the external normal game state).

  In the present embodiment, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is impossible to win a game ball in the third starting port 604, and the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed. Thus, the winning of the game ball to the third start port 604 is easier than the winning of the game ball to the first start port 600 and the second start port 602. However, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is not limited to a mode in which winning of the game ball to the third start port 604 is impossible, and winning of the game ball to the third start port 604 is the first start. It may be more difficult than winning a game ball to the mouth 600 or the second start port 602.

  The command transmission unit 946 transmits the lottery result by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral board 800. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to a variation time of the decorative symbol performed in the effect display device 115.

  It should be noted that the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904, the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914, and the normal symbol success / failure determination means 924 does not necessarily include a deviation. For example, if the special electric accessory operation process is executed in such a manner that it is extremely difficult to win a game ball to the opening / closing device 500, the special electric accessory operation process is performed when all winnings are not won. Anyway.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, in the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is made prior to the determination of establishment of the specific condition is as described above. Although a remarkable effect is brought about, the establishment of the specific condition may be treated as the winning type, and the determination of whether or not the jackpot is successful and the establishment of the specific condition may be performed collectively.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 810 includes command receiving means 950, effect lottery means 960, and effect control means 962, as shown in FIG.

  The command receiving unit 950 is a part that receives the determination result by the first special symbol admission / rejection determination unit 904 or the second special symbol adequacy determination unit 914 transmitted from the main control board 710 and information related to the determination result.

  The effect lottery means 960, as will be described later, produces an effect mode to be displayed on the effect display device 115 based on a command transmitted from the main control board 710 and sound effects and music output from the speakers 144 and 341. Etc., and the display mode of each lamp 842, 852, 853, and the like.

  The effect control unit 962 is a part that transmits information to the display device control board 816 so that the effect mode determined by the effect lottery unit 960 is displayed on the effect display device 115. In addition, the effect sound and the display are controlled via the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 so that the speakers 144 and 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842 are output and displayed. Further, the display on the panel decoration lamp 852 and the center decoration lamp 853 is also controlled via the lamp driving board 850.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main board 700 according to the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 64.

[About main system processing]
First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main system processing executed by the CPU mounted on the main control board of the main board.

As shown in FIG. 47, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 711 (see FIG. 44) executes power-on processing (step S10). In this power-on process, first, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (see FIG. 44) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). That is, the RAM 713 of this embodiment.
The (data memory) has a backup area in which various control data is backed up by constantly supplying power. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the processing area of the RAM 713 to the backup area, and the temporarily saved data when the power is restored. Is read out to the processing area of the RAM 713, so that a game with continuity can be executed from the time of power-off.

  Therefore, in this power-on process (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup area) is normal, the process of returning to the power supply stop state according to the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (power recovery) Time processing). On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is deleted. After that, in the RAM 713, various control data necessary for the progress of the game such as jackpot winning probability and control data indicating the current game state are written with respective initial parameters (initialization). processing). Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

  The current gaming state written in the power-on process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810, and the display on the effect display device 115 is controlled based on this command. In this way, the current gaming state at the time of a power failure is stored in the RAM 713 of the main control board 710, and the current gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 after power recovery, so that even if there is a power failure, The game state displayed on the effect display device 115 can be matched (the peripheral control board 810 does not store the game state at the time of power failure). By the way, with respect to the current gaming state, in order to synchronize the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol corresponding symbol of the effect display device 115 with the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern described later at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol. The information of the command is transmitted. Immediately after transmitting the command, a command for the current game information is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 each time. As a result, the peripheral control board 810 can always grasp the current gaming state.

  However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM erase switch that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is on. That is, even when this RAM erase switch is on, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is erased. At the same time, various control data necessary for the game progress, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current game state, are written in the processing area of the RAM 713 with respective initial parameters. Processing). In the state in which such initialization processing has been performed (at the initial time), the control data indicating the jackpot winning probability shows the first probability (winning probability A), which indicates the current gaming state. The control data indicates an “external normal gaming state A” which is a gaming state in which neither the opening extension function nor the probability changing function is activated. Therefore, if the pair of movable pieces 606 may operate at the time of initializing, the pair of movable pieces 606 performs an opening / closing operation once for an opening time of 180 ms (normal mode).

  Further, in the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 710 (see FIG. 44) has been activated when such initialization processing is executed is sent to the peripheral control board 810 (FIG. 45). The process of setting to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 810 that the main control board 710 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 713, and the power supply is started when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 711 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 710 is stopped Is done. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 710 in step S20, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S40).

  The process at the time of the power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as “recovery”). This is a process of temporarily saving data in the backup area of the RAM 713 when a power failure occurs in order to start. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power-off occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 711 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, the checksum in the processing area of the RAM 713 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored in the backup area of the RAM 713 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 713 before the power failure are properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 711 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 713 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 711 prohibits access to the RAM 713 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to an extremely short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 711 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, the process is started when the power is cut off due to a momentary power failure, and even when the infinite loop shown in FIG.

  Instead of the backup area of the RAM 713, a rewritable nonvolatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 713 may be a backup area in which data is backed up by constantly supplying power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the specific area of the RAM 713 to another area when the power is shut off. In addition, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 711 mounted on the main control board 710 of the main board 700 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 711 executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, detection signals from the various sensors described above (gate sensor 760, first start port sensor 780, second start port sensor 782, third start port sensor 784, opening / closing device count sensor 776, etc.) are used. Execute the process to be monitored.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 720 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 760 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing opening / closing control of the movable piece 606 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processing from the start of the special symbol change to the start of the winning game is executed, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing device 500 as the special electric accessory is performed. Execute the process.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 810 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 711 in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, random numbers for success / failure determination, design random numbers, random numbers for reach determination (more strictly speaking, random numbers for high expectation effect determination), variation pattern random numbers, and random numbers for normal design success / failure determination Etc.

  The determination random number is a determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game or special electric accessory actuating process. When the design random number is determined to generate a jackpot game, the type of jackpot (first long opening jackpot, second long opening jackpot, third long opening jackpot, first short opening jackpot and second short opening jackpot) It is a random number used for the determination of. The reach determination random number is used to determine whether or not to perform a highly anticipated effect such as a reach effect when it is determined that the jackpot is not won (i.e., missed) and the specific condition is not satisfied. The random number used. The variation pattern random number is a random number used for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86. The normal symbol determination random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be in an open state.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern of the decorative design that is display-controlled by the effect display device 115 may be determined by a variation pattern random number, and is mounted on the CPU 811 or the display device control board 816 mounted on the peripheral control board 810 of the peripheral board 800. It may be determined by the CPU 832 (see FIG. 45). The variation pattern random number is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number.

  Among these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, the pair of movable pieces 606 are controlled in an open state in which it is easy to accept a winning / non-judgment random number, a design random number, and a game ball related to the occurrence of the jackpot game or the special electric machine actuating process. The random number for determination per ordinary symbol related to whether or not to do is updated. Here, the random numbers used for determining whether or not the big hit game is generated and whether or not the pair of movable pieces 606 are controlled to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing in this way, the probability in the predetermined period in each random number (the probability that it is determined that the jackpot game or the special electric accessory actuating process is generated, the probability that the pair of movable pieces 606 are controlled to be opened) Can be made constant (that is, it is possible to prevent the probability from being biased by aiming or the like), and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are updated regardless of the occurrence of the winning game and the display result of the normal symbol. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 710 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update process, when the counter for updating the random number for determining whether or not the circuit has made one round, the determination is made to start counting next. The initial value determination random number or the like for determining the initial value of the random number is also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for acquiring the random number for determination of success / failure, there are provided two means: a first special symbol determination / random determination acquisition means 902 and a second special symbol determination / random determination acquisition means 912. However, only one of these may be provided.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

  In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, first, second, and third start-up prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 600, the second start port 602, and the third start port 604, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first, second, and third start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first, second, and third start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (in step S120). YES) A variation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether or not to start the jackpot game or special electric accessory actuating process, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 is determined, and the variation pattern is set to the variation pattern. A correspondingly set fluctuation time (the time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86) is set in the timer. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is made in the variation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to "3". If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, the process selection flag is set to "3". The process selection flag is updated to “0” if neither the big win nor the determination that the specific condition is satisfied has been made. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, a jackpot type (long open jackpot or short open jackpot) is determined, and the number of rounds, opening time, and game ball winning for controlling the opening / closing operation of the switchgear 500 according to the jackpot type. Set the limit number and update the processing flag to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), the process when the specific condition is satisfied (step S220) is executed. In this special electric accessory actuating process, the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening / closing device 500 are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In this special electric utility jackpot control process, the opening / closing operation of the switchgear 500 is controlled based on the number of rounds, the opening time and the number of game balls that can be won in the jackpot game start process (step S200), and the jackpot game ends. In the case of performing, a process of updating whether or not to operate the probability variation function and the time reduction function and updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the special electric accessory actuating process (step S250) is executed. In the special electric combination actuating process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is controlled based on the number of times of opening, the opening time, and the limited number set in the process when the specific condition is satisfied (step S220). When the object operation process ends, a process for updating the process flag to “0” is performed. Note that the special electric accessory act processing is not a game involving the operation of the condition device like the big hit game, but as described above, it is a game that is very similar to a short open big hit game that is a kind of big hit game.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[About the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd starting opening prize process]
Next, the first, second, and third start opening prize winning processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third start-up prize winning processes.

In the first, second, and third starting opening winning process, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second starting opening 602 or the third starting opening 604 (step S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of game ball detection by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port 784 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port sensor 784, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604 (YES in step S1101). ). If there is no detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 782 and the third start port sensor 784, no game ball is won in any of the second start port 602 and the third start port 604 (in step S1101). NO).

  When it is determined in step S1101 that the game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604, various data (random determination random numbers acquired by the second special symbol determination random number acquisition means 912, symbol random numbers). , Special symbol type). Then, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102).

If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the CPU 711 performs a second hold storage process (step S1103), and then proceeds to step S1104. move on. In the second hold storage process, various types of data (win / fail determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the second start port 602 are stored in the random number determination random storage region 5131. This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913. The random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to win has a random number storage area for determining whether or not to win, a symbol random number storage area, and a special symbol type storage area, and a game ball wins a prize in the second start port 602 or the third start port 604. Various data acquired by doing so are stored in the respective storage areas.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S1101 that no game ball has won any of the second start port 602 and the third start port 604 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the second special symbol hold counter When it is determined that the counter value of 913 has reached the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the CPU 711 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 600 (step S1104). Specifically, the presence / absence of game ball detection by the first start port sensor 780 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 600 (YES in step S1104). If no game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that no game ball has won a prize at the first start port 600 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that the game ball has won the first starting port 600, various random numbers (random determination random numbers, symbol random numbers, special symbol types acquired by the first special symbol determination random number acquisition means 902) are used. It is acquired and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105).

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the CPU 711 performs a first hold storage process (step S1106), and the first and second -The third starting entrance prize process is terminated. In the first hold storage process, various data (win / fail determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the first start port 600 are stored in the random number determination random storage region 5131. This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903. In addition, various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 600 are determined as pass / fail as well as various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 602 or the third starting port 604. It is stored in each storage area in the random number storage area 5131 for use.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S1104 that a game ball has not won the first starting port 600 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is an upper limit value of 4. Are determined (NO in step S1105), the first, second, and third start opening prize winning processes are terminated.

  If the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 913 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the second starting port 602 or the third starting port 604 in step S1102, the various data acquired in step S1101 are stored. Discard. Similarly, if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the first starting port 600 in step S1105, the various data acquired in step S1104 are discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604, it is not always necessary to acquire various data (random number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) in step S1101. However, it may be performed between step S1101 to step S1103. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1101, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1103 You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has been won at the first start port 600, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1104; What is necessary is just to perform between step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1106 You may make it acquire by a 1st pending | holding memory | storage process.

Thus, in this embodiment, after performing the winning process (step S1101-step S1103) to the 2nd starting port 602 or the 3rd starting port 604, the winning process (step S1104-) to the 1st starting port 600 is performed. 1106). However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 600 is executed, the winning process for the second starting port 602 or the third starting port 604 may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 600, the lottery processing is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900, and when the second start opening 602 or the third start opening 604 wins, Although the lottery process is performed by the 2 special symbol lottery means 910, it is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball is won at the first start port 600 or the third start port 602, the lottery processing is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900, and when the game ball is won at the second start port 602, the second special symbol lottery means is performed. A lottery process may be performed according to 910. Furthermore, special symbol lottery means may be provided corresponding to each of the start ports 600, 602, and 604 (that is, corresponding to the first special symbol lottery unit corresponding to the first start port and the second start port). Second special symbol lottery means and third special symbol lottery means corresponding to the third start port may be provided).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, even if any of the lottery process by the 1st special symbol lottery means 900 and the lottery process by the 2nd special symbol lottery means 910 is performed, the winning probability to the jackpot is the same. It is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process is performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910 are different. good.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a bonus is awarded to a player when winning a jackpot in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and when winning a jackpot in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910. There is no difference in the profits made, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is performed, the probability that the first long open big hit game is executed is set relatively high, while the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is performed. When the process is performed, the probability that the first long open jackpot game is executed is set to be relatively low.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 711 first sets the number of random numbers (starting storage number) stored in the random number storage area 5131 for validity determination to be zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1301). If the starting storage number stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is 0, it means that the counter values of the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 are both 0. .

  If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), a shift process of the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is performed (step S1302). This shift process is a process for shifting the order in which the determination of whether or not the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game balls to the start ports 600, 602, and 604 are made is performed. That is, whether or not the special symbol is successful is determined in the order in which the game balls are won in the respective start ports 600, 602, and 604, and therefore the order is shifted as the change starts. The random number acquired earliest among the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game ball at each start port 600, 602, 604 is transferred to the processing area 5132. If the start memory number is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the variation start process is terminated.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 711 determines the type (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol) stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1303). If the type is the second special symbol type (YES in step S1303), the second special symbol flag is turned on (step S1303), and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is decremented by one. (Step S1305), the process proceeds to step S1308. On the other hand, if the type is the first special symbol type (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1306) and the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is decremented by one. (Step S1307), the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the gaming state (external normal gaming state B or external advantageous gaming state B) in which the probability changing function is operating (step S1308). Here, if the gaming state in which the probability changing function is operating (YES in step S1308), the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 or the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 is selected (step S1309). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is in the ON state, the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is in the ON state, the second probability variation special symbol determination table 909 is selected. The

  On the other hand, if the probability changing function is not activated in step S1308 (NO in step S1308), the first normal special figure determination table 906 or the second normal special figure determination table 907 is selected (step S1310). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is ON, the first normal special symbol determination table 906 is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is ON, the second normal special symbol determination table 907 is selected. The

  Then, the determination is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1311).

  Note that the jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the first special symbol determination unit 904 if the first special symbol flag is ON, and the second special symbol determination unit if the second special symbol flag is ON. 914.

  If it is determined in step S1311 that the game is a big hit (YES in step S1311), the type of jackpot is determined based on the acquired symbol random number (step S1312). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned on (step S1313). Specifically, if the first long open jackpot is set, the first long open jackpot flag is turned on. If the second long open jackpot is turned on, the second long open jackpot flag is turned on and the third long open jackpot may be set. For example, the third long open big hit flag is turned on, the first short open big hit flag is turned on if it is the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit flag is turned on if it is the second short open big hit. . Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “1” (step S1316), and the variation start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1311 that the winning / non-winning determination is not a big hit (NO in step S1311), it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (step S1314). If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied (YES in step S1314), the specific condition flag is turned on (step S1315), the process proceeds to step S1316, the processing flag is updated to “1”, The variation start process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1314 that the specific condition is not satisfied (NO in step S1314), the process proceeds to step S1316, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, after the shift process is performed in step S1302, whether or not the determination is correct is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132. Although it is performed (step S1311), it is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not the determination is successful based on the determination table and the random number stored first in the determination random number storage area 5131, and the shift process may be performed. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the validity determination random number storage area 5131 can be referred to only when the change starts.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  The variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation pattern according to the determination result. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not any jackpot flag among a plurality of types of jackpots is ON, or whether or not a specific condition flag is ON (step S1510). If the jackpot flag or the specific condition flag is ON (YES in step S1510), a hit variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1520), and then a variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  If neither the jackpot flag nor the specific condition flag is ON in step S1510 (NO in step S1510), it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect) with a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot should be performed. (Step S1530). Here, if it is determined that a high expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is to be performed (YES in step S1530), a high disappointment variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1540), and then the variation Pattern determination processing is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1530 that a high expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot should not be performed (NO in step S1530), a low-expectation variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1550), and then A variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  The decision as to whether or not to perform a high-expected production is judged to be a high-expected production if the high-expected production lottery is won, and a high-expected production is not performed if the high-expected production lottery is lost. It is judged. The high expectation effect lottery acquires the above-described reach determination random numbers when winning at each of the start openings 600, 602, and 604, and when the winning or random determination random numbers are out of place, the acquisition is performed when the variation of the symbol is started. This is done by determining whether the reach reach random number is correct. Here, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery varies depending on whether or not the opening extension function is activated. Furthermore, when the open extension function is not activated, the probability of winning the high-expected effect lottery also depends on the counter value (so-called number of holds) by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913.

  Speaking in more detail about the probability of winning the high-expected performance lottery, when the opening extension function is not activated (that is, in the case of the external normal gaming state) and the fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol, If the counter value of one special symbol hold counter 903 is 0, it is 10.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 1, it is 1/12, and the counter of the first special symbol hold counter 903 If the value is 2, it is 13.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 3, it is 1/15. In addition, when the opening extension function is not activated (that is, in the case of an external normal game state) and the change is a change of the second special symbol, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is the second special draw. If the counter value of the symbol hold counter 913 is 0, it is 10.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 1, it is 1/12, and the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is If it is 2, 13.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 3, it will be 1/15. Note that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 are counter values after being subtracted upon the change.

  In addition, when the open extension function is activated (that is, in the case of an external advantageous game state), regardless of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913, the winning lottery is won. The probability of doing is always 1/14. Thus, in this embodiment, when the open extension function is activated and when the open extension function is not activated, the probability that a high expectation production with a high degree of expectation for jackpot will be performed is similar. It is said that. As a result, it is possible to avoid repeatedly performing only effects (such as non-reach effects) with low expectation of winning the jackpot, and the jackpot is won unfortunately in an external advantageous gaming state. Even if a lot of lottery processes have to be performed by the time, the interest of the game is suitably maintained.

  Next, when the variation pattern is determined in step S1560, the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1570), and the variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1580). For example, if it is determined that the variation pattern is the variation number 10, the command 0AH corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation number 10 is set as an effect command, and 43000 msec is set as the variation time value in the timer. Even if the determined variation pattern is another variation pattern, a command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set as an effect command, as in the case where the variation pattern of variation number 10 is determined, A variation time value corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1590), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  In addition, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is not limited to the above description. That is, when the open extension function is not activated, the probability of winning the high-expected performance lottery is always constant regardless of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913. Anyway. On the other hand, when the open extension function is activated, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is not uniform, but varies depending on the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913. Also good.

  In addition, based on the variation pattern set in this variation pattern setting process, it is displayed by a lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86.

  Next, the hit variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 55 is a list chart showing a variation pattern for each variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process. 55 in the winning column in FIG. 55 means a long open jackpot, ○ means a short open jackpot, Δ means establishment of a specific condition, and x means miss.

  In the hit variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 54, first, the CPU 711 determines whether or not it is in the external normal gaming state, that is, whether or not the open extension function is activated (step S15201). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal gaming state (the opening extension function is not activated) (YES in step S15201), it is determined whether or not the first long opening jackpot flag is ON (step S15202). If it is determined in step S15202 that the first long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15202), one of the variation pattern tables A1 to A3 shown in FIG. 55 is selected (step S15203). The hit variation pattern table setting process ends.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, a total number “1000” of table selection random numbers is associated with each of the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, K1, and K2. In selecting the variation pattern table, one of the selection random numbers is acquired, and one of the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, K1, and K2 is acquired based on the acquired selection random number. I am trying to select it. Therefore, in the variation pattern table selection process in step S15203, as shown in FIG. 55, the variation pattern table A1 is selected with a probability of 820/1000, and the variation pattern table A2 is selected with a probability of 175/1000. The variation pattern table A3 is selected with a probability of 5/1000. Of these tables A1 to A3, table A2 is a table on which the above-described continuous effects are performed. The table selection random number may be used in combination with other random numbers.

  If it is determined in step S15202 that the first long open jackpot flag is not ON (NO in step S15202), it is determined whether the second long open jackpot flag or the third long open jackpot flag is ON (step S15204). If it is determined in step S15204 that the second long open jackpot flag or the third long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15204), the variation pattern table A1 or variation pattern table A2 shown in FIG. 55 is selected (step S15205). ), The winning variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the change pattern table A1 is selected with a probability of 825/1000, and the change pattern table A2 is selected with a probability of 175/1000, as shown in FIG. .

  If it is determined in step S15204 that neither the second long open jackpot flag nor the third long open jackpot flag is ON (NO in step S15204), whether or not the first short open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (step S13206). If it is determined in step S15206 that the first short open big hit flag or the second short open big hit flag is ON (YES in step S15206), the fluctuation pattern table A4 shown in FIG. 55 is always selected (step S15207), and the win fluctuation The pattern table setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S15206 that neither the first short open big hit flag nor the second short open big hit flag is ON (NO in step S15206), the variation pattern table K1 shown in FIG. 55 is always selected (step S15208). The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S15201 that it is not in the external normal gaming state (that is, the external advantageous gaming state in which the release extension function is activated) (NO in step S15201), the first long open big hit flag or the second It is determined whether or not the long open jackpot flag is ON (step S15209). If it is determined in step S15209 that the first long open jackpot flag or the second long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15209), the variation pattern table A5 or variation pattern table A6 shown in FIG. 55 is selected (step S15210). ), The winning variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the change pattern table A5 is selected with a probability of 335/1000 and the change pattern table A6 is selected with a probability of 665/1000, as shown in FIG. .

If it is determined in step S15209 that neither the first long open jackpot flag nor the second long open jackpot flag is ON (NO in step S15209), it is determined whether the third long open jackpot flag is ON (step S15211). ). If it is determined in step S15211 that the third long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15211), the fluctuation pattern table A6 shown in FIG. 55 is always selected (step S15212), and the winning fluctuation pattern table setting process is terminated. .

  If it is determined in step S15211 that the third long open jackpot flag is not ON (NO in step S15211), it is determined whether the first short open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag is ON (step S15213). If it is determined in step S15213 that the first short opening jackpot flag or the second short opening jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15213), the fluctuation pattern table A7 shown in FIG. 55 is always selected (step S15214), and the hit fluctuation. The pattern table setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S15213 that neither the first short open big hit flag nor the second short open big hit flag is ON (NO in step S15213), the variation pattern table K2 shown in FIG. 55 is always selected (step S15215). The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Next, the high expectation deviating variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the high expectation disapproval variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 57 is a list showing variation patterns for each variation pattern table set in the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process. 57 in the winning column in FIG. 57 means a long open jackpot, ○ means a short open jackpot, Δ means establishment of a specific condition, and x means a miss.

  56, first, the CPU 711 determines whether or not it is in the external normal gaming state, that is, whether or not the open extension function is activated (step S 15401). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal gaming state (the opening extension function is not activated) (YES in step S 15401), one of the variation pattern tables H 1 to H 4 shown in FIG. 57 is selected (step S 15401). S15402), the high disappointment variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 57, a total number “1000” of table selection random numbers is associated with each of the variation pattern tables H1 to H5. In selecting the variation pattern table, one of the selection random numbers is acquired, and one of the variation pattern tables H1 to H5 is selected based on the acquired selection random number. ing. Therefore, in the variation pattern table selection process in step S15402, as shown in FIG. 57, the variation pattern table H1 is selected with a probability of 820/1000, and the variation pattern table H2 is selected with a probability of 135/1000. The variation pattern table H3 is selected with a probability of 5/1000, and the variation pattern table H4 is selected with a probability of 40/1000. In addition, the probability that the continuous performance is performed in the external normal gaming state is a multiplier (10500) of the reach probability (10.5 to 1/15) and the probability that the table H4 is selected (40/1000). 40 to 15000/40).

  Further, when the CPU 711 determines in step S 15401 that it is not in the external normal gaming state (that is, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated) (NO in step S 15401), the variation pattern table shown in FIG. H5 is selected (step S15403), and the high disappointment variation pattern table setting process ends. In addition, the probability that the continuous performance is performed in the external advantageous gaming state is a multiplier (752/14000) of the reach probability (1/14) and the probability that the variable number 58 is selected (752/1000). .

  Next, the low expectation deviating variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the low-expected variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 59 is a list showing variation patterns for each variation pattern table set in the low-expected variation pattern table setting process.

  In the low expectation disappointment variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 58, first, the CPU 711 determines whether or not it is in the external normal gaming state, that is, whether or not the open extension function is activated (step S15501). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal game state (the opening extension function is not activated) (YES in step S15501), a continuous effect lottery is performed (step S15502). The continuous effect lottery is expected from the player even though both the result of the success / failure determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 and the result of the high expectation effect lottery are out of place. It is a lottery of whether or not to perform a continuous production that can give a feeling. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot flag and the specific condition flag are not ON and the reach is not performed, the continuous effect lottery is won with a probability of 1/251. Thus, in this embodiment, in the external normal game state in which the opening extension function does not operate, the probability that the continuous effect is performed when the jackpot is not won is set to be extremely low. As will be described later, the continuous effect is the special symbol display 84 or 86 that is displayed only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. This is an effect (pseudo effect) that appears as if a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 to be described later have been subjected to a variable display effect multiple times.

  After the continuous production lottery is performed, it is determined whether or not the continuous production lottery has been won (step S15503). If it is determined that the continuous production lottery has been won (YES in step S15503), the variation pattern shown in FIG. The table H6 is selected (step S15504), and the low-expected fluctuation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S15503 that the lottery has been lost (NO in step S15503), the number of holdings, that is, the counter value by the first special symbol holding counter 903 or the second special symbol holding counter 913 (after being subtracted upon the change) 59, one of the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIG. 59 is selected (step S15505), and the low-expected fluctuation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Note that the variation pattern table in step S15505 is selected when the variation is the variation of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 59, if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 0 or 1. If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 2, the change pattern table H8 is selected. If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 3, the change pattern table H9 is selected. Is done. Further, when the change is a change of the second special symbol, if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 0 or 1, the change pattern table H7 indicates that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 2. If so, the fluctuation pattern table H8 is selected, and if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 3, the fluctuation pattern table H9 is selected. That is, the special symbol is displayed in a shorter time when the number of lottery processes in the hold state is larger than when the number is smaller.

  Further, when the CPU 711 determines in step S15501 that it is not in the external normal gaming state (that is, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated) (NO in step S15501), the number of holdings, that is, the first special symbol holding. 59 is selected in accordance with the counter value (counter value after being subtracted at the time of the change) by the counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 (step S15506), and the change pattern table H11 shown in FIG. The low expectation variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Note that the selection of the variation pattern table in step S15506 is performed when the variation is the variation of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. If the variation pattern table H10 has a counter value of 2 or 3 in the first special symbol hold counter 903, the variation pattern table H11 is selected. Further, when the change is a change of the second special symbol, if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 0 or 1, the change pattern table H10 indicates that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 2 Or, if it is 3, the variation pattern table H11 is selected. That is, when the number of lottery processes in the hold state is large, the time required for the special symbol variation display is less than “½” when the number of lottery processes is small. The variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  55, FIG. 57, and FIG. 59, when the opening extension function is not activated, “continuous effect 2 times (or 3 times)” is displayed, while the opening extension function is activated. Is not displayed as "continuous production ...".

  More specifically, in the variation names of the variation numbers 59 to 96, the display of “continuous effect...” Is simply omitted, and actually, two variations of the display effect are simulated. The reach effect corresponding to the variable name is performed only in the simulated second variable display effect. As will be described later, there are prepared variation patterns corresponding to the case where the opening extension function is not activated and the case where the opening extension function is activated (for example, the variation number 49 and the variation number 79 correspond to each other). Variation pattern). That is, the variation patterns corresponding to each other when the opening extension function is not activated and when the opening extension function is activated are very similar (same or very similar) as display modes in the effect display device 115. It becomes a display mode. For example, when a variation pattern with a variation number 79 is displayed on the effect display device 115, a display mode that is very similar to the variation pattern with the variation number 49 is displayed on the effect display device 115.・ "Out of normal" is displayed.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process in step S1560 will be described. In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process in step S1520, the high expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1540, or the low expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1550. A pattern is determined. Hereinafter, the variation pattern determination process will be described for each set variation pattern table.

  That is, in each variation pattern table A1 to A7, K1, K2, and H1 to H5, a total number “1000” of variation mode determination random numbers are associated with each variation number indicating a variation display mode (variation name) and the like. ing. In determining the variation pattern, one of the variation mode determination random numbers is acquired, and the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, K1, and K2 are acquired based on the acquired variation mode determination random numbers. One is decided. Note that the variation mode determination random number may also be used in combination with other random numbers.

  Therefore, when the set variation pattern table is A1, any one of the variation numbers 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23 is changed to 12/1000, It is determined with the probability of 24/1000, 20/1000, 64/1000, 188/1000, 112/1000, 156/156, 92/1000, 220/1000, and 112/1000. It will be.

  When the set fluctuation pattern table is A2, any one of the fluctuation numbers 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, 37, 39, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52 The patterns are 24/1000, 8/1000, 60/1000, 124/1000, 72/1000, 76/1000, 64/1000, 80/1000, 8/1000, respectively. It is determined with a probability of 56/1000, 120/1000, 76/1000, 76/1000, 68/1000, and 88/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is A3, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 55. When the variation pattern table set is A4, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 54 and is set. Is always determined as a variation pattern of variation number 53.

  When the set variation pattern table is A5, any one of the variation numbers 61, 62, 65, 67, 69, 72, 74, 75, 81, 84, 86, 96, and 99 is changed to 1000 respectively. 8/1000, 8/1000, 40/1000, 140/1000, 360/1000, 20/1000, 24/1000, 36/1000, 20/1000, 20/1000 It is determined with a probability of 236, 80/1000, and 8/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is A6, any one of the variation numbers 60, 64, 71, 73, 77, 80, 83, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94 is selected. , 8 / 1000,100 / 1000,100 / 1000,100 / 1000,160 / 1000,140 / 1000,160 / 1000,4 / 1000,8 / 1000, respectively Are determined with a probability of 8,1000 / 4,1000 / 1000,8 / 1000,4 / 1000,192 / 1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is A7, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 98. When the set variation pattern table is K2, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 97.

  When the set variation pattern table is H1, any one of the variation numbers 4, 6, and 22 is determined with a probability of 716/1000, 240/1000, and 44/1000, respectively.

  When the set fluctuation pattern table is H2, 360/1000, 200/1000, 228/1000, and any one of the fluctuation numbers 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20 It is determined with a probability of 88/1000, 72/1000, and 52/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is H3, the variation pattern of variation number 4 is determined with a probability of 920/1000, and the variation pattern of variation number 8 is determined with a probability of 80/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is H4, any one of the variation numbers 25, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51 is changed to 1000. 360/140, 1000/1000, 84/1000, 64/1000, 32/1000, 28/1000, 16/1000, 108/1000, 60/1000, 48/1000 It is determined with a probability of 24 / minute, 24/1000, and 24/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is H5, any one of the variation numbers 58, 59, 63, 66, 68, 70, 76, 78, 79, 82, and 85 has a variation pattern of 752, 1000, respectively. 124/1000, 4/1000, 28/1000, 20/1000, 16/1000, 8/1000, 8/1000, 12/1000, 4/1000, 20/1000, It is determined with a probability of 4/1000.

  On the other hand, when the set variation pattern table is H6, the variation pattern of variation number 24 is always determined. That is, since the continuous production lottery is won, the fluctuation pattern is always determined to be out of the continuous production twice.

  Even when the set variation pattern table is H7, the variation pattern with the variation number 1 is always determined. Similarly, when the set variation pattern table is H8, it is always determined to be the variation pattern of variation number 2, and when the set variation pattern table is H9, it is always determined to be the variation pattern of variation number 3.

  When the set variation pattern table is H10, the variation pattern with the variation number 56 is always determined. When the variation pattern table set is H11, the variation pattern with the variation number 57 is always determined.

  When the variation pattern (variation number) is determined in this way, a command (information) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral board 800, and the above-mentioned in the peripheral board 800 It is used for processing such as effect lottery by the effect lottery means 960. That is, the effect mode (continuous effect, reach effect, etc.) related to the variable display effect of the decorative design 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 is actually transmitted from the main control board 710 in the peripheral board 800. Is determined according to the command to be executed. In this sense, the control related to the variable display effect of the decoration symbol 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 is performed in cooperation by the main control board 710 and the peripheral board 800 (display control means).

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). Here, if any one of the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86 is changing, it is determined that it is changing. If the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If the variation time has not elapsed, the process waits until the variation time has elapsed (NO in step S1802). When the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 is derived and displayed on the changing display of the first special symbol indicator 84 or the second special symbol indicator 86.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not any jackpot game is started. If any of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If none of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (NO in step S1804), it is next determined whether or not the specific condition flag is in the ON state (step S1806). That is, as a result of the fact that the current variation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not to start the special electric accessory actuating process. If the specific condition flag is in the ON state (YES in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1807), and the changing process is terminated. If the specific condition flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game start process. In this jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). As described above, since the probability variation function does not operate when the jackpot game is being executed, if the probability variation function is activated, the operation of the probability variation function is stopped (step S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the probability variation function is not operating (NO in step S2001), step S2002 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the open extension function is in operation. As described above, since the opening extension function does not operate when the jackpot game is being executed, if the opening extension function is operating, the operation of the opening extension function is stopped (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. move on. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2003 that the open extension function is not activated (NO in step S2003), step S2004 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the long open big hit. Specifically, if any one of the first long-opening jackpot flag, the second long-opening jackpot flag, and the third long-opening jackpot flag is in an ON state, it is determined that the long-opening jackpot flag is YES (YES in step S2005). ), The number of rounds in the long open big hit game (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum open time (for example, 30 seconds) of the switchgear 500 per round, and the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 balls) are set (step S2006). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2008, the processing flag is updated to “5”, and the jackpot game start processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if any one of the first short opening jackpot flag and the second short opening jackpot flag is ON in step S2005, it is determined that the short opening jackpot is not a long opening jackpot (NO in step S2005), The number of rounds in the short opening big hit game (for example, 2 rounds), the maximum opening time (for example, 0.6 sec) and the maximum number of winnings (for example, 3 balls) of the opening / closing device 500 per round are set, and the process proceeds to step S2008.

[Regarding the operation of the special electric accessory]
Next, based on FIG. 62, the special electric accessory activation process will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the special electric accessory operation process. In this special electric accessory actuating process, first, the number of times of opening / closing of the switchgear 500 in the special electric accessory actuating process (for example, twice), the maximum opening time of the switchgear 500 per time (eg, 0.6 sec), Set a number (eg 3 balls). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “6” and the special electric accessory actuating process is terminated.

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, based on FIG. 63, the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, it is first determined whether or not the opening / closing device 500 is open (step S2401). If the opening / closing device 500 is open (YES in step S2401), it is determined whether a preset maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has elapsed (step S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in step S2006 or step S2007 has elapsed. If it is determined that the maximum opening time of switchgear 500 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), switchgear 500 is closed (step S2404), and the process proceeds to step S2405.

  If the opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has not elapsed in step S2402 (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether or not a game ball having a preset maximum number of winnings has been received by the opening / closing device 500 (step S2403). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the count value by the opening / closing device count sensor 776 has reached the maximum number of winnings set in step S2006 or step S2007. If it is determined that the maximum number of winning game balls has been received by the switchgear 500 (YES in step S2403), the process proceeds to step S2404, and the switchgear 500 is closed. On the other hand, if the maximum number of winning balls has not been accepted by the opening / closing device 500, the process returns to step S2402.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether a preset number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in step S2006 or step S2007 has been reached. If the number of rounds set in advance is reached (YES in step S2405), the process proceeds to step S2407, and the big hit flag (the first to third long open big hit flags and the first and second short open big hit flags is ON). The flag in the state) is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the preset round number has not been reached (NO in step S2405), the opening / closing device 500 is opened (step S2406), and the process returns to step S2402.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the opening / closing device 500 is not open (NO in step S2401), the process proceeds to step S2405.

  After turning off the jackpot flag in step S2407, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function should be activated (step S2408). If the probability variation function is to be activated, the probability variation function is activated (step S2409). Specifically, the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is one of the first long-open jackpot flag, the second long-open jackpot flag, the first short-open jackpot flag, and the second short-open jackpot flag. If there is, the probability changing function is activated. That is, if the jackpot game that has been played so far is one of the first long open big hit game, the second long open big hit game, the first short open big hit game, and the second short open big hit game, the probability changing function Actuate.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the opening extension function should be operated (step S2410). If the opening extension function should be operated, an operation process of the opening extension function is performed (step S2411). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), and the special feature jackpot control processing is terminated. On the other hand, also when it is determined in step S2410 that the opening extension function is not to be activated (NO in step S2410), the process proceeds to step S2415 to update the processing flag to “0” and the special feature big hit control process is terminated.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the gaming state when the jackpot wins has a significant influence on whether or not the opening extension function should be activated.

  Specifically, if the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot when in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B, the jackpot flag that is turned OFF in step S2407 is released to the first long Only when it is the big hit flag or the first short open big hit flag, it is determined in step S2410 that the open extension function should be activated. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is the second long open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag, it is determined in step S2408 that the probability changing function should be activated, but in step S2410. It is determined that the open extension function is not activated.

  If the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot in the external advantageous game state A or the external advantageous game state B, the type of jackpot flag that is turned OFF in step S2407 is any type of jackpot flag. Even so, it is determined in step S2410 that the open extension function should be activated. That is, whether the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is any one of the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit, the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit (winning the third long open big hit In this case, it is not possible to proceed to step S2410), and it is determined in step S2410 that the open extension function should be activated. Therefore, once the first long open big hit game or the first short open big hit game is executed, the second long open big hit game or the second short open big hit game is executed unless the third long open big hit game is executed. The later gaming state becomes the external advantageous gaming state B.

  Strictly speaking, in the process of step S2410, first, based on the jackpot flag, it is determined whether or not one of the first long open jackpot and the first short open jackpot is won. As a result, if it is determined that either the first long open jackpot or the first short open jackpot has been won, the open extension function is activated in the process of step S2411.

  However, in the process of step S2410, neither the first long open jackpot or the first short open jackpot is won, but either the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is won. In some cases, it may be determined that it is. In such a case, whether or not the above-mentioned extension extension function has been activated at the time of winning the corresponding hit (second long open big hit or second short open big hit) (before the big hit game is played) Make further decisions. As a result, when it is determined that the opening extension function has not been activated (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B), the process proceeds to step S2411 (opening extension function is activated). When the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), the special feature jackpot control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening extension function has been activated (external advantageous gaming state A or external advantageous gaming state B), the processing flag is set to “ When it is updated to “0” (step S2415), the special bonus jackpot control process is terminated.

  In such a configuration, as long as the player is in the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is merely an opportunity to shift to the external normal gaming state. It ’s just a hit. However, after either of the first long opening jackpot and the first short opening jackpot has been elected and the game has shifted to a gaming state (external advantageous gaming state) in which the opening extension function is activated, the second long opening jackpot, The second short opening jackpot is a "winning opportunity to shift to the external advantageous gaming state (the winning that has the highest advantage for the player)", and the game value greatly changes. In this sense, the first long opening jackpot or the first short opening jackpot is “the opportunity to shift to a gaming state in which the gaming values of the second long opening jackpot and the second short opening jackpot are different. It can be said.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, even when it is determined in step S2408 that the probability variation function should not be activated (third long open jackpot) (NO in step S2408), the corresponding hit ( It is determined whether or not the opening extension function has been activated at the time of winning the third long open jackpot (before the jackpot game is played) (step S2412). As a result, when it is determined that the release extension function has not been activated (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B), the processing flag is updated to “0” at that time (step S2415). ). However, if it is determined in step S2412 that the release extension function has been activated (external advantageous game state A or external advantageous game state B), the release extension function is activated (step S2413). Thereafter, when the number of times of opening extension function operation (for example, 100 times) is set (step S2414), the process proceeds to step S2415 to update the processing flag to “0”, and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. .

  In such a configuration, even if the third long open jackpot is won in the external advantageous state, after the jackpot game corresponding to the selection is performed, the above-mentioned second The two long open jackpots and the second short open jackpot are set to function as “hits that trigger the transition to the external advantageous game state (the highest wins for the player)”.

  If the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot when in the external normal game state, the jackpot flag that was turned off in step S2407 is open and extended in step S2412 regardless of the jackpot flag. It is not determined that the function should be activated (ie, proceeding to step S2415 following step S2412). This is because the process cannot proceed to step S2412 unless the third long open jackpot is won.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot when in the external advantageous game state, when the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is the third long open jackpot flag, in step S2412 It is determined that the open extension function should be activated, and the process proceeds to step S2413. If the jackpot flag turned off in step S2407 is not the third long open jackpot flag, the process does not proceed to step S2412 and always proceeds to step S2409. Therefore, it cannot be determined NO in step S2412.

[Special electric component operation processing]
Next, based on FIG. 64, a special electric accessory actuating process will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the special electric accessory operation process. In the special electric accessory actuating process, first, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of winning game balls set in step S2201 has won the opening / closing device 500 (step S2501). If the maximum number of winning game balls has won the opening / closing device 500 (YES in step S2501), it is determined whether the opening / closing device 500 is being opened or closed (step S2502). If the opening / closing device 500 is being opened / closed (YES in step S2502), the opening / closing device 500 is closed (step S2503), and the specific condition flag is turned off (step S2509). If the opening / closing device 500 is not open (ie, closed) in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2509, and the specific condition flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S2510, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special electric accessory operating process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2501 that the maximum number of game balls has not won the opening / closing device 500, it is determined whether the opening / closing device 500 is open (step S2504). If the opening / closing device 500 is open (YES in step S2504), it is determined whether or not the opening time set in advance in step S2201 has elapsed (step S2505), and the opening time has elapsed. If (YES in step S2505), the opening / closing device 500 is closed (step S2506). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing device 500 has reached the number set in advance in step S2201 (step S2507). After the specific condition flag is turned off (step S2509), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2510). If it is determined in step S2504 that the opening / closing device 500 is not open (NO in step S2504), the process proceeds to step S2507.

  If it is determined in step S2505 that the opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has not passed the predetermined time (NO in step S2505), the process returns to step S2501. When it is determined in step S2507 that the opening / closing device 500 has not reached the predetermined number of times (NO in step S2507), the opening / closing device 500 is opened again (step S2508), and then the process returns to step S2501. .

  Thus, when it is determined that a pre-set game ball has won the opening / closing device 500 (YES in step S2501), regardless of whether the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing device 500 set in step S2201 has been reached or not. The special electric accessory actuating process is terminated.

[About game content]
Next, game contents in each game state will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the external normal gaming state A, the external normal gaming state B, the external advantageous gaming state A, and the external advantageous gaming state B are set as described above. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, externally, when the player is in one of the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B, it is determined in advance regardless of the state. The player is only suggested to the player to be in the single (one) gaming state (external normal gaming state which is also the gaming state at the time of initial).

  When a game ball wins any one of the start ports 600, 602, and 604, a special symbol lottery is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910. The lottery result is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and is displayed on the effect display device 115 by a combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1153.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 70, the effect display device 115 displays a decorative symbol 1153 in the center area, a first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, a second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002, and a hold display. And a region 1150. The decorative symbol 1153 is composed of three symbol columns, the left symbol column 1153a displayed on the left side when viewed from the player, the middle symbol column 1153b displayed in the middle when viewed from the player, and the right symbol column when viewed from the player. The right symbol row 1153c to be displayed is composed of three symbol rows. In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbols 1 to 8 are sequentially arranged and displayed in the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153. Of these symbols, 3 and 7 are displayed in red, 1, 2, 5 and 6 are displayed in pink, and 4 and 8 are displayed in blue. Hereinafter, a symbol displayed in red is referred to as a specific symbol, a symbol displayed in pink is referred to as a quasi-specific symbol, and a symbol displayed in blue is referred to as a non-specific symbol.

  The hold display area 1150 is arranged in a lower area of the effect display device 115 and has a first hold display area 1151 and a second hold display area 1152 adjacent to each other. The first hold display area 1151 has four hold storage display sections, a first hold storage display section 1151a to a fourth hold storage display section 1151d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The second hold display area 1152 has four hold storage display sections, a fifth hold storage display section 1152a to an eighth hold storage display section 1152d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. That is, the sum of the hold storage display part of the first hold display area 1151 and the hold storage display part of the second hold display area 1152, the upper limit value (first predetermined number) of the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903, and the first The sum of the upper limit value (second predetermined number) of holding by the 2 special symbol holding counter 913 is the same number. More specifically, the number of the reserved storage display parts in the first hold display area 1151 is equal to the first predetermined number, and the number of the hold display parts in the second hold display area 1152 is equal to the second predetermined number. The number is the same. In the present embodiment, both the number of reserved storage display parts (first predetermined number) in the first reserved display area 1151 and the number of reserved storage display parts (first predetermined number) in the second reserved display area 1152 are both reserved. The number is “4” before digestion (“3” after retention digestion).

  In addition, the first reserved storage display unit 1151a, the second reserved storage display unit 1151b, the third reserved storage display unit 1151c, the fourth reserved storage display unit 1151d, the fifth reserved storage display unit 1152a, the sixth The reserved memory display unit 1152b, the seventh reserved memory display unit 1152c, and the eighth reserved memory display unit 1152d are regularly arranged in this order in the left-right direction, and an area (common symbol display) where the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed. The lottery results in the (region) are derived in the above-described order. That is, the lottery hold corresponding to each hold storage display unit from the first hold (hold corresponding to the first hold storage display unit 1151a) to the end hold (for example, the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d) in order. It will be derived in the order of the hold. Thereby, it is possible to clearly grasp the order in which the lottery results are derived in the common symbol display area.

  Each hold storage display unit 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903, which is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903, and held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. Is displayed in any one of the second display mode indicating that it is held and the third display mode indicating that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903.

  Each hold storage display unit 1152a to 1152d in the second hold display area 1152 can be displayed in any one of the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode, and the first Information regarding the number of holds in the special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 may be hidden.

  Each display mode will be described. For example, in FIG. 66, the display mode of the first hold memory display unit 1151a, the second hold memory display unit 1151b, and the fourth hold memory display unit 1151d is the third display mode. The display mode of the third hold storage display unit 1151c and the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is the second display mode, and the display mode of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is the first display mode. Note that the display modes of the seventh reserved storage display unit 1152c and the eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d are not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the first display mode indicates that a frame (inside the frame is gray) is displayed and can be reserved by the first special symbol reservation counter 903. The second display mode means that a red character (here, a character imitating UFO) is displayed and held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. The third display mode means that a blue character (here, a character simulating a UFO of a size smaller than the second display mode) is displayed and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Yes. In this way, the display mode is different between the display mode that means being held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the display mode that is held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. .

  Here, FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B), where (a) is a background image of a dome stadium, (B) is an image in which the background image is a passenger ship, and (c) is an image in which the background image is a night view. In the external normal game state, any one of the images shown in FIGS. 65A to 65C is selected and determined at random. Note that the operation button 327 may be used to select and determine any one of the images in FIGS. Thereby, a player's desired image will be displayed on the production | presentation display apparatus 115, and the fall of an interest can be suppressed.

  In an external normal gaming state, the first long open big hit and the second long open big hit in a lottery process (hereinafter simply referred to as “special symbol lottery process”) by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 Or, when winning the 3rd long open jackpot, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153 scrolls in the vertical direction, and then stops and displays with a zebra eye (three symbol rows 1153a to 1153c become the same symbol). Is done.

  The result of the special symbol lottery process is displayed not only on the decorative symbol 1153 but also on the lower right of the image displayed on the effect display device 115 as the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Here, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is displayed as the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is displayed as the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002.

  When the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open jackpot, the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is stopped and displayed with a specific symbol, a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, and then A long open jackpot game based on the 1 long open jackpot is executed. The gaming state after the long open jackpot game is over will be in the external advantageous gaming state B until the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process. Although the details will be described later, after the long open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process in the external normal game state based on the first long open jackpot has ended, there is a possibility that a great benefit may be brought to the player Enter the “promotion mode”.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second long open jackpot or the third long open big hit, the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) are stopped and displayed with a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol double-eyed After that, a long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot is executed.

  The game state after the long open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process being the second long open jackpot is the external normal game state B. The gaming state after the long opening jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery processing being the third long opening jackpot is the external normal gaming state A. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second long open jackpot and the result of the special symbol lottery process is the third long open jackpot, these The external gaming state after the long open jackpot game based on the jackpot of the game is the normal external gaming state that also appears at the time of the initial as shown in FIG. Therefore, the player determines that the game state is not advantageous to him and plays the game.

In this way, the decorative symbol 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state.
If (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is a doublet of a specific symbol, it can be grasped that the first long open jackpot was won at that time. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the gaming state after the first long open big hit game is the external advantageous gaming state B (that is, to enter the promotion mode), it can give the player a great expectation, Reduction can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state is a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, it is grasped which jackpot is won at this stage. I can't do it. However, even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are quasi-specific symbols or non-specific symbols, if the first long open jackpot is won, After the jackpot game ends, it is informed that the first long open jackpot was made. Therefore, the player executes the jackpot game while having a sense of expectation that the player will enter the “promotion mode”, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the jackpot game that tends to be monotonous.

  In addition, regardless of the gaming state, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short open jackpot or the second short open jackpot, or the result of the special symbol lottery process is out and the specific condition is satisfied At this time, in the present embodiment, a chance eye is displayed on the effect display device 115 without displaying a flat eye. If the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short open jackpot, a short open big hit game based on the first short open big hit is executed, and the gaming state after the short open big hit game is finished is the external advantageous gaming state B. (It can be grasped that the first short opening big hit was obtained by operating the opening extension function). After the short open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short open jackpot, the player enters the “promotion mode”.

  On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second short open big hit, a short open big hit game based on the second short open big hit is executed, and the gaming state after the short open big hit game is finished is an external normal Game state B is entered. In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery process is not satisfied and the specific condition is satisfied, the special electric accessory actuating process is executed. In addition, since the execution of the special electric accessory act is not a condition, the game state is not changed even if the special electric accessory act is executed. For example, if the specific condition is satisfied when the external normal game state A is established, the external normal game state A remains the same even after the special electric accessory actuating process is ended, and the specific condition is obtained when the external normal game state B is obtained. When is established, the external normal gaming state B remains even after the end of the special electric accessory actuating process.

  On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second short open jackpot when in the external normal gaming state, or if the result of the special symbol lottery process is out and the specific condition is satisfied, The gaming state after the short-opening jackpot game based on the second short-opening jackpot or the special electric accessory actuating process based on the establishment of the specific condition is all the external normal gaming state, and the operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is performed. It is not controlled by the promotion mode. For this reason, it seems that there is no change in the gaming state from the viewpoint of the player.

  It should be noted that the number of random numbers per first long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per third long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per first short open jackpot, Based on the number of second short-open jackpots, the “probability of entering the promotion mode” in the external normal gaming state is approximately one third. The “probability of entering the“ promotion mode ”when in the external normal gaming state” is the “percentage distribution rate per chance that triggers the transition to the promotion mode” when in the external normal gaming state. Yes, specifically, the probability of entering the `` promotion mode '' after winning the jackpot game in the special symbol lottery processing in the external normal game state and finishing the jackpot game based on the winning to the jackpot game, This means that it is approximately one third of the number of times that the jackpot game is executed.

  After winning the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot in the external normal game state, after the long open jackpot game based on the winning of the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot ends, It becomes an external normal game state. However, if the winning type at this time is the second long open jackpot, the gaming state after the second long open big hit game is the external normal gaming state B, and if the third long open big hit, the third long The gaming state after the open jackpot game ends is the external normal gaming state A.

  In this way, in the external normal gaming state, when winning either the 2nd long open jackpot or the 3rd long open jackpot, the jackpot game corresponding to the corresponding win is ended regardless of which winning type. After that, the external normal gaming state is entered again, and the effect image indicating that it is in the external normal gaming state is displayed on the effect display device 115 again. Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not provided with a state notification lamp (for example, a lamp for displaying whether or not the probability changing function is activated when the lottery process is performed) that always displays the gaming state. . Therefore, the player plays a game by determining that the game state is not advantageous to the player (the game state that appears at the initial stage) regardless of whether the player is internally in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B. It will be. In other words, since the operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 606 operate is the same as that at the initial time, the player has no change in the gaming state from the initial time, and the jackpot winning probability is also the above It is determined that it will be the same as the winning probability A (first probability) adopted at the time of initial, and the game is played.

  However, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot (per-share distribution ratio per second long open jackpot) and the number of random numbers per third long open jackpot (per hit distribution per third long open jackpot) with respect to the random number width of the design random numbers described above Rate), in the external normal gaming state, the probability of winning the second long open jackpot (the distribution ratio per second long open jackpot) and the probability of winning the third long open jackpot (third long open jackpot) Is the same level (generally 2 to 3). According to such a configuration, when the game is continuously shifted to the external normal gaming state by winning either the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, the winning probability A employed also at the initial time is used. When the lottery process is performed with (first probability), and when the lottery process is performed with a winning probability B (second probability) that is higher than the corresponding selection probability A, the game state is the same. Under the circumstances suggested to the player, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the double standard of the winning probability A and the winning probability B. Accordingly, the player wins the jackpot in a small number of lotteries since the last jackpot game was performed, despite the fact that the player has continuously shifted to the same external normal gaming state as at the initial time. It becomes easy to enjoy the so-called jackpot villas per surprise (unexpected jackpot).

  Incidentally, FIG. 66 is an image showing one aspect of the effect mode that appears on the effect display device 115 when in the external normal game state. Therefore, it appears on the effect display device 115 when, for example, the game is continuously shifted to the external normal gaming state. In this image, the background image is a dome stadium, and the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) scroll in the vertical direction. Thus, as long as the player is in the external normal gaming state, the player is in a predetermined single (one) gaming state (external normal gaming state that is also adopted at the time of initial) regardless of the internal gaming state. Is intimately suggested to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the image shown in FIG. 66 is displayed until the special symbol lottery process is performed up to 50 times after the long open jackpot game based on the winning of the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot ends. Is done. If a big hit game does not occur while the result of the special symbol lottery process is performed 50 times, the image shown in FIG. 66 is displayed, and then any one of the images shown in FIGS. Is displayed.

  By the way, based on the number of random numbers of the second long open jackpot for the random number width of the design random numbers and the number of third long open jackpots for the random number width of the design random numbers, the jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot and the third long The ratio with the open jackpot game is approximately 2 to 3 (that is, when the game state after the long open jackpot game based on the second long jackpot or the third long jackpot is finished is the external normal gaming state A) And the external normal gaming state B is approximately 3 to 2). Therefore, in the gaming state after the long-opening jackpot game based on the second long-opening jackpot or the third long-opening jackpot, the frequency of winning the jackpot increases until the special symbol change is performed several tens of times. In other words, the jackpot game can be executed in a so-called bead sequence. In the case of the external normal gaming state B, it goes without saying that the big win is won at a very high frequency until the change of the special symbol is performed several tens of times, but even if it is the external normal gaming state A, In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the jackpot will be won before the change of the special symbol is performed several tens of times due to the probability of winning the jackpot in the external normal gaming state A.

  On the other hand, since the player is playing on the premise that the player is in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability variation function does not operate, the number of times after the long open big hit game based on the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit game has ended It is unexpected for a player to win a jackpot in a daisy chain at an early stage compared to the winning probability of the jackpot in the external normal gaming state A where the probability variation function does not operate, such as 10 rotations. In this way, if the player wins a jackpot unexpectedly (hereinafter referred to as an “unexpected jackpot”), the player thinks that he / she has a “luck” and plays the game well. It can be performed, and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

  Such an unexpected jackpot is actually a game state after the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot has ended, even though the game state does not seem to be a game state in which the probability variation function operates. Is generated by actively presenting the case of the external normal game state B in which the probability changing function is activated (as much as the external normal game state B). Therefore, the jackpot game is not executed in a daisy chain by mere coincidence relying only on the winning probability of the jackpot in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability variation function does not operate. Since it can be won, the decline of interest can be suppressed. Moreover, despite the possibility of an unexpected jackpot after the long-open jackpot game based on the second long-open jackpot or the third long-open jackpot game, the reverse, that is, what is the number of changes in the special symbol, for example? Since it is not intentionally set to a game state that falls into a so-called humiliation such as a thousand revolutions (but there is a possibility that it will accidentally fall into the so-called hamari), the willingness to continue the game is not lost, Reduction can be suppressed.

  In other words, in the external normal gaming state after the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, the winning probability A adopted at the initial time and the probability higher than the corresponding selected probability A The lottery process for the jackpot is executed with one of the two winning probabilities B and the winning probabilities B equal to each other (by the double standard of the winning probabilities A and B). Therefore, even if this external normal gaming state is repeated, since at least the same winning probability A as the external normal gaming state A is maintained, the situation of falling into a state where the jackpot is not won for a long period of time is eliminated. In addition, with the winning probability B that is easy to win a big win, it is possible to give a change (so-called wave) to the ease of winning a big win in the external normal gaming state. The state can be changed (so-called wave) in the ease of winning the jackpot.

  In addition, if the winning probabilities for the second long open jackpot and the third long open jackpot that trigger the transition to the external normal gaming state are similar, the winning probability in the external normal gaming state is as follows. With B, the expectation that the jackpot lottery process will be executed increases. In other words, the winning probability (average probability) expected in the external normal gaming state is much larger than the winning probability A in consideration of the proportion of the winning probability A adopted in the external normal gaming state and the proportion of the winning probability B adopted. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation is further enhanced in the external normal gaming state.

[About time limit mode]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the second short opening jackpot is won in the external normal gaming state or when a specific condition is established, the short opening big hit game based on the second short opening jackpot winning or the establishment of the specific condition is established. After the special electric accessory actuating process based on is completed, the “time limit mode” is entered.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the time limit mode. In this “time limit mode”, as shown in FIG. 67, eight alphabets of eight characters are displayed on the effect display device 115. When the time limit mode is entered, all alphabets are displayed in black and partially colored according to the progress of the game. In FIG. 67, “I”, “K”, “A”, and “D” are black display, and “P”, “N”, “L”, and “Y” are colored display. In the time limit mode, as the game progresses, the black display of the alphabet is changed to colored display, and when the alphabet of all 8 characters changes to colored display within a limited time shown in advance, The jackpot game is started. In this time limit mode, the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) scroll in the vertical direction as shown in FIG.

  In the external normal gaming state A where neither the probability changing function nor the opening extension function is activated, if the player wins the second short opening big hit or enters the “time limit mode” due to the establishment of a specific condition, the gaming state in this time limit mode May be in the external normal gaming state A and in the external normal gaming state B. Based on the number of jackpot random numbers with respect to the random number width of the above-mentioned determination random numbers, the second short open jackpot with respect to the random number width of the design random numbers, and the number of random numbers that satisfy a specific condition with respect to the random number width of the random numbers for determination with the external normal gaming state The ratio between the winning probability for the second short open jackpot in A and the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 1:19.

  On the other hand, in the case of entering the “time limit mode” due to the fact that the second short open jackpot is won or the specific condition is satisfied in the external normal gaming state B, the gaming state at this time is always the external normal gaming state B. Become. This is because the special electric accessory operating process is not a hit with the operation of the condition device, and therefore the external normal gaming state B continues even if the specific condition is satisfied in the external normal gaming state B.

  By the way, although the game state in the “time limit mode” may be in the case of the external normal game state A and the case of the external normal game state B, the game state can be recognized only by the player only in the external normal game state. It is. However, after winning the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot in the external normal game state A, the long open big hit game based on the winning of the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot has ended. Instead of making the player think that it is a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate as in the gaming state, as described above, a predetermined matter (in this embodiment, 8 characters) within a certain limited time. A certain amount of expectation is given to the player such that the jackpot game is started when the black display portion for all alphabets is colored and displayed). Moreover, since the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is higher than the winning probability of winning the jackpot, the player enters the “time limit mode” at a relatively high frequency, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Externally, the jackpot game starts when the black display portion for all eight alphabets is colored and displayed, but internally, when the jackpot is won, all the eight alphabets are colored. Processing such as display is performed. Therefore, when the player is in the normal normal game state B, the colored display alphabet is greater than the black display alphabet in the external normal game state A, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. ing.

  In the present embodiment, when entering the “time limit mode”, the timer 1004 indicating the remaining time of the “time limit mode” is displayed in the lower left area of the effect display device 115. Here, the time in the “time limit mode” is a fixed time (3 minutes in the present embodiment) regardless of whether the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B. Since the number of fluctuations of special symbols per minute is about 5 on average, the number of fluctuations of special symbols in “Time Limit Mode” is about 15. If done, the number of fluctuations will be further reduced). This number of 15 times is less than half of the reciprocal of the winning probability for the jackpot in the external normal gaming state B.

  Thus, in the “time limit mode”, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the winning probability B that is higher than the jackpot winning probability A adopted at the initial time by the winning of the second short open jackpot. If the specific condition is satisfied, the lottery process is performed under the condition that the external normal gaming state at the time of the corresponding selection is maintained. In other words, since there is a case in which a lottery process is performed with the winning probability B by winning the second short open jackpot, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in the “time limit mode” is suitably set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the “time limit mode”.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the game is continuously shifted to the external normal gaming state, the winning probability A adopted at the initial time and the winning probability set to be higher than the corresponding winning probability A. One of the two winning probabilities with B is adopted to the same extent (winning probability A and winning probability B are double standard), and when the lottery process is performed with the winning probability A, the lottery process is performed with the winning probability B. Under the circumstances where the player is suggested to be in a predetermined single (one) game state regardless of the time, the lottery process is performed with either the winning probability A or the winning probability B. Like to do. Therefore, the player sees that the lottery process is performed only with the winning probability A, regardless of whether the winning of the second short open big hit or the establishment of the specific condition is entered. Compared with the case where the final value is determined, the expectation level for jackpots can be dramatically increased.

  By the way, when the game state in the “time limit mode” is the external normal game state B, the game state remains in the external normal game state B even if the jackpot is not won during the “time limit mode”. That is, in the “time limit mode”, even if the “time limit mode” ends without the black display portion of all eight alphabets being colored, the probability variation function remains active. The jackpot game can occur at a relatively early stage.

  In the present embodiment, even if the gaming state in the “time limit mode” is the external normal gaming state B, it is not always a big win in the “time limit mode”. In other words, while the number of changes in the special symbol in the “time limit mode” is about 15 as described above, the reciprocal of the jackpot winning probability in the external normal gaming state B is more than 15 times. That is, even if it is assumed that the “time limit mode” is the external normal gaming state B, the probability of winning a big hit in the “time limit mode” is less than half. As a result, although the player is discouraged once, it can be revived and it can be thought that the player has won the jackpot, the player can be given more joy, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Moreover, when the “time limit mode” ends, even if the game is in the external normal game state B, the background image of the effect display device 115 is externally similar to that in the external normal game state A. Therefore, when the “time limit mode” ends, the player can be greatly discouraged. The greater the degree of discouragement, the greater the joy when a big hit game is generated at a relatively early stage.

  In addition, the “time limit mode” is entered not only when a specific condition is satisfied, but also when winning the second short opening big hit, so it is a so-called mission mode that is merely a mere presentation as in the past. Unlike the “time limit mode”, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation to win a jackpot. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the “time limit mode” is entered even when a specific condition is satisfied in the external normal gaming state (that is, the external normal gaming state B) after winning the second long open jackpot. In this case, in the “time limit mode”, since the probability changing function is operated based on the second long open jackpot, it is very easy to win the jackpot. As a result, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot in the “time limit mode” can be further improved.

  In the “Time Limit Mode”, as in the previous case, the big win lottery with one of the two winning probabilities (double standard) of the winning probability A in which the probability changing function is not activated and the winning probability B in which the probability changing function is activated. Processing is executed. Then, in order to increase the expectation that the jackpot lottery process is executed with the winning probability B in the “time limit mode”, when the second short open jackpot is won, the “time limit mode” is entered. However, such as the second short-opening jackpot, “the hit where the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning the jackpot” is recognized by the player as having a low value as a jackpot There is a need to improve this.

  In this regard, as will be described later, in this embodiment, when the first short-opening jackpot is won, which is “a winning where the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning the jackpot” Shifts to the promotion mode in which the second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probabilistic jackpot (a so-called probability fluctuation function and a so-called short-time function, which is the most valuable hit for the player) I am doing so. In such a promotion mode, so-called probable jackpots are more likely to be won than in the above-described external normal gaming state (in this sense, if the winning probabilities are only “so-called probable jackpots”, the corresponding selection probability is more It can be said that the mode has been changed to a high winning probability), and the player's main purpose is to shift to such a promotion mode, rather than simply winning per winning ball that prompts a certain amount of game balls to be paid out. The game will be aimed at winning the first short open big hit. As a result, the value of “a winning where the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning the jackpot” has been increased, including the case where the second short opening jackpot is won. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the player does not win a winning ball that prompts a certain amount of game balls to be paid out. That is, it is possible to provide not only a monotonous game such as how many winnings can be won for prompting a certain amount of game balls to be paid out, but also a new game.

  By the way, in the “time limit mode”, in the external normal game state A, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit is won, and the long open based on the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit is won. There is a case where the player enters a normal game state after the jackpot game is over. At this time, the sum of the number of changes in the special symbol from the end of the jackpot game until entering the “time limit mode” and the number of changes in the special symbol in the “time limit mode” may be less than 50 times. is there. For example, if a special symbol change display is made 10 times before entering the “time limit mode” after the jackpot game ends, the “time limit mode” The sum of the number of times the special symbol fluctuates until it enters the time and the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the “time limit mode” is approximately 25 times. In such a case, when the “time limit mode” ends, the image displayed on the effect display device 115 regardless of whether the game is in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B is shown in FIG. The image is any one of (a) to (c) and does not return to FIG. 66 again. As a result, in the external normal game state A, the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot was won, and the long open jackpot game based on the win for the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot has ended. When entering the “time limit mode” from this gaming state, in the external normal gaming state A, the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot is won, and the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot is won. A process for storing the number of special symbol fluctuations in the gaming state after the long open jackpot game based on the winning is not required, and the load on the CPU 832 mounted on the display device control board 816 can be reduced.

[About promotion mode]
Next, game contents in the external advantageous game state B, that is, the “promotion mode” will be described. Winning the jackpot without the operation of the extension extension function (that is, the jackpot where the extension extension function does not operate after the jackpot game ends even if winning in the special symbol lottery process in the external normal gaming state A) Even so, in the “promotion mode”, the opening extension function is activated after the jackpot game ends.

  In addition, as described above, the “promotion mode” means that when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open big hit or the first short open big hit in the external normal gaming state, the first long open big hit This is a gaming state after the short-opening jackpot game based on the first short-opening jackpot or the short-opening jackpot game based on the first short-opening jackpot (that is, the external advantageous gaming state B). In the promotion mode entered after the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot, and the promoted mode entered after the short open jackpot game based on the first short open jackpot, the effect display device 115 The background image displayed on is different.

  Here, FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an image displayed on the effect display device 115 when the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot is finished and the player enters the promotion mode. According to FIG. 68, in the promotion mode after the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot is over, the effect display device 115 displays a diagram reminiscent of outer space as a background image. In addition, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) is displayed by being attached to a card-like display on which a character is drawn, and the front and back surfaces are alternately displayed instead of scroll fluctuation. As a result, rotational fluctuations that change the design are performed.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device when the short open big hit game based on the first short open big hit is finished and then the promotion mode is entered. According to FIG. 69, in the promotion mode after the short open jackpot game based on the first short open jackpot is over, the effect display device 115 displays the character silhouette on the dark background image (the character silhouette is a decorative pattern). Since it is displayed behind 1153, it is difficult to see in FIG. In addition, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) is displayed on a card-like display on which a character is drawn, and scrolls.

  Thus, the image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the “promotion mode” is significantly different from the image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state. In particular, since the display method of each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is remarkably different, the “elevation mode” seems to be in a special state different from the external normal gaming state. Can be grasped. Furthermore, since the operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is controlled in the promotion mode, the player can grasp that the gaming state is advantageous to him / herself.

  By the way, when it is in the external normal game state, if the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process, the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is based. The gaming state after the short opening big hit game is ended becomes an external normal gaming state B that does not involve the operation of the opening extension function. In addition, when the third long open jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process in the external normal game state A, the game state after the long open big hit game ends is the external normal game state A.

  However, in the “promotion mode”, even if the second long open jackpot or the second short open big hit is won in the special symbol lottery process, the long open big hit game or the second short open based on the second long open big hit The gaming state after the short-opening jackpot game based on the jackpot ends is an external advantageous gaming state B that involves the operation of both the probability changing function and the opening extension function. That is, even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153 a to 1153 c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are not only specific symbols but also semi-specific symbols, the “promotion mode” after the jackpot game ends. (In other words, it becomes a probable open extended game). Here, among the symbols 1 to 8, the number of specific symbols is two (3 and 7) and the number of quasi-specific symbols is four (1, 2, 5 and 6). It seems that “promotion mode” continues with a probability of 6 minutes. Thereby, game willingness improves and the fall of interest can be suppressed. However, even if the result of the special symbol lottery processing is the first long open big hit or the second long open big hit, as in the case of the external normal gaming state A, the effect display device 115 stops at a non-specific symbol double eye. It may be displayed.

  In addition, when in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B, the player can clearly grasp that the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open jackpot before the jackpot game is executed. Is only when the effect display device 115 is stopped and displayed with a specific design of a double-eyed eye. However, when in the promotion mode, the special display lottery processing result is displayed even if the effect display device 115 is stopped and displayed with a specific design of a double eye, or is stopped and displayed with a semi-specific design of a double design. The player can clearly grasp that the first long open jackpot is executed before the jackpot game is executed. That is, if the promotion mode is in progress, the promotion mode (that is, the external advantageous gaming state B) is executed again after the jackpot game is executed even if the effect display device 115 is stopped and displayed with the semi-specific symbols. It becomes. Therefore, for the player, among the decorative symbols 1 to 8, not only “3” and “7” as specific symbols but also “1”, “2”, “5” and “ The promotion mode is continued even when the display is stopped at any of the decorative symbols of “6”. In this way, once entering the promotion mode, a loop state occurs in which it is easy to enter the promotion mode again after the jackpot game has been executed, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the promotion mode. In addition, once entering the promotion mode, it has a very large explosive power, so the player will play with the expectation to enter the promotion mode even in the normal gaming state, and only in the promotion mode In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the normal gaming state.

  In the “elevation mode”, internally, the number of random numbers per first long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, and the number of random numbers per third long open jackpot for the random number width of the above described design random number Based on the number of random numbers per first short-open big jackpot and the number of random numbers per second short-open big jackpot, the probability that the “promotion mode” will continue after the jackpot game ends is approximately three-fifths. In this sense, the second long open jackpot has a function (in this way) in the external normal game state so that the per-share distribution rate that triggers the transition to the external normal game state becomes the highest per-share distribution rate. While maintaining the specifications as a gaming machine), in the external advantageous gaming state, the function is set so that the per-share distribution ratio that triggers the transition to the external advantageous gaming state becomes the highest per-share distribution ratio. It can also be said that the reinforcement is to increase the continuity of the chance gaming state advantageous to the player.

  By the way, also in this “promotion mode”, when the third long open jackpot is won, after the jackpot game corresponding to the third long open jackpot is over, the above-mentioned external normal game state A is entered. Will be migrated. However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, prior to the transition to the external normal gaming state A, the second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probability variation jackpot (awakening gaming state), and a so-called probability variation function and a so-called time reduction. The function is shifted to the “retraction mode” in which only the short-time function is activated among the functions for a predetermined retraction period. In other words, in this case, even if the third long open jackpot is won in the “promotion mode”, the predetermined pullback period after the jackpot game corresponding to the selection is performed is a so-called probability variable jackpot (so-called probability fluctuation jackpot). If it is only the winning probability of the function and the so-called short-time function, and the winning value of the highest value for the player), it has a probability that is more advantageous to the player than when it is in the above-mentioned external normal gaming state A The lottery process for the jackpot is performed. Therefore, when the “promotion mode” ends, it is suitably suppressed that the interest of the game is suddenly lowered. In addition, the “retraction mode” of this embodiment is configured as an external advantageous game state A with the operation of the opening extension function (the probability changing function is not activated). Further, in this “retraction mode”, the number of symbols constituting each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153 is eight, whereas the specific symbol (3, 7) and the quasi-specific symbol (1, 2) Since the number of 5 and 6) is 6, the visual probability that the “promotion mode” will continue is 3/4. Thereby, it can have a big expectation with respect to continuing "elevation mode", and can suppress the fall of interest.

  In this way, while in the external normal gaming state, the expectation to enter the “elevation mode” is relatively low, but once entering the “elevation mode”, the so-called continuous change in the expectation increases and the interest is great. Enhanced. Moreover, in terms of probability, if you win three times in the jackpot in the special symbol lottery in the external normal gaming state A, one of them will be a jackpot to enter the “promotion mode” (however, in the visual one quarter), The conditions for entering the “promotion mode” are not so severe for the player. In other words, if the conditions for entering the “elevation mode” are severe, the “elevation mode” is far away unless the player is a high-skilled so-called advanced player. Some players feel that way. However, if it is possible to enter the “promotion mode” with a probability of one out of three times, anyone will feel that there is an opportunity to enter the “promotion mode”, and the “promotion mode” will be familiar Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, in the conventional short opening with probability variation (so-called sudden probability variation), the prize ball is not paid out and only the function of the probability variation function is provided, but rather, the player can obtain a lot of prize balls. I sometimes felt disappointed that I failed to win. In that regard, in the first short opening jackpot of the present embodiment, after the short opening jackpot game based on the first short opening jackpot is completed, the mode shifts to the “promotion mode”. In the “promotion mode”, not only the operation of the probability changing function is given, but also when the second long opening jackpot is won, the external advantageous gaming state B is executed after the jackpot game ends (that is, the second long opening) The jackpot is given the same benefits as the first long open jackpot). In other words, the first short opening jackpot of this embodiment functions as a “perception awakening” that transforms the second long opening jackpot into a first long opening jackpot that has a greater benefit to the player. Therefore, the player can expect a large profit when winning the first short opening jackpot, and does not feel the disappointment as when winning per conventional short opening with probability change.

[Retraction mode]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the “promotion mode” is finished, the “promotion mode” can be pulled back with a high probability until the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches a specified value. Mode "exists. The specified value is the number of times the opening extension function is activated (for example, 100 times).

  Specifically, in the case of the external advantageous gaming state A, in the special symbol lottery process, if one of the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit, the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit is won, The “elevation mode” can be pulled back again. That is, in this embodiment, the state in which the opening extension function is activated is a state (awakening gaming state) in which the gaming value as the second long opening jackpot is different. Then, based on the number of random numbers per first long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per first short open jackpot, and the number of second short open jackpots relative to the random number width of the design random number described above. In this “Pullback Mode”, if you win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery process, the probability that you can pull back the “Promotion Mode” is about three times if the jackpot game is executed five times. It is. That is, the lottery process for the jackpot so as to be more advantageous to the player than when in the external normal gaming state (in this embodiment, a series of processes including the process of determining the winning type according to the design random number) Will be done.

  In this embodiment, when the third long open jackpot is won as a result of the lottery process for the jackpot during the “retraction mode”, a special symbol is played after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed. The “elevation mode” is again shifted (extended) to the “retraction mode” in which the “elevation mode” can be pulled back with a high probability until the number of fluctuations reaches a specified value. Also at this time, the specified value is, for example, 100 times.

  Here, FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device in the “retraction mode”. In this “retraction mode”, as shown in FIG. 70, the stage space is displayed as a background image on the effect display device 115. In addition, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is displayed on a card-like display on which a character is drawn, as in the promotion mode. As a result, even in this pull-back mode, it is possible to grasp at a glance that there is a special state unlike the external normal gaming state. Note that the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is scrolled differently from the promotion mode.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is externally played as a single external normal game state both in the external normal game state A and in the external normal game state B. It is grasped by the person. In other words, if the jackpot is won in the external normal gaming state A, it is certain that the probability changing function will be activated after the jackpot game is over. Only when winning short open jackpot. Therefore, in the external normal gaming state, it seems that the probability of winning the jackpot with the activation of the probability variation function is relatively low, but once entering the “elevation mode”, the probability of winning the jackpot with the operation of the probability variation function is increased. I can feel it. Therefore, in the external normal gaming state, the game is played with expectation for the “promotion mode” that can give a large profit to the player, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, when winning the first short open jackpot or the second short open jackpot, the game balls given as prize balls to the player while winning the big jackpot in the special symbol lottery process The amount is extremely small as compared to the case where the first long opening jackpot, the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot is won. Accordingly, when winning the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot, the probability changing function is activated after the short opening jackpot game based on the winning of the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot ends. Even if you are convinced, the player will feel lost.

  However, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when winning the first short opening jackpot that can be convinced that it is the first short opening jackpot in the special symbol lottery process (that is, it can be sure that the specific condition is not satisfied) The second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probability change jackpot (awakening gaming state), and enters a “promotion mode” in which both a so-called probability change function and a so-called time-shortening function are activated. Therefore, even if the player wins the jackpot type (first short-open jackpot) with a small amount of game balls given to the player as a prize ball, a large number of game balls are subsequently awarded to the player as a prize ball. Since it can be granted, rather than the feeling that winning the first short open jackpot is a loss, the expectation that the jackpot game continues to change will exceed, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in the “elevation mode”, the “elevation mode” continues even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153 a to 1153 c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are not only specific symbols but also quasi-specific symbols. It seems that “promotion mode” continues with a probability of three quarters. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the feeling that it is a loss to win the first short open jackpot, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the result of the special symbol lottery processing in the “promotion mode” after the first short open jackpot game ends is the third long open jackpot game, the long open jackpot game based on the third long open jackpot game ends. After that, it enters the “retraction mode”. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short-open big hit game, the probability that the game ball as the award ball is returned to the external normal game state A is hardly given to the player. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the feeling that winning the 1st short open jackpot is a loss, and to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot game will continue, suppressing the decrease in interest it can.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins any of the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit, the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit in the “elevation mode”, After the jackpot game based on is completed, the gaming state becomes the “promotion mode” again (that is, both the probability changing function and the opening extension function are activated). Further, in the “pulling back mode”, if the winning combination of the first long opening jackpot, the second long opening jackpot, the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot is won, the “promotion mode” can be pulled back again. This is to confirm whether or not the opening extension function is activated when the jackpot is won, and if the opening extension function is activated, the jackpot game based on the winning jackpot is determined regardless of the type of the winning jackpot. This is because an internal control process such as operating the open extension function is performed after the execution. That is, the CPU 711 mounted on the main control board 710 can provide the “elevation mode” and the “retraction mode” only by confirming whether or not the opening extension function is activated when the big win is won. Thus, it is possible to provide an “elevation mode” and a “retraction mode” while suppressing an increase in the load on the CPU 711, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in variations. On the other hand, if the opening extension function is not activated when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery process, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, in the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the winning jackpot is executed It is determined whether the open extension function is activated.

[Variation time of special symbols]
By the way, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have different variation times depending on whether or not the opening extension function is activated. In addition, when the opening extension function is not activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed depends on the counter value (the so-called first reserved number) by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Similarly, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the variation time of the second special symbol differs depending on the counter value (so-called second reserved number) by the second special symbol hold counter 913.

  Specifically, in the external normal game state in which the release extension function does not operate, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is the counter value (first special symbol hold counter 903 at the start of variation) If the counter value after the counter value is subtracted with the start of the change) is 3, it is 3000 msec. If the counter value is 2, it is 7000 msec, and if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 11000 msec. In addition, the variation time of the second special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is also the counter value (the variation is started by the second special symbol hold counter 913 at the start of the variation, similarly to the variation time of the first special symbol. Accordingly, if the counter value after subtraction of the counter value is 3, it is 3000 msec. If the counter value is 2, it is 7000 msec, and if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 11000 msec. Note that the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the high expectation effect is performed is determined by the mode (type) of the high expectation effect.

  On the other hand, in the external advantageous gaming state (external advantageous gaming state A, external advantageous gaming state B) in which the opening extension function is activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is the first variation time at the beginning of the variation. If the counter value by the 1 special symbol hold counter 903 (the counter value after the counter value is subtracted as the change starts) is 2 or 3, it is 2000 msec. If the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 7000 msec. In addition, the variation time of the second special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is also the counter value (the variation is started by the second special symbol hold counter 913 at the start of the variation, similarly to the variation time of the first special symbol. Accordingly, if the counter value after the counter value is subtracted is 2 or 3, it is 2000 msec. If the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 7000 msec.

  Thus, the special symbol variation time is significantly different between when the open extension function is activated and when it is not activated. Further, since the variation time of the special symbol can be grasped externally, the player determines whether or not the gaming state is advantageous to himself / herself based on the variation time of the special symbol. Accordingly, the player's willingness to continue the game is improved in the external advantageous gaming state, while the willingness to continue the game may be lost in the external normal gaming state. In addition, there are cases where the player is in an external normal game state and an internal advantageous game state as in the external normal game state B. Even in such a game state, the player is not advantageous to himself / herself. It will be judged that it is a gaming state. At this time, an unexpected jackpot can occur, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol-corresponding symbol corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the decorative symbol 1153, the variation time of the special symbol-corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002, the variation time of the special symbol, Is almost the same time.

  In other words, in the external advantageous game state in which the opening extension function is activated, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the variation time of the decorative symbol 1153 is also determined by the number of lottery processes that are put on hold. More specifically, when the number of lottery processes that are put on hold is large, the time required for the variable display effect for the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is small (7000 ms). Thus, the variable display effect of the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is performed in a shortened variable display mode of less than “½” (2000 ms). When such a shortened variation display mode is employed, even if the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to variation display effects, for example, twice, when the number of lottery processes is small (counter value is 0 or 1) It is possible to shorten the time required for the first variation display effect for one time (7000 ms). In addition, if the player is informed that a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to variable display effects in the above-described shortened variable display mode, the player is expected to have a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. It is also possible.

[Direction display mode]
Next, representative ones of the effect display modes (including the variation pattern of the decorative symbols 1153) according to the lottery result of the special symbols executed in the effect display device 115 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to the drawings.

  In the “effect display mode”, an effect in which a character imitating a person sings music (hereinafter referred to as a character singing effect) may be executed. In the “character singing effect”, an image (including a moving image) representing the singing operation of the character is displayed on the effect display device 115 and various music pieces (here, music A to music G) are displayed from the speakers 144 and 341. Is output as audio.

  In addition, the “music piece” in the present embodiment includes three parts of an introduction part (intro part), a first half part, and a second half part, and one piece of music is configured as a whole by combining the parts. Specifically, the “introduction section (intro section)” is a musical tone at the beginning of a song, and makes the player conceive the title of the song and the subsequent musical tone. The “first half” is the musical sound of the part following the intro part of the music, and includes at least the first half of the main part (so-called rust part) of the music. The “second half” is the musical sound of the part following the first half of the music, and includes at least the second half of the main part (so-called chorus part) of the music.

  In this embodiment, the “music piece” is composed of an introduction part (intro part) and a main part (rust part), but may be a series of music from the introduction part to the end of the song. In addition, “musical sound” means a part of music. Accordingly, only the introduction part (intro part), only the first half part, and only the second half part correspond to musical sounds. Further, the musical sound is not limited to one phrase, and may be a plurality of phrases.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an external normal game state (external normal game state A or external normal game state B) in which the release extension function is not activated, and an external advantageous game state (external advantage game) in which the release extension function is activated. In the state A or the external advantageous game state B), the effect display mode (including the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153) accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is greatly different. Therefore, hereinafter, the external normal gaming state and the external advantageous gaming state are divided and each effect display mode will be specifically described.

[Variation pattern table]
The effect display mode based on the special symbol lottery result (lottery suspension) is the variation pattern (specifically, determined in the above-described variation pattern setting process (see FIGS. 53, 54, 56 and 58). The variation pattern determined based on the selected variation pattern table is executed. Therefore, in the following, details of the effect display mode based on each variation pattern will be described with reference to the variation pattern name and variation number defined in each variation pattern table shown in FIG. 55, FIG. 57 and FIG. I will explain it.

  By the way, as apparent from each variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 54, 56 and 58 and each variation pattern table shown in FIGS. Regardless of the presence or absence, each table (each variation pattern) is selected from each variation pattern table depending on whether or not the external open extension function is activated. That is, even if the internal probability changing function is activated, the variation pattern that can be selected differs depending on whether the external open / extend function is activated. Specifically, even in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability changing function is activated, the opening extension function is not activated, and therefore, the same variation pattern as that in the external normal gaming state B in which the probability varying function is not activated is selected. Further, in the external advantageous game state A in which the probability changing function is activated, since the open extension function is in operation, the same variation pattern as that in the external advantageous game state B in which the probability changing function is not activated is selected.

  In addition to the presence / absence of the opening extension function (external normal gaming state or external advantageous gaming state), the winning type (first long opening big hit, second long opening big hit, third long opening big hit, first short Each table (each variation pattern) is selected from each variation pattern table, depending on whether the opening big hit, the second short opening big hit, or the specific condition is satisfied. For this reason, an optimum variation pattern corresponding to the winning type is selected from each variation pattern table.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 56, in the external advantageous gaming state, when the winning type is the second long open big hit, the variation pattern is selected in the same manner as the first long open big hit, so the second long open Even if it is a big hit, the probability variation confirmation table (A5) can be selected. On the other hand, in the external normal gaming state, when the winning type is the second long open jackpot, the variation pattern is selected differently from the first long open jackpot. That is, the probability variation confirmation table (A3) is not selected for the second long open jackpot. Note that the probability variation confirmation table (A3) and the probability variation confirmation table (A5) are tables in which only a variation pattern for deriving the confirmation of the first long open jackpot is selected. In other words, as described above, in the external advantageous gaming state (promotion mode and pullback mode), the second long open jackpot is handled as being promoted to the first long open jackpot, so such table configuration and variation pattern selection are adopted. ing.

[Low expectation fluctuation when the open extension function is not activated]
First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the “low expectation variation” that is the most basic effect display mode in the external normal gaming state in which the opening extension function does not operate will be described. This “low-expectation deviating fluctuation” is a mode in which a deviation is derived as a lottery result without a high-expected production such as the occurrence of reach.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an effect display mode when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means is derived to the effect display device in the external normal gaming state. That is, FIG. 71 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect before the start of variation of the decorative symbol 1153, FIG. 71 (B) is a diagram illustrating an aspect during the variation of the decorative symbol 1153, and FIG. 71 (C) is a variation number. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a stop mode of the decorative pattern 1153 based on “normal variation”, “shortening variation 1”, or “shortening variation 2” of 1 to 3, FIG. 71D is a diagram showing a screen for deriving the establishment of reach; FIG. 71 (E) is a diagram illustrating a variation of the decorative symbol 1153 in a state where reach has been established.

  As shown in FIG. 71A, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the start of the change. Further, for example, in the hold display area 1150, the hold storage display portions 1151a to 1151d and 1152a to 1152b are in the second display mode or the third display mode, and the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (first It is shown that the sum of the counter value by one special symbol hold counter 903) and the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (count value by the second special symbol hold counter 913) is six. In the following, according to the holding order by each special symbol lottery means 900, 910, the symbol variation based on the lottery suspension by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (variation display of the first special symbol) and the second special symbol lottery means 910 Symbol variation based on the lottery suspension (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), when the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is started in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol In the column 1153c, the symbols are changed in a manner that scrolls in the vertical direction (more specifically, in the direction from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player), and in the middle symbol column 1153b, the symbols are switched on the spot. Variations are made in the manner. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b. If the variation corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation. On the other hand, if the variation corresponds to the second special symbol, the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation.

Note that the number of holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is decremented by 1 due to the start of the change of the special symbol. Here, each display mode in each of the hold storage display units 1151b to 1151d and 1152a to 1152b is the previous one. The on-hold storage display units 1151a to 1151d and 1152a are shifted and displayed. Further, the display mode of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is set to the first display mode or non-display. As a result, in the hold display area 1150, it is shown that the hold by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the hold by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is digested to be a total of five.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c stops at a different symbol that is completely unrelated to produce an effect that “displacement” is derived. The display mode is “low-expected fluctuation” in the present embodiment. This “low-expected fluctuation” corresponds to any one of “normal fluctuation” of fluctuation number 1, “shortening fluctuation 1” of fluctuation number 2, and “shortening fluctuation 2” of fluctuation number 3.

  As described above, in this embodiment, whether or not the high-expected effect is performed when the result of the special symbol lottery process is out of order and the specific condition is not satisfied when the opening extension function is inactive. Is drawn (high-expected production lottery). Next, when the high-expected production lottery is not won (in other words, when “execution of a normal off-effect” is selected), a “continuous production twice out” of a variation number 24 described later is executed. Whether or not is drawn (continuous production lottery). Then, when the continuous production lottery is not won, the “low expectation fluctuation” is executed for the fluctuation time determined according to the number of the lottery holds.

  More specifically, when “decrease in low expectation” is performed for the decorative symbol 1153 corresponding to the first special symbol, the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (counter by the first special symbol hold counter 903) If the value) is 0 or 1 after the pending digestion, the “normal fluctuation (variation time: 12000 ms)” of the variation number 1 is selected and executed, and if it is 2 after the suspended digestion, the variation number 2 “Shortened fluctuation 1 (fluctuation time: 7000 ms)” is selected and executed, and if there are three after the suspended digestion, “shortened fluctuation 2 (fluctuation time: 3000 ms)” is selected and executed. Even when the “decreased low expectation variation” is performed on the decorative symbol 1153 corresponding to the second special symbol, the lottery holding number by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (count value by the second special symbol holding counter 913) is used. Similarly, the variation pattern is selected and executed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, in the external normal game state where the opening extension function does not operate, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play, if you win the continuous production lottery without winning the high expectation production lottery, As the “normally off effect”, “continuous effect twice off” with the variable number 24 is executed. Further, when the lottery for the continuous effect is not won, any one of “normal variation” with a variation number 1, “shortening variation 1” with a variation number 2 and “shortening variation 2” with a variation number 3 is selected as the “unusual effect”. Is executed according to the number of reserved special symbols. As the number of reserved special symbols increases, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected, which suppresses the generation of so-called invalid spheres and prevents the occurrence of a state in which all of the special symbol reservations are digested. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. .

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern of variation numbers 4 to 23 is selected and executed in the external normal game state in which the release extension function does not operate, the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are the same. 71D, the effect display device 115 displays a screen for deriving reach. In the state where reach is established as shown in FIG. 71 (E), only the middle symbol row 1153b of the decorative symbol 1153 fluctuates and the symbol variation also continues in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Executed. Then, as described below, reach effects based on various variation patterns are executed.

[Music reach production when the open extension function is not activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a “music reach effect” that is an effect display mode with reach when the external normal gaming state is executed will be described. This “music reach production” is a mode in which a win or miss is derived as a lottery result after performing a reach production using a part or all of a predetermined music.

  After the reach notification is made as described above (see FIG. 71D), the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the A song (see FIG. 71E) and the speaker 144. From 341, the introduction section of the A musical piece is output as audio. After the singing effect using the introduction section of the A music piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “off” is derived. The aspect corresponds to the variation number 4 “A music reach short out”. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the introduction part of the A music piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in the same symbols as the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “big hit” (in detail, The effect display mode derived from winning the first to third long open big hits) corresponds to “A music reach / short hit” of the variation number 5. As described above, when the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped, the symbol variation in the special symbol-corresponding symbol 1000, 1002 is also stopped, and the lottery result of the special symbol indicated by the decorative symbol 1153 is the special symbol-corresponding symbol 1000, 1002. It is also notified by the stop symbol at.

  Here, after the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “disconnection” is derived. However, when the symbol variation in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 is continuously performed, the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped. Then, the variation of the middle symbol row 1153b is resumed from the state in which the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, and the singing effect of the character is continued to be executed in the effect display device 115. Are continuously output from the introduction unit. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the A music piece is executed corresponds to “A music reach long out” of the variation number 6. On the other hand, after the singing production using the first half of the A music piece is executed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is equivalent to the “A music reach long win” of the variation number 7. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the introduction part of A music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol row 1153b is resumed, and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the performance is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output audio from the introduction unit so that the main part (first half part and second half part) of the A musical piece is continuous from the introduction part. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the main part of the A music piece is executed corresponds to “A music reach / super long out” of the variation number 8. On the other hand, after the singing production using the main part of the A music piece is executed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is equivalent to the variation number 9 “A music reach / very long” To do.

  Next, during the performance of the singing using the A-music introduction section, the effect display device 115 switches to and displays the introduction screen for B-music without stopping the symbol variation in the middle symbol row 1153b. At the same time, the introduction part of B music may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 in place of A music (music switching effect to B music). Further, after the music switching effect using the B music introduction section is executed, the effect display device 115 continues to execute the singing effect of the character unique to the B music, and the speakers 144 and 341 transmit the B music. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the B music is executed corresponds to “B music reach / normal out” of the variation number 10. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the B music is performed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “B music reach / normal win” of the variation number 11. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the B music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol sequence 1153b is resumed and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the performance is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output sound so that the latter half of the B music is continued from the first half. An effect display mode in which “delay” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the B music is executed corresponds to “B music reach / development failure” of the variation number 12. On the other hand, after the singing production using the second half of the B music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to “B music reach / per development” of the variation number 13. .

  Next, while the music switching effect using the introduction part of the B music is being executed, the effect display device 115 switches and displays the introduction screen to the C music without stopping the symbol variation of the middle symbol row 1153b. In addition, there is a case where the introduction part of the C music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 instead of the B music (music switching effect to the C music). Furthermore, after the music switching effect using the C music introduction unit is executed, the effect display device 115 continues to execute the singing effect of the character unique to the C music, and the speakers 144 and 341 generate the C music effect. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the C music is executed corresponds to “C music reach / normal out” of the variation number 14. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the C music is executed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to “C music reach / normal win” of the variation number 15. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the C music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol sequence 1153b is resumed, and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the effect is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output the sound so that the latter half of the C music continues from the first half. The effect display mode in which “disappear” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the C music is executed corresponds to “C music reach / development failure” of the variation number 16. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the latter half of the C music is performed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “C music reach / per development” of the variation number 17. .

  Next, while the music switching effect using the introduction unit of the C music is being executed, the effect display device 115 switches and displays the introduction screen to the D music without stopping the symbol variation of the middle symbol row 1153b. In addition, there is a case where the introduction portion of the D music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 instead of the C music (music switching effect to the D music). Further, after the music switching effect using the D music introduction unit is executed, the effect display device 115 continues to perform the character singing effect unique to the D music, and the speakers 144 and 341 transmit the D music. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the D music is executed corresponds to “D music reach / normal out” of the variation number 18. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the D music is executed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “D music reach / normal win” of the variation number 19. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the D music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol sequence 1153b is resumed, and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the effect is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output sound so that the latter half of the D music is continued from the first half. The effect display mode in which “depart” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the D music is executed corresponds to “D music reach / development failure” of the variation number 20. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of the D music is executed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to “D music reach / per development” of the variable number 21. .

  After the reach notification (see FIG. 71 (D)), the singing effect of the character unique to the G music is suddenly displayed on the effect display device 115 without performing the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music. As a result, the G music may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 as sound. Then, the effect display mode in which “off” is derived after the singing effect using the G music is executed corresponds to “G music reach out” of the variation number 22. On the other hand, after the singing effect using the G music is executed, scroll fluctuations (so-called full rotation fluctuations) are performed in a so-called double-eyed state in which the symbols in the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c are all in the same symbol. The effect display mode from which it is derived that “big hit” is won later corresponds to “G music reach / per full rotation” of the variation number 23.

  In this way, in the “music reach production” when the open extension function of the present embodiment is not operated, each reach production develops in stages (specifically, the variation time of special symbols is extended). Thus, each of the A to D music pieces can be output as a part continuous with the introduction part, the first half part, and the second half part. And as each part of A to D music is continuously output (that is, the singing effect of each music continues), the degree of expectation of winning the “big hit” is increased. Yes. Therefore, the player can enjoy the reach production while thinking that the singing production of each of the A to D music pieces is continued for a longer time, and the decrease in the interest is suppressed.

  In addition, in the “music reach production” when the open extension function is not activated according to the present embodiment, the degree of expectation that the “big hit” is won in the order of A song, B song, C song, and D song among the songs. It is configured to be high. Therefore, the player can perform the music switching effect to the B music when the reach occurs or the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music is performed, and further the music to the C music or the D music. Since the reach effect is watched while expecting the switching effect to be performed, a decrease in interest is suppressed.

[Continuous production n times when the open extension function is not activated]
Here, as described above, the continuous effect is that the special symbol display 84 and 86 is variably displayed only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. In other words, it is an effect that appears as if the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 have been subjected to a variable display effect multiple times. In other words, the effect lottery means 960 of the peripheral control board 810 suggests the result of the lottery process to the player by performing the effect control related to the continuous effect. It should be noted that after the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in a variable manner over a plurality of times, it is suggested that the winning symbol is hit or missed by a combination of stop symbols.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the external normal gaming state is executed, the effect display that seems to have been derived from the winning or coming off after the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in multiple variations. The “continuous production n times production” which is an aspect will be described.

First, as before, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the start of the change (FIG. 71).
From this state, the variation display effect for the decorative symbol 1153 is executed by simulating the above-described variation number 2 of “shortening variation 1” (7000 ms) (see FIG. 71B). Then, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a different symbol, and "displacement" is derived. However, the stop display at this time is in a temporary stop (interval) state, and the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 continue to display the variable symbols for the special symbol. And the fluctuation | variation of each symbol row | line | column 1153a-1153c is restarted from the state which this decoration symbol 1153 stopped temporarily. At this time, the number of lottery holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is maintained without being subtracted. In the present embodiment, the temporary stop (interval) of the decorative symbol 1153 is executed for 1000 ms.

  Then, after the variation display effect for the decorative symbol 1153 is simulated again with the variation number 2 of “shortening variation 1” (7000 ms), each stop of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c is stopped. The variation in which the symbol stops at a different symbol that is completely unrelated is equivalent to the above-mentioned variation number 24 of “out of two consecutive effects” (15000 ms). On the other hand, when the variation pattern of variation numbers 25-39 is selected and executed in the external normal gaming state where the release extension function does not operate, the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are the same. The effect display device 115 displays a screen for deriving reach (see FIG. 71D). Thereafter, a reach effect similar to the above-described “music reach effect” is executed based on various variation patterns.

  Thus, based on one hold related to the lottery result of the special symbol, the effect display mode in which the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is continuously performed twice is “continuous rendering”. It's called “Twice production”. In other words, during one variation of the special symbol based on one hold, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is performed pseudo twice. Similarly, an effect display mode in which the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is continuously performed three times based on one hold related to the lottery result of the special symbol is “continuous rendering 3”. "Direction".

  Specifically, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 6 is performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” is equivalent to the variable number 25 “continuous effect twice / A music reach / long miss” The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 7 is performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” corresponds to the variable number 26 “continuous effect twice / A music reach / long”. The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 9 is performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” corresponds to the variable number 27 “continuous effect twice / A music reach / super long hit”. Similarly, the effect display modes in which the reach effect similar to the change numbers 10 to 21 after the “continuous effect twice effect” is performed correspond to the change patterns of the change numbers 28 to 39, respectively. Further, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 9 is performed after the “continuous effect 3 times effect” corresponds to the variation number 40 of “3 times continuous effect / A music reach / very long”. Similarly, the effect display modes in which the reach effect similar to the change numbers 10 to 21 is performed after the “continuous effect 3 times effect” correspond to the change patterns of the change numbers 41 to 52, respectively.

[Specific conditions when opening extension function is not activated, special effect per short hit]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an effect display mode that is executed when a specific condition is established in the external normal gaming state or when a short win (first short open big hit and second short open big hit) is won. The “specific condition establishment / short win special effect” will be described. The “special effect” is an effect display mode for deriving that a specific “win” is won in a special mode without going through the derivation of reach establishment by the decorative symbol 1153.

  72 and 73 are diagrams showing an effect display mode derived to the effect display device when a specific condition is established in the external normal game state or when a short open jackpot is won. That is, FIG. 72 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect before the start of variation of the decorative symbol, FIG. 72 (B) is a diagram illustrating an aspect during the variation of the decorative symbol, and FIG. 72 (C) is a diagram illustrating the ranking board. FIG. 72 (D) is a diagram showing a branch effect in which a character's costume is converted. FIG. 73A shows a branching effect in which the character's costume is converted following FIG. 72D, and FIG. 73B shows the effect in which the character's costume is converted into a dress (white). 73 shows an example, FIG. 73C shows an effect screen in the time limit mode, FIG. 73D shows an example of an effect in which a character's costume is converted into a dress (red), and FIG. FIG. 73E shows an effect screen in the promotion mode, FIG. 73F shows an example of an effect in which a character's costume is converted into a space suit, and FIG. 73G shows winning of the jackpot. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation screen to derive.

First, as before, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the change starts (FIG. 72).
(Refer to FIG. 72B.) From this state, the decoration symbol 1153 is changed (see FIG. 72B). Then, while the decoration symbol 1153 is changing, the effect display device 115 displays an image imitating the ranking board by switching to the normal background image, as shown in FIG. 72 (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 72 (D) and 73 (A), the effect display device 115 performs an effect display in which the character's costume is converted into one of a plurality of patterns of costumes on the stage, After that, the decorative symbol 1153 (special symbol-corresponding symbol 1000, 1002) is stopped and displayed in the form of “out”. Then, the subsequent mode is derived by the costume finally worn by the character by the effect display shown in FIGS. 72 (D) and 73 (A).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), when the costume of the character is converted into a dress (white) by the effects shown in FIGS. 72 (D) and 73 (A), the variation number 53 “ Corresponds to “specific conditions established / per special variation”. This “specific condition establishment / per special variation” is an effect display mode that is selected and executed when the special condition is established in the special symbol lottery process or when the second short-open big win is won. Therefore, after the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 based on the establishment of the specific condition or the winning of the second short opening jackpot, the gaming state shifts to the “time limit mode” described above as shown in FIG. 73 (C).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), when the character's costume is converted into a dress (red) by the effects shown in FIG. 72 (D) and FIG. It corresponds to “per special variation”. The “2R jackpot / special variation hit” is an effect display mode that is selected and executed when the first short opening jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process. Therefore, after the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 based on the first short open jackpot, the gaming state shifts to the above-described “promotion mode” as shown in FIG. 73 (E).

  In this way, in the “specific condition establishment / short hit special effect” when the extended extension is not activated according to the present embodiment, an effect display in a special mode different from the above-described normal variation, reach effect, and the like is performed. Then, the player can grasp that the specific condition is established or wins the short opening jackpot without depending on the stop symbol of the decorative design 1153, while the specific condition is fulfilled or the second short opening jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the “time limit mode” by not knowing which one has been won.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, “15R big hit / special change re-variation per” of the variation number 55 is provided as “special effect” different from other variation patterns other than “specific condition establishment / short hit special effect”. Yes. This "15R jackpot / special change per change" is a variation pattern that is determined to be won for the first long open jackpot, and has significance as a premier performance with a very low appearance rate.

  In the effect display mode based on “15R jackpot / special change re-variation” of the variation number 55, the same effect (see FIG. 50) as the “specific condition establishment / special variation re-variation” of the variation number 53 is performed. In the effect display device 115, “off” is once derived by the decorative symbol 1153. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), after the re-variation by the decorative design 1153, the character costume was converted into a space suit by the effects shown in FIGS. 72 (D) and 73 (A). At that time, after the “big hit” is derived by the specific symbol, an effect screen for deriving the winning for the “big hit” is displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (G).

  Thus, the variation number 55 “15R jackpot / special variation per variation” has the following significance as well as a mere premier effect. In other words, the variation modes of hits having the greatest value for the player (first long open big hit) and deviations (specific condition establishment) are very similar or identical to each other, so that they are once out ( The player can be given great surprise and joy by deriving that the first long open jackpot has been won by re-variation while discouraging the player that the specific condition was satisfied.

[Low-expectation fluctuation and double fluctuation effect when opening extension function is activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the external advantageous gaming state is being executed, it is an effect display mode for deriving a disengagement as a lottery result without accompanying a high expectation effect. An explanation will be given of “off-change” and “twice-change effect” which is an effect display mode in which the “open extension extended / low expected off-change” is executed twice in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an effect display mode when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means is derived to the effect display device in the external advantageous gaming state. That is, FIG. 74 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 74 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 during change, and FIG. 74 (C) is a variable number. FIG. 74 (D) is a diagram showing a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 1153 based on “opening extended / normal fluctuation” and “opening extension / shortening fluctuation” of 56 and 57, while the decorative pattern 1153 is changing ( FIG. 74 (E) is a diagram showing a second mode), FIG. 74 (E) is a diagram showing a stop mode based on “during extended extension / twice out of fluctuation” of the decorative design 1153, and FIG. 74 (F) shows a special light emission effect. Figure.

  As described above, in the external advantageous game state (when the extended extension function is activated), the effect display device 115 displays the silhouette of the character on the dark background image and configures the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153a to 1153c). Each symbol to be displayed is attached to a card-like display on which a character is drawn, and changes so that the front and back of the character appear alternately (however, scrolling changes in the pull-back mode). Thus, by adopting a display mode in which the decorative symbol 1153 and the background image are greatly different from the external normal game state (when the open extension function is not activated), the player can play the external advantageous game state (when the open extension function is activated). It is possible to clearly grasp that and to give a sense of superiority.

  First, as shown in FIG. 74A, the decorative design 1153 is stopped and displayed before the start of the change. Further, for example, in the hold display area 1150, the hold storage display portions 1151a to 1151d and 1152a to 1152b are in the second display mode or the third display mode, and the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (first It is shown that the total of the number of lots to be held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 913) is six. In the following, according to the holding order by each special symbol lottery means 900, 910, the symbol variation based on the lottery suspension by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (variation display of the first special symbol) and the second special symbol lottery means 910 Symbol variation based on the lottery suspension (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), when the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is started in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), in each symbol row 1153a to 1153c. The variable display effect is performed in such a manner that each symbol is switched on the spot. Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the stop symbols in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are different symbols that are not related at all and stop at substantially the same timing, and “displacement” occurs. The derived effect display mode is “during extended opening / low expected fluctuation”. The “open extension / low expected deviation fluctuation” corresponds to the fluctuation number 56 “open extension extension / normal fluctuation” or the fluctuation number 57 “open extension extension / shortening fluctuation”. In the same way as described above, the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 are also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation, and the lottery result of each special symbol is derived.

  As described above, in this embodiment, if the special symbol lottery process is not performed when the opening extension function is activated, whether or not to execute the effect display mode with the reach effect is selected (high expectation effect lottery). . Next, when the lottery is not won in the high expectation effect lottery, “open extension extended / low expectation fluctuation” is selected and executed according to the number of pending lotteries.

  More specifically, in the case of performing “open extension extended / low expected deviation fluctuation” for the first special symbol, the number of lottery holds by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (count value by the first special symbol hold counter 903) However, if it is 0 or 1 based on the post-pending digestion, the variable number 56 “During open extension / normal fluctuation” is selected and executed. “Opening extended / shortening fluctuation” is selected and executed. The same applies to the case of performing “low-expected fluctuation when the opening extension function is activated” for the second special symbol based on the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 913). The variation pattern is selected and executed. Note that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to be shorter than that of the fluctuation number 56 “opening extension / shortening fluctuation” than the fluctuation number 56 “opening extension / normal fluctuation”. In addition, the variation number 56 “opening extension / normal variation” and the variation number 57 “opening extension / shortening variation” are both places where each symbol row 1153a to 1153c stops after the decorative symbol 1153 changes. In the variation number 56 of “open extension extended / normal variation”, the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b stop in this order, while the variation number 57 “open extension extended / shortening variation” 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b are different in that they stop almost simultaneously.

  As in the case of the external normal gaming state, the number of lottery holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is decremented by 1 due to the start of the change of the special symbol. Each display mode is shift-displayed on each previous storage storage display unit 1151a to 1151d, 1152a. Further, the display mode of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is set to the first display mode or non-display. Thereby, in the hold display area 1150, one lottery hold by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or one lottery hold by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is digested, and the total number of these holds is five. Is shown.

On the other hand, after the variation display of the decoration symbol 1153 based on the variation number 57 “during open extension / shortening variation” is performed (see FIG. 74B), the symbol columns 1153a to 1153c are stopped and displayed with different symbols. Although “displacement” is derived (see FIG. 74 (C)), the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped (interval) in which the symbol variation in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 is continuously performed. (Such as “Opening extended, twice off”). In this case, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the decoration pattern 1153 is changed based on the “opening extension / shortening fluctuation” of the fluctuation number 57 again from the state where the decoration symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped. At this time, the number of lottery holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is maintained without being subtracted. In the present embodiment, the temporary stop (interval) of the decorative symbol 1153 is executed for 1000 msec.

  Then, after the decoration pattern 1153 of the second time shown in FIG. 74 (D) is changed, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c stops at a different symbol that is completely unrelated. The fluctuation corresponds to the fluctuation number 58 “During opening extension / off twice fluctuation”. On the other hand, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated, when the variation pattern of the variation numbers 59 to 96 is selected and executed, the “special light emission effect” shown in FIG. Is executed. This “special light emission effect” is an effect for deriving the occurrence of reach when the open extension function is activated, and in the effect display device 115, an image effect in which a plurality of lights extend radially from the center of the screen toward the outer edge. At the same time, various illuminations provided in the game effect unit 4 are controlled to emit light in conjunction with the image effect.

  Note that the variation number 58 “extended extension / twenty variation out” is a variation pattern that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play in the external advantageous gaming state and the lottery of the high expectation effect lottery is won. It is. In other words, in the external advantageous game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out and the high-expected production lottery is won, the variation number 58 “Extended opening extended / Fluctuated twice” is selected. If it is done, reach will not be established and “displacement” will be derived.

  By the way, in the external normal game state in which the opening extension function does not operate, the probability that a continuous effect is performed when the jackpot is not won is set to be very low, as described above, 40/10500 to 40/15000. . On the other hand, in the external advantageous gaming state, the probability that a continuous effect (two-time fluctuation deviation) is performed when the jackpot is not won is set relatively high as 752/14000 as described above. In this way, by providing “twice out of fluctuation”, the continuous fluctuation of “out” is frequently performed in the external advantageous gaming state, and it seems that the fluctuation is performed without interruption of the lottery hold. it can. In particular, as shown in FIG. 59, the variation time when the result of the special symbol lottery in the external advantageous gaming state is out of range is longer than the variation time when the result of the special symbol lottery in the external normal gaming state is out of range. Short (assuming the number of holds is the same). Therefore, by increasing the frequency at which the continuous performance is performed in the external advantageous gaming state, compared to the frequency at which the continuous performance is performed in the external normal gaming state, it is possible to prevent the suspension from being interrupted and the variable display from being interrupted. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the advantageous gaming state.

  By the way, in the external advantageous gaming state, every time a high-expected production lottery is won even though the special symbol lottery result is out, an effect display mode based on a variation pattern with a long variation time, such as establishment of reach, was performed. In such a case, the time required for the next lottery process after the lottery process is performed cannot be shortened, and the player can fully enjoy the merit (such as high lottery efficiency) in the external advantageous gaming state. It becomes impossible to feel (enjoy). In this regard, the possibility that the decorative display 1153 may be a continuous effect as if the variable display effect of the decorative symbol 1153 is performed a plurality of times during the period from when the special symbol is variably displayed to when it is stopped is displayed. If so, it is possible to suggest that the player has a high expectation for the jackpot, even though it is a short time. In this way, if the direct performance is performed in such a way as to positively suggest the player with a high expectation degree to the jackpot, many lotteries will be made before the jackpot is won in the external advantageous game state. Even if processing must be performed, the interest of the game can be suitably maintained while maintaining the lottery efficiency. In other words, even if the high-expectation effect lottery is won, it is possible to make it appear that the shortening variation is being performed smoothly and quickly by making it possible to frequently select “twice out of fluctuation”.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (B) and FIG. 74 (D), a character imitating a UFO is approached from the back side of the screen on the effect display device 115 while the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in a variable manner. It may be displayed in an enlarged manner (UFO effect). In FIG. 74B (first pseudo variation), it is suggested that the UFO effect has a high expectation that the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 will be performed again without stopping the variation display of the special symbol. (That is, the degree of expectation that the “twice fluctuation effect” is performed increases). It should be noted that this UFO effect may be performed even though the above-described continuous effect is not performed (so-called “gase effect”). In FIG. 74D (second pseudo variation), when this UFO effect is performed, the degree of expectation that the “special light emission effect” will be executed after that is high (that is, reach occurs). Expectation increases). In other words, in the external advantageous gaming state of the present embodiment (when the extended extension function is activated), it is necessary that the “special light emission effect” is always performed via the “twice fluctuation effect” (and the jackpot is further increased). Derived condition). Therefore, when UFO effects are continuously generated, the degree of expectation that a jackpot is derived is increased, and the excitement of the player can be suppressed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the above-described continuous effect may be performed without going through the UFO effect. That is, when continuous display is performed in such a manner, it can be difficult to detect that the “twice variation effect” is being performed as viewed from the player, and based on the “twice variation effect”. It becomes possible to make the pseudo two-time fluctuation appear to be different independent fluctuations (that is, fluctuations based on different lottery suspensions), so that the lottery efficiency can be improved. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect display mode with the reach effect is not selected by the lottery in the external advantageous game state (when the extension extension function is activated), “Open extension underway / low expected disappointment” As the “variation”, variation number 56 of “opening extension / normal variation” or variation number 57 of “opening extension / shortening variation” is executed according to the number of reserved special symbols. In view of the fact that the lottery hold tends to increase in the external advantageous game state, if the number of held balls for each special symbol is large, a variation pattern with a very short variation time will be selected. This can suppress the decrease in interest.

  On the other hand, if the suspension of the special symbol is promoted in the external advantageous gaming state, the suspension of each special symbol is completely digested, resulting in a period in which the decorative symbol 1153 is not displayed in a variable manner, leading to a decrease in interest. There is a fear. Therefore, by increasing the rate at which “Extended Opening / Twice Fluctuation” is selected and executed, it is possible to make the decorative symbol 1153 easily changeable regardless of the number of lottery reservations. The decrease can be suppressed.

  When the variation patterns with the variation numbers 59 to 96 are selected and executed, after the “special lighting effect”, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c stop at the same symbol and only the middle symbol row 1153b changes. At the same time, the symbol variation is continuously executed in each of the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Then, as described below, reach effects based on various variation patterns are executed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the external advantageous gaming state is being executed, it is an effect display mode in which “open extension extended / low expected deviation fluctuation” is executed in a pseudo manner twice. The description will be given with reference to FIG. 75 regarding “during open extension / twice out of fluctuation” (variation number 58). FIG. 75 is a timing chart showing the control mode when the effect control related to the above-mentioned “during opening extension / off twice fluctuation” is performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b), at the timing t1, the number of lottery processes in which the hold is released and put on hold is, for example, “4” to “3”. If it becomes, in the special symbol indicators 84 and 86, the variable display about a special symbol is started. The variation display of the special symbol is continuously performed until the timing t4 when 5000 ms elapses after the variation display is started. At this timing t4, the special symbol variation display is stopped so that it can be recognized that it is out of place.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 115, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the variable display effect for a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 starts at the timing t1. However, at the timing t2 when 2000 ms has elapsed since the start of the variable display effect, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 subjected to the variable display effect are temporarily stopped (although the variable symbol effect display is continued). (Display mode that makes it appear as if it has completely stopped) (simulated first variation display effect). Further, at the timing t3 when the temporary stop state (interval) is maintained for “1000 ms”, the variable display effect of the plurality of temporarily stopped decorative symbols 1153 is resumed even though the hold is not released. (2nd variation display effect). Then, at a timing t4 when 2000 ms has elapsed since the restart of the variable display effect, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are stopped (completely stopped) in such a manner that it is suggested to the player that they are out of place ( Second variation display effect simulated). As described above, both the simulated first and second variation display effects are performed for the same time as the time (2000 ms) required for the “opening extension / shortening variation” (variation number 57). .

  As described above, in the case of “open extension extended / off twice fluctuation” (variation number 58), the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 display the special symbol during the period from when the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. However, the effect control is performed so that the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to the variable display effect in the shortened variable display mode twice. Therefore, for example, when the player is made aware that such a continuous effect is being performed by a notice effect such as the UFO effect, the “opening extension / normal” It is possible to indicate to the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than “During extended opening / normal fluctuation”, while the time (5000 ms) is shorter than the time required for “variation” (7000 ms). Become. And when a highly anticipated performance is performed in an external advantageous game state, this “extended extension, twice fluctuation deviation” (variation number 58) should be actively adopted with a probability (752/1000) exceeding 50%. Therefore, it is possible to greatly reduce the time required for the next lottery process to be performed after the lottery process is performed while performing highly anticipated performances at a high frequency. The above-described lottery efficiency in the gaming state can be appropriately improved. In other words, by proactively adopting such “during open extension / deviating twice fluctuation” (variation number 58), high-expected performances are played at the same frequency in the external advantageous game state and the external normal game state. Even if a lot of lottery processes have to be performed before the jackpot is won in the external advantageous gaming state, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game suitably.

  In addition, the first (and second) variable display effect that is simulated is the time (2000 ms) required for “opening extended / shortening fluctuation” (variation number 57) that is actually performed when the number of holds is large. It was done over the same amount of time. For this reason, for example, when the player does not appeal to the player that such a continuous effect is being performed, such as when the UFO effect is not performed, the player may perform the lottery process in the hold state. Even when the number of processes (the number of holdings) is small, the illusion is that a variable display effect is being executed in a situation where the number of holdings is large. In other words, even if there is a situation in which a game ball is not easily entered into the start opening 600, 602, 604 in spite of being in an external advantageous game state, such a continuous production is performed. The player feels as if the game balls are successively inserted into the start ports 600, 602, and 604, and a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

[Reach production when the open extension function is activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a music reach effect that is an effect display mode with reach when the external advantageous game state is executed will be described. This music reach effect is a mode in which a win or miss is derived as a lottery result after performing a reach effect using a part or all of a predetermined music.

  After the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” (see FIG. 74F) is made, the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 6 is performed is “ Equivalent to “Extended Opening / A Music Reach / Long”, and the effect display mode in which the same reach effect as the change number 7 is performed corresponds to “Open Extension Extended / A Song Reach / Long”, The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to that of the variable number 8 is performed corresponds to the variable number 63 “opening extension / A music reach / extra-long out”, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 9 is performed. Corresponds to the variable number 64 “Opening extended, A music reach, per super long”.

  In addition, a reach production similar to “Opening extension / A music reach / long” is performed, and after “decreased” is derived in a manner in which the symbol is shifted by one frame by the decorative symbol 1153, the frame is shifted by one frame. The effect display mode in which the symbol is reverse-scrolled by one frame and “big hit” (so-called “return return”) is derived corresponds to the variation number 61 “opening extension / A music reach / long return”. In addition, the same reach production as “Opening extension / A music reach / long” is performed, and after “decreased” is once derived by the decorative symbol 1153, the decorative symbol 1153 is re-varied, “(So-called per change)” is represented by a change number 62 “Opening extension / A music reach / long change”. In addition, a reach production similar to “Opening extension / A music reach / Super-long” is performed, and an effect display mode in which “Big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation is the variation number 65 “Opening extension”・ Equivalent to “A song reach / per-long change”.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative pattern 1153, and the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the E music, and from the speakers 144 and 341, E The first half of the music may be output as audio. The effect display mode in which “off” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the E music is executed corresponds to “open extension extended, E music reach, short out” of the variation number 66. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the E music is executed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variation number 67 “Opening extension / E music reach / short hits” Is equivalent to. Furthermore, after the singing effect using the first half of the E music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is resumed, and the effect display device 115 performs the singing effect of the character. Is continuously executed, and audio may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 so that the second half of the E music is continuous from the first half. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the E music is executed corresponds to “open extension extended / E music reach / developed out” of the variation number 68. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of this E music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 69 “Opening extended, E music reach, per development” Is equivalent to.

  Here, in the reach effect in which the singing effect using the E music is executed, unlike the reach effect in which the singing effect using the other music is executed, the symbols constituting the decorative pattern 1153 are “3” and It is limited to a specific symbol of “5”. That is, the “big hit” derived after the reach effect is executed is limited to the first long open big hit. In other words, when the “big hit” is derived by the reach effect in which the singing effect using the E music is executed, the first long open jackpot that is most advantageous to the player is determined, and therefore the reach effect is executed. And the player's expectations are greatly increased, and the interest is improved.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153, and the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the F music, and the speakers 144, 341 The first half of the music may be output as audio. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the F music is executed corresponds to “open extension extended, F music reach, normal out” of the variation number 70. On the other hand, after the singing production using the first half of the F music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 71 “Opening extension / F music reach / normal winning” Is equivalent to. In addition, while the reach production similar to “Opening extension / F music reach / normal” is performed, the effect display mode in which “Big jackpot” is derived in the form of re-variation is the variation number 72 “Opening extension / It corresponds to "per F music reach normal re-variation".

  Further, after the singing effect using the first half of the F music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is resumed, and the effect display device 115 performs the singing effect of the character. Is continuously executed, and audio may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 so that the second half of the F music is continuous from the first half. After the singing production using the latter half of this F-music is performed, the production display mode from which “out” is derived is “various open 76, F music reach, development outage 2 (double only)” Also, the variable number 78 corresponds to “Opening extension, F music reach, development failure 3”. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of this F-music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 73 “Opening extension, F-music reach, per development” It corresponds to “1”, variable number 75 “2 during extension extension / F music reach / development (only for triple)” and variable number 77 “3 during extension extension / F music reach / development”. In addition, while the reach production similar to “Opening extension / F music reach / development” is performed, the effect display mode in which “Big hit” is derived in the form of return is the variation number 74 “Opening extension / F Equivalent to 1 ”per song reach / return.

  Here, in the reach effect in which the singing effect using the F music is executed, unlike the reach effect in which the singing effect using another music is executed, the reach arrangement (line) by the decorative design 1153 is 2 May be line (double) or 3 lines (triple). Thus, by arranging a plurality of reach arrangements (lines) based on the decorative symbols 1153, it is possible to give the player an impression that “big hit” is easily derived. In other words, in the reach production in which the singing production using the F music is executed, the player's expectation for the “big hit” is greatly increased, compared to the reach production in which the singing production using the other music is executed. Will improve.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative pattern 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 49 is performed is “Open extension extended / D music” The effect display mode corresponding to “Reach / Normal Out” and the same reach effect as the variation number 50 corresponds to the variation number 80 “During extension extended / D music reach / long” and the same as the variation number 51 The effect display mode in which the reach effect is performed corresponds to the variable number 82 “Opening extension / D music reach / development failure”, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 52 is performed is “Open” Equivalent to “Extended, D Music Reach, Per Development”. In addition, while the same reach production as “During extension open / D music reach / normal” is performed, the effect display mode in which “big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation is the “open extension extension / This corresponds to “per D music reach / normal re-variation”. In addition, the same reach production as “Opening extension / D music reach / development” is performed, and the effect display mode in which “Big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation is the variation number 84 “Opening extension / D music reach / per-developed change.

  Here, as described above, in the external normal game state (when the opening extension function is not activated), the reach effect in which the singing effect using the D music is executed among the A music to the D music is the most “big hit”. Expectation is high. Therefore, even in the external advantageous gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated), when the reach effect is performed in which the singing effect using the D music is performed, the expectation to “big hit” is high, In the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, the player can give an impression that the D music is a music having a special value. Furthermore, the above-described “elevation mode” is also a game mode in which the D music is used as a motif, so that the D music can further have significance as a special music that improves the player's expectation.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” has been made, the reach is derived by the decorative pattern 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 22 is performed is the variable number 85 “Opening extended / G music” The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to that of the variable number 23 is performed corresponds to the variable number 86 “opening extension / G music reach / per full rotation”.

  Here, there is “medley reach” which performs a singing effect using a plurality of music pieces as a special music reach effect when the open extension function is activated. Hereinafter, “medley reach” will be described.

  First, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” has been made, the effect display device 115 displays an introduction image to “medley reach”, and the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153. Further, in the effect display device 115, after the introduction image to the A song is displayed, the singing effect of the character unique to the A song is displayed, and the introduction or first half of the A song is displayed from the speakers 144 and 341. Sound is output. An effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing production using the introduction part or the first half of this A music piece is executed is “various open 87, medley reach, short hit (A music piece)” ”Or the variable number 88“ Opening extension, medley reach, hit (A song) ”.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the A music is immediately interrupted, and the display is switched from the introduction image to the A music to the introduction image to the B music, and the A music is changed from the speakers 144 and 341. B music may be output as audio. Then, in the effect display device 115, the singing effect of the character unique to the B music is displayed, and the introduction part or the first half of the B music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 as audio. After the singing production using the introduction part or the first half part of the B music is performed, the production display mode in which “winning” is derived is “various opening 89, medley reach, short per (B music) "Or" No. 90 during opening extension, medley reach, hit (B music) ".

  In addition, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the B music is immediately interrupted and switched from the introduction image to the B music to the introduction image to the C music, and the B music is changed from the speakers 144 and 341. C music may be output as audio. Then, in the effect display device 115, the singing effect of the character unique to the C music is displayed, and the introduction part or the first half of the C music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 by voice. The effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing production using the introduction part or the first half part of the C music is executed is the variable number 91 “opening extended / medley reach / short (C music) ”Or the variable number 92“ Opening extension / medley reach / win (C music) ”.

  In addition, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the C music is immediately interrupted and switched from the introduction image to the C music to the introduction image to the D music, and the speakers 144 and 341 are replaced with the C music. D music may be output as audio. Then, in the effect display device 115, the singing effect of the character unique to the D music is displayed, and the introduction part or the first half of the D music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 as audio. The effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing effect using the introduction part or the first half part of the D music is executed is the variable number 93 “During opening extension / medley reach / short (D music) ”Or the variable number 94“ Opening extension / medley reach / win (D music) ”.

  It should be noted that after the above “medley reach” is performed, the effect display mode in which “out” is finally derived corresponds to the variable number 95 “during open extension / medley reach / off”. In addition, after the above-mentioned “medley reach” is performed, the effect display mode in which “big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation corresponds to the change number 96 “during opening extension / medley reach / per change”. .

  Thus, in the external advantageous gaming state, the reach effect is always displayed on the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. Nevertheless, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are performed after the variable display effect is performed twice in the shortened variable display mode. In particular, the time required for the “change during opening / shortening variation” (variation number 57) that is actually performed when the number of holdings is large (first variation display effect before the second reach effect is simulated) (variation number 57) 2000 ms) for the same amount of time. For this reason, for example, when the UFO effect is not performed, and when such a continuous effect is performed without appealing to the player, the player receives 2 on the basis of one hold. It seems that the variable display effects are performed separately. In addition, when a highly variable display effect such as a reach effect is performed, the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in a pseudo manner continuously several times based on one hold, so at the time of the reach effect, The variation time of the decorative pattern 1153 becomes longer, and the occurrence of a state in which there is no lottery hold can be suppressed.

  By the way, in the external advantageous gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated), the opening / closing device 500 opens and closes even if a specific condition is satisfied in the special symbol lottery process or the first short opening big hit or the second short opening big hit is won. The game state after being operated is maintained in the external advantageous game state (when the open extension function is activated). Therefore, even if the specific condition is satisfied or the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot is won, a substantially similar effect display mode is derived without distinguishing the winning type. In other words, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” has been made, an effect screen showing that the specific condition is established in the effect display device 115 or that the first short open big hit or the second short open big win is won. In addition to being displayed, the effect display mode from which “displacement” is derived is the variable number 97 “opening extension / specific condition established / per normal fluctuation” or the fluctuation number 98 “opening extension / 2R big hit / per normal fluctuation” Is equivalent to.

  In addition, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the change number 55 is performed after the above-described “special light emission effect” is performed corresponds to the change number 99 “opening extended, 15R big hit, normal change per change” To do.

[Special lighting effects]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the details of the above-described “special light emission effect” executed as a part of the effect display mode based on a predetermined variation pattern will be described. As described above, the “special light emission effect” is obtained when the effect display mode is executed based on the variation pattern (specifically, the variation patterns 59 to 99) for performing the reach effect when the open extension function is activated. Always executed as part. The “special light emission effect” is executed by the effect control means 962 included in the peripheral control board 810 described above, similarly to the effect display mode based on each variation pattern.

  In this embodiment, in the external advantageous gaming state (when the extended extension function is activated), if this “special lighting effect” is executed during the special symbol variation display, the expectation of “big hit” is always high. It develops into a unique reach production (so-called super reach). That is, since the “special light emission effect” functions as an effect for notifying that the so-called super reach is executed, when the “special light emission effect” is executed, the player's interest in the lottery result is greatly increased.

  Similarly, even in the external normal game state (when the opening extension function is not activated), when the effect display mode based on the variation pattern (specifically, the variation patterns 24 to 52) with the n-times continuous effect is executed, It may be executed as a part of the effect display mode. In this case, when this “special light emission effect” is executed during the special symbol variation display, it is preferable that the degree of expectation to develop into the above-described super reach increases. As a result, when the “special lighting effect” is executed, the fun of the game is enhanced, but even if the “special lighting effect” is executed, the “big hit” is derived so that it may not be developed into a super reach. There is no random reach production.

  In the following, the “special light emission effect” executed using substantially the entire front surface of the game effect unit 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be concretely centered on the relationship with the structure of the pachinko machine 1 (particularly, the game effect unit 4). Explained. 76 and 77 are front views of the game effect unit when the “special light emission effect” is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 76 and FIG. 77, an effect display device 115 that executes a “special light emission effect” and a plurality of illumination devices (that is, LED boards 535) are located at a position that can be viewed from the front side of the game effect unit 4. The game panel 409 is arranged behind the game panel 409. In detail, the effect display device 115 is provided so as to be displayed at the center in a size that occupies almost the entire game area 20 when viewed from the player (that is, in front view). In addition to the plurality of LED substrates 535a to 535j, other electrical decoration devices, decorative accessories, and the like are disposed on the outer peripheral side of the effect display device 115.

Here, LED boards 535a, 535k, 535b, 535c, and 535d are arranged at substantially equal intervals along the effect display device 115 from the upper side of the effect display device 115 in the counterclockwise direction. Light-like decorative bodies 520a, 520b, 520c, 520d, and 520e are disposed in this order, and a blade type that covers the LED boards 535a, 535b, 535c, and 535d behind the game panel 409. Feather-shaped decorative bodies 530a, 530b, 530c, and 530d are provided as the decorative bodies 530. On the other hand, a feather-shaped decorative body 632 that covers the LED board 535k is provided on the front side of the game panel 409. . "

  In addition, LED boards 535e, 535f, 535g, 535h, 535i, and 535j are arranged at substantially equal intervals along the effect display device 115 from above the effect display device 115, and the LED substrate (not shown). ) Having light-like decorative bodies 520g and 520f are sequentially arranged. In addition, on the front side of the game panel 409, as the blade-type decorative body 630 that covers the LED substrates 535e, 535f, 535g, 535h, 535i, and 535j, the blade-type decorative bodies 630a, 630b, 630c, 630d, 630e, and 630f Are provided.

  Further, on the front side of the gaming panel 409, a large decorative accessory is placed behind the gaming panel 409 so as to be exposed to the gaming area 20 from between the feather-shaped decorative body 630a and the feather-shaped decorative body 630b. A disk-like accessory 590 is provided. This disk-like accessory 590 also includes various electric decorations 592, 594, 596 having LED substrates (not shown). As described above, the game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment, when viewed from the player (that is, in front view), includes various electric decoration devices and decorative functions so as to surround the periphery of the effect display device 115 occupying the center. A structure in which an object or the like is displayed in the game area 20 is formed, and the following “special light emission effect” is executed using the substantially entire front surface of the game effect unit 4.

  First, in the “special lighting effect”, in the display area of the effect display device 115, while the special symbol variation display (decoration variation of the decorative symbol 1153) is being performed, the display region is in a non-display state (dark state). The display is controlled. At the same time, various illumination devices (that is, the LED board 535) provided in the game effect unit 4 are also controlled to be turned off. As a result, almost the entire front area (that is, the game area 20) of the game effect unit 4 is in a dark state, and the player is strongly impressed by the image as if the game area 20 is in outer space.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, display control of a predetermined optical vortex image 1160 is performed in the darkened display area of the effect display device 115. This optical vortex image 1160 is an effect image in a form in which a plurality of light bands extend radially from the substantially central position of the display area of the effect display device 115 toward the outer edge. More specifically, in the optical vortex image 1160, a plurality of light bands extending from the center of the screen to the outer edge are sequentially displayed so as to appear to rotate counterclockwise. Then, the optical vortex image 1160 in which a plurality of light bands rotate in a spiral shape gives the player an impression as if warping the outer space imitated by the game area 20.

  Here, when the optical vortex image 1160 is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 115, at least the LED substrate 535 that can be visually recognized in front view of the game effect unit 4 in conjunction with the optical vortex image 1160. Lighting control is performed on the LED board 535 that is substantially positioned in the direction in which the plurality of light bands in the optical vortex image 1160 extend. In the optical vortex image 1160 of this embodiment, a band of light that does not correspond to any of the plurality of LED substrates 535 is also displayed.

  Specifically, in the state where the optical vortex image 1160 shown in FIG. 76 is displayed, the extension direction of the light band corresponding to a plurality of light bands extending to the outer edge of the display area of the effect display device 115. The LED boards 535a, 535d, 535f, 535j, and 535k located in the are controlled to be turned on. And the lighting aspect of each of these LED boards 535 becomes visible via the blade-type decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 which are electric decoration covers that respectively cover the LED boards 535. That is, here, the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530 a, 530 d, 630 b, 630 f, and 632 become light emission modes by the lighting control of the LED substrates 535.

  In the state in which the optical vortex image 1160 shown in FIG. 77 is displayed following FIG. 76, in the same manner as described above, corresponding to the plurality of light bands extending to the outer edge of the display area of the effect display device 115, The LED substrates 535b, 535c, 535e, 535g, 535h, and 535i positioned in the extending direction of the light band are controlled to be turned on. Then, the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530b, 530c, 630a, 630c, 630d, and 630e become light emission modes by the lighting control of the LED substrates 535.

  In the present embodiment, a door lens that includes a lens cover 140 and various reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b is formed on the door frame 5 on which the gaming window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and can visually recognize the gaming area 20 is formed. A unit 120 is provided around the gaming window 101. When executing the “special light emission effect”, the illumination control in the door lens unit 120 is executed in conjunction with the effect display device 115 and the plurality of LED substrates 535. For example, the light emission / extinction control of the door lens unit 120 is performed at the timing synchronized with the light vortex image 1160 of the effect display device 115 or the blinking mode of the LED substrate 535.

  As described above, the “special light emission effect” is obtained by continuously expressing the plurality of light bands expressed in the optical vortex image 1160 beyond the display area of the effect display device 115 by the plurality of LED substrates 535. In addition, the entire front of the game effect unit 4 is assumed to be an integrated effect area, and one continuous effect is realized in the effect area. In other words, in the “special light emission effect”, the LED board 535 corresponding to a plurality of light bands in the light vortex image 1160 is controlled to be lighted, so that the light band is viewed from the player's perspective (that is, in front view). Since the lighting state of the LED board 535 provides a continuous and integrated effect display, it is grasped in appearance that the integrated effect display is executed beyond the display area of the effect display device 115. In this way, the “special light emission effect” is performed over substantially the entire front surface of the game effect unit 4 beyond the display area of the effect display device 115, and expresses a planar spread of the effect that could not be realized in the past. Can give a strong impression to the player's vision and suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a main game effect is performed with a liquid crystal display provided in the approximate center of the game area. Even if a plurality of illumination lamps are provided in the game area, these illumination lamps only provide auxiliary illumination effects, and are directly related to the display effects on the liquid crystal display. In general, it was carried out in a non-sexual manner. On the other hand, in the “special light emission effect” in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 115 and the plurality of LED substrates 535 are interlocked to simulate the entire entire front of the game effect unit 4 into an integrated effect region. The production is performed. Therefore, the “special light emission effect” is performed almost over the entire front of the game effect unit 4, which can express a two-dimensional spread of the effect that could not be realized in the past, and has a strong impression on the player's vision Can suppress the decline of interest.

  In particular, in the “special lighting effect”, the display area of the effect display device 115 is darkened to display the light vortex image 1160 and the plurality of LED substrates 535 are controlled to be lighted, so that the player warps the outer space. You will have the illusion of being. Furthermore, if the effect images such as the background and the character displayed on the effect display device 115 are different from each other before and after the execution of the “special light emission effect”, the warp is given to the player. You can give the impression of moving to a different place. In this way, by changing the display mode triggered by the “special lighting effect”, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation and achievement rather than simply switching the display mode as in conventional gaming machines. Can do.

  When executing the “special light emission effect”, it is preferable that the LED board (not shown) covered with the light-like decorative bodies 520a to 520g is also subjected to the electric decoration control different from that during the normal special symbol variation. For example, during normal special symbol changes, the red lens body and the blue lens body of each of the light-like decorative bodies 520a to 520g are alternately blinked at a predetermined interval. The red lens body and the blue lens body of each light-like decorative body 520a to 520g are simultaneously blinked at an extremely short interval, or each light-like decorative body 520a to 520g is bent in response to the rotation of the light band in the optical vortex image 1160 For example, light is emitted sequentially in the clockwise direction. As described above, when the “special light emission effect” is executed, the light-emitting modes of the respective light-like decorative bodies 520a to 520g are also changed, so that the player can have a stronger impact and improve the interest.

  By the way, as described above, when the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process (S150) includes the “special light emission effect”, it is executed as a part of the effect display mode based on the variation pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to transmit a command for instructing the “special light emission effect” each time to execute the “special light emission effect” from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810, thereby reducing the processing burden.

Further, if the command for executing the “special lighting effect” is a dedicated command different from the command corresponding to the various variation patterns, the effect display mode based on the variation pattern is being executed (specifically, the decorative pattern 1153 When the “special lighting effect” is executed during the fluctuation), a command for executing the “special lighting effect” needs to be transmitted separately at a predetermined timing separately from the command based on the fluctuation pattern. It becomes complicated. On that point, if “special light emission effect” is executed as part of the effect display mode based on the variation pattern, both various effect display modes and “special light emission effect” can be executed only with commands based on the variation pattern. In addition, it is easy to execute the “special light emission effect” during execution of the effect display mode, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern is accompanied by “special lighting effect”, after the variation display of the decoration pattern 1153 is interrupted and the “special lighting effect” is executed, the decoration pattern 1153 is displayed. The lottery result is derived by the stop display. That is, since the “special light emission effect” is executed before the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed, it is possible to surprise the player with “Ah!” And attract interest. In particular, if the super reach is performed after the “special light effect” is executed, the “special light effect” is a notice to the super reach, and the player's interest is further attracted. ”Is executed, and the development of the production can be watched.

  Furthermore, the variation display of the decorative pattern 1153 before the “special lighting effect” is executed and the variation display of the decoration symbol 1153 after the “special lighting effect” is executed are compared and displayed on the effect display device 115. If the effect images such as the background and characters to be displayed are different, the player can feel as if he / she has moved to a different place after warping, and the development of super reach is expected. Can be further improved.

  Next, the physical structure of various effect devices (effect display device 115, LED board 535, etc.) used for the “special light emission effect” in the game effect unit 4 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 32 to FIG. 35, the game effect unit 4 has almost the entire area (preferably about 2/3 to 3/4 of the game area 20) with respect to the game area 20 at the substantially front center. An effect display device 115 having such a size as to occupy is provided, and a plurality of LED substrates 535 are provided along the outer edge of the effect display device 115 on the front surface thereof. The effect display device 115 and the LED board 535 are both arranged behind the game panel 409 so that a predetermined effect can be executed.

  That is, when viewed from the player (ie, front view), the visible range (display area) of the effect display device 115 that is visible in the game area 20 via the game panel 409 is at least 2 / with respect to the game area 20. 3 or more. Further, a plurality of LED boards 535 are provided adjacent to the effect display device 115 and on the outer peripheral side when viewed from the effect display device 115, and when viewed from the player (that is, when viewed from the front), each LED substrate 535 is a game panel. Through 409, the game area 20 is displayed so as not to overlap with the effect display device 115.

  With such a structure, various parts to be placed in the game area 20 including the center role 620, a plurality of obstacle nails, a windmill, the receiving ports 600, 602, 604, the out port 471, the opening and closing device 500, etc. The arrangement member) can be appropriately arranged in the game area 20 by providing the effect display device 115 and the LED board 535 on the rear side of the game panel 409. That is, these front arrangement members are not limited to various members (the effect display device 115 and the LED board 535) arranged on the back side of the game panel 409, and any position, shape, size, etc. in the game area 20 Can be arranged. Then, regardless of the arrangement mode of the front arrangement member in the game area 20, the “special light emission effect” using the substantially entire front of the game effect unit 4 can be executed. That is, it has a structure that does not affect the “special light emission effect” executed on the back side of the game panel 409 no matter what position, shape, size, etc., the front arrangement member is arranged in the game area 20.

  By the way, there has been conventionally known a gaming machine in which a game effect unit is provided with a liquid crystal display and an electric lamp, and an effect in which these are linked is performed. However, in such a gaming machine, the game area is inevitably narrowed as it is provided with a large liquid crystal display and a large number of illumination lamps. And while providing other parts (equivalent to a front arrangement member), such as an obstruction nail and a windmill, in a game field is restricted, a field where a game ball can flow down is limited. As a result, free design of the game production unit (game area) is hindered, and there is a problem that a gaming machine with high designability and high gameability cannot be realized. On the other hand, when the liquid crystal display is made smaller or the number of installation points of the illumination lamp is reduced, not only the display effect in the liquid crystal display and the illumination effect in the illumination lamp, , The visual impression given to the player was weak, and there was a problem that interest was lowered.

  In this pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 115 for executing the “special light emission effect” and the LED board 535 are arranged behind the game panel 409, so it is necessary to provide these effect devices directly in the game area 20. There is no. Therefore, even if the effect display device 115 is enlarged or many LED boards 535 are installed, the game area 20 on the front side of the game panel 409 is not narrowed. And it can restrict | limit the area | region where a game ball can flow down, without providing other parts, such as an obstruction nail and a windmill, in the game area 20. As a result, it is possible to secure a free design of the game effect unit 4 (game area 20), to realize a gaming machine excellent in design and game characteristics, and to use the substantially entire front of the game effect unit 4. The player's interest can be further improved by the “special lighting effect”.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a large effect item (for example, a movable liquid crystal display or a doll imitating a character) is provided in a game effect unit, and various effects are performed using this accessory. Are known. However, in such a gaming machine, the game area becomes narrower as the size of an accessory increases, and not only a liquid crystal display and an electric lamp but also other parts such as obstacle nails and a windmill are arranged in the game area. Then, the size, position, quantity, etc. of each will be limited. On the other hand, there is a problem that the impact of the accessory on the player becomes weaker as the accessory becomes smaller.

  Here, the pachinko machine 1 also includes a disk-like accessory 590 in which the game effect unit 4 is a large accessory. However, in the game effect unit 4, the effect display device 115 for executing the “special light emission effect” and the LED board 535 are arranged behind the game panel 409, while other parts such as obstacle nails and windmills are arranged on the game panel 409. Since they are arranged on the front side, various parts to be arranged on the surface of the game panel 409 are distributed before and after the game panel 409. Therefore, even if the disk-shaped accessory 590 is made as large as possible, the “special light emission effect” can be executed without narrowing the game area 20. As described above, a free design of the game presentation unit 4 (game area 20) can be secured, and a gaming machine excellent in design and game performance can be realized, and the game presentation unit 4 can be substantially in front. The player's interest can be further improved by the “special light emission effect” using the whole. In particular, since the disk-shaped accessory 590 is disposed so as to be substantially flush with the effect display device 115 and the LED substrate 535 behind the game panel 409, the disk-shaped accessory 590 is provided with the effect display device 115 and the LED substrate. Without covering 535, even if the disk-like accessory 590 is large, the “special light emission effect” can be made visible to the player.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 115 is arranged behind the game effect unit 4, so the depth of the “special light emission effect” is emphasized by the display effect on the effect display device 115. At the same time, since a plurality of LED boards 535 are distributed around the effect display device 115 in the front view of the game effect unit 4, the “special light emission effect” is spread in a plane by the electric effect effects on each LED board 535. To be emphasized. The term “planar spread” as used herein refers to extending in a direction that easily enters the player's field of view, and more specifically, extending from the front to the outside as viewed from the player.

  Then, by emphasizing the depth of the “special light emission effect”, the player can clearly grasp that the “special light emission effect” is being executed at a separated position. Further, by emphasizing the planar spread of the “special light emission effect”, the player can clearly grasp that the “special light emission effect” is executed over a wider range. More specifically, while the effect display device 115 provided in the approximate center of the game effect unit 4 in the front view is separated from the player, the plurality of LED boards 535 provided around the effect display device 115 are more game than the effect display device 115. The LED boards 535 are arranged over substantially the entire front view of the game effect unit 4.

  Under such a configuration, the “special light emission effect” is executed in such a manner as to wrap around the approximate center of the game area 20 as a whole, and the player who watches the game area 20 also performs this “special light emission effect”. You will feel like you are wrapped up. In conventional gaming machines, only two-dimensional effects are performed, but in the “special light emission effects”, three-dimensional effects are realized by emphasizing the depth and spread of the effects. Then, the player can experience an unprecedented three-dimensional effect, and the interest is more attracted to the game and the interest is improved.

  Furthermore, when executing the “special light emission effect”, not only effect control in the game effect unit 4 (display control in the effect display device 115 and lighting control in the plurality of LED boards 535) but also light emission control in the door frame 5 are linked. And executed. Thereby, the two-dimensional spread of the “special light emission effect” is expressed in the door frame 5 beyond the game effect unit 4. More specifically, the door lens unit 120 provided around the gaming window 101 is closer to the player than the plurality of LED boards 535, and the door lens unit 120 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the gaming panel 409. It is installed.

  Under such a configuration, if the door lens unit 120 is controlled to emit light when the “special light effect” is executed, the “special light effect” is expressed in the door frame 5 beyond the game effect unit 4. The two-dimensional spread of the “special light emission effect” will be further emphasized. Furthermore, the door lens unit 120 is disposed at a position close to the player, and the effect display device 115 is greatly separated from the player, so that the depth of the “special light emission effect” is further increased. It will be emphasized. As a result, the depth and spread of the “special light emission effect” can be further emphasized, and the player can be strongly experienced in the three-dimensional effect.

By the way, as described above, to cover the plurality of LED boards 535 disposed behind the game panel 409 in front view, the lighting / flashing mode is visibly covered. 520, a feather-shaped decorative body 530, and a blade-shaped decorative body 630, 632). Specifically, the light-shaped decorative body 520 and the feather-shaped decorative body 530 (rear electric decoration cover) cover each LED board 535 on the rear side of the game panel 409, while the feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 are provided.
The (front illumination cover) covers each LED board 535 on the front side of the game panel 409.

  Here, the LED board 535 covered with each electric decoration cover cannot be visually recognized by the player (that is, in front view), and only the lighting / flashing mode of the LED board 535 can be visually recognized. Therefore, for the player, it is understood that the LED board 535 is built in each electric decoration cover. In particular, the LED board 535 covered with the feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 is actually disposed on the rear side of the game panel 409, although the LED board 535 is actually disposed on the front side of the game panel 409. It will be grasped as if they were built in the bodies 630 and 632.

  With such a configuration, the player recognizes that the LED board 535 covered with the light decorative body 520 and the feather-shaped decorative body 530 is disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 409, while the blade The LED board 535 covered with the mold decorations 630 and 632 has an illusion that it is disposed on the front side of the game panel 409. In this manner, it is grasped that the plurality of LED boards 535 actually disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 409 are distributed and disposed before and after the gaming panel 409. Therefore, the LED board 535 having an arbitrary shape or size can be arranged (or shown to be arranged) at various positions in the game effect unit 4 (game area 20). It is possible to design a highly effective game production unit 4 (game area 20).

  By the way, if the LED board 535 is provided on the front side of the game panel 409 (that is, the game area 20), it is considered that the wiring structure to the LED board 535 becomes complicated. However, in this pachinko machine 1, even if the LED board 535 is not actually arranged in the game area 20, the feather-shaped decorative body 630, If 632 is provided, it can be seen that the LED board 535 is disposed in the game area 20, so that the structure of the game effect unit 4 can be simplified.

  Note that a slit-shaped window 632a is formed in the vane-shaped decorative body 632 positioned in the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area 20 so that the player can visually recognize the game ball passing behind it. doing. Thereby, the player can prevent the situation where the behavior of the game ball cannot be seen by the wing-shaped decorative body 632, and can play the game safely without losing sight of the game ball. Furthermore, since the lighting / flashing mode of the LED board 535 can be visually recognized when the game ball does not pass behind the feather-shaped decorative body 632, the interest is maintained.

[About decorative designs]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative design 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 will be described in detail. 78A is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in the external normal gaming state, and FIG. 78B is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in the external advantageous gaming state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the embodiment, the opportunity to shift to the external normal gaming state (such as the third long-opening jackpot), and the trigger to shift to the external advantageous gaming state (such as the first long-opening jackpot) In addition, in the external normal gaming state, it functions as a trigger for shifting to the external normal gaming state so that the per-share distribution rate that triggers the transition to the external normal gaming state is the highest per-share distribution rate. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state, it functions as a trigger to shift to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state so that the per-share distribution rate that triggers the transition to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state becomes the highest per-share distribution rate The second long open jackpot is prepared as one of the winning types of jackpot. Therefore, as the decorative symbol 1153 for suggesting the winning type of the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the blue decorative symbols (“4”, “ 8 ”) 1153 and the red decorative symbols (“ 3 ”,“ 7 ”) 1153 indicating that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state, and the external normal game state is controlled when the game is in the external normal game state. On the other hand, when the player is in the external advantageous gaming state, the pink decorative symbols (“1”, “2”, “5”, “ 6)) 1153 can be prepared without any sense of incongruity. That is, by performing a variable display effect using three types of decorative symbols 1153 including such a pink decorative symbol 1153, any of the game states of the external normal game state and the external advantageous game state Even if there is, the above-mentioned effect display indicates that the continuation rate (red decoration pattern and pink decoration pattern) is higher than the rate of entry into the external advantageous gaming state (red decoration pattern only) The player can be recognized through the device 115.

  Moreover, the pink decoration pattern 1153 is different from the decoration pattern (blue decoration pattern, red decoration pattern) 1153 having the value alone as information indicating the gaming state after the jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot It has no value as information indicating That is, such a pink decorative pattern 1153 itself has a value as a mere presentation pattern used for the above-described variable display presentation to suggest whether or not the jackpot has been won. Only when combined with information capable of recognizing the gaming state (external normal gaming state or external advantageous gaming state), it has value as information (information indicating the winning type) indicating the gaming state after the jackpot. Therefore, if the pink decorative pattern 1153 is displayed when the jackpot is won, the player is forced to be aware of the current gaming state if he / she wants to know the jackpot winning type, As a result, the merit in the external advantageous gaming state can be felt with a higher probability. For example, when the pink decoration symbol 1153 is displayed while in the external normal gaming state, it becomes easier to feel “if the current gaming state was the external advantageous gaming state”, and the external advantageous gaming state is entered. When the pink decorative pattern 1153 is displayed at a certain time, it becomes easy to feel that “the current gaming state was good in the external advantageous gaming state”.

  That is, since the blue decorative design 1153 has a value alone as information that suggests that it is not advantageous to the player, the player tends to dislike the blue decorative design 1153 itself. For this reason, if the blue decorative pattern 1153 appears when the jackpot is won, the interest of the game may be lowered even though the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the pink decorative symbol 1153 is information (the winning type) indicating the gaming state after the big hit only when the current gaming state (external normal gaming state or external advantageous gaming state) is combined with information that can be recognized. Therefore, it can be said that the player is prevented from hating the pink decorative pattern 1153 itself. And, as will be described later, such a pink decorative pattern not only when winning the opportunity to enter the external advantageous gaming state is won, but also when winning the opportunity to enter the external normal gaming state is won 1153 is displayed on the effect display device 115. Thus, it is necessary to display the blue decorative design 1153 on the effect display device 115 by the amount that the pink decorative design 1153 is displayed when the win that triggers the transition to the external normal gaming state is won. Disappear. As a result, even if the total number of types of blue decorative symbols 1153 that alone has value as information that suggests that the player is not a winning hit is less than half the total number of types of all decorative symbols 1153, It is preferably avoided that the player feels uncomfortable with such a symbol display mode. In this embodiment, eight decorative patterns 1153, "1" to "8", are prepared, whereas only two of the blue decorative patterns 1153, "2" and "4", are prepared. ing.

  In the external advantageous gaming state, the pink decorative pattern 1153 suggests that the external decorative gaming state is controlled in the external advantageous gaming state, but the second long opening is provided. With the jackpot function, the probability of being assigned to the winning type that triggers the transition to the above-mentioned external normal gaming state is set to be lower than “50%” (probability “1/3” in this embodiment). Therefore, the discomfort caused by the low display probability of the blue decorative pattern 1153 does not occur in the first place. In addition, with the above-described function based on the second long open jackpot, even if the continuation rate in the external advantageous gaming state is set so high, the winning probability of jackpot, the total amount of game balls to be paid out during the jackpot game, etc. The specifications as a gaming machine are not greatly sacrificed.

  By the way, such a pink decorative pattern 1153 is a decorative pattern that appears not only when controlled in the external normal gaming state but also when controlled in the external advantageous gaming state. By simply displaying 1153 on the effect display device 115, it is difficult to appropriately suggest the gaming state after the jackpot game is played to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the external advantageous gaming state, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), by adding predetermined decorative images 1153a to the above-mentioned three types of decorative symbols 1153, their display modes are changed. It was made to differ with respect to the said external normal game state. Thus, the player can recognize whether the game state is the external normal game state or the external advantageous game state only by looking at the decorative symbol 1153. As described above, since the decoration image 1153a capable of recognizing the current gaming state is added to the pink decoration pattern 1153, the pink decoration pattern 1153 is displayed on the effect display device 115. The game state after the jackpot game is performed on the player, although it is a pink decorative pattern 1153 that does not have value alone as information indicating the game state after the jackpot game is performed. Will be able to suggest properly

In particular, in this embodiment, a decoration image 1153a common to the red decoration pattern 1153 and the pink decoration pattern 1153 of the three types of decoration patterns 1153, respectively.
By adding (character image KG), the red decorative pattern 1153, the pink decorative pattern 1153, and the blue decorative pattern 1153 are different from each other. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that the pink decorative symbol 1153 in the external advantageous gaming state is a symbol having the same advantage as the red decorative symbol 1153, and the jackpot game is given to the player. The game state after being played can be suggested more appropriately.

[Display control for reach production]
Next, the display control for the reach effect performed by the effect display device 115 will be described in detail.

  As described above, if the variation pattern is determined in the process of step S1560 (FIG. 53), a command indicating the determined variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 (steps S260 and S270). . Then, the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 is subjected to processing such as effect lottery by the effect lottery means 960 through the command receiving means 950 in the peripheral control board 810.

  In other words, in the effect lottery means 960, effect information indicating various effect patterns related to the variable display effect of the decorative design 1153 is stored in the form corresponding to the commands from the main control board 710, respectively. It has a storage means. Therefore, when a command indicating the variation pattern is received through the command receiving means 950, the effect lottery means 960 first determines the type of effect pattern corresponding to the command based on the effect pattern storage means. As a result, when the effect pattern corresponding to the command is a reach effect pattern, among the decorative symbols 1153 variably displayed in three columns on the effect display device 115, the “left Reach symbol determination processing is performed in which the type (number) of decorative symbols 1153 to be finally stopped (before the jackpot game is performed) is determined in the two columns “column” and “right column”. In this reach symbol determination process, the types of decorative symbols 1153 that are finally stopped (until the jackpot game is played) in the two columns “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are as follows. Once determined, as the next process (middle symbol determination process), the type of decorative symbol 1153 (finally before the jackpot game is played) at the “middle row” in the effect display device 115 ( Number). The effect pattern storage means is composed of, for example, a backup RAM in the peripheral control board 810.

  Next, the processing procedure of the reach symbol determination process in which the type (number) of the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 is determined will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 shows a table (reach symbol determination table) used for reach symbol determination processing.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in the reach symbol determination table, the types of reach effects are classified according to the result of the lottery process for the jackpot and the current game state. In this embodiment, the lose reach that is performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is missed (losing) and the current gaming state is in the external normal gaming state. Specific 1 reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the first long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external normal gaming state. Specific 2 reach that is performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the second long open jackpot and the current gaming state is the external normal gaming state. Non-specific reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the third long open jackpot and the current gaming state is the external normal gaming state. An open change lose reach that is performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is disapproval (losing) and the current gaming state is an external advantageous gaming state. -Open change specific 1 reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the first long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external advantageous gaming state. -Open change specific 2 reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the second long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external advantageous gaming state. -Open change non-specific reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the third long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external advantageous gaming state. Are classified into eight types of reach production. In addition to the eight types of reach production, the total number of reach determination random numbers “100” is “1, 1”, “2, 2”,..., “7, 7”, “8.8”. Are assigned to one of the eight number combinations (the combination of two numbers employed in the “left column” and “right column”). That is, as is apparent from FIG. 79, the reach design random numbers have different distribution modes for the above eight types of reach production, and thereby the selection rate of the type of the decorative design 1153 is set to the above 8 Different types of reach production are used.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect lottery means 960 first receives the information indicating the result of the lottery process for the jackpot and the information indicating the current game state in the reach design determination process. Acquired from 710 side. Next, based on the acquired information, the type of the corresponding reach effect among the 8 types of reach effects is determined, and one of the total number “100” of reach design determining random numbers is acquired. Then, referring to the reach symbol determination table, by selecting one of the eight number combinations based on the determined reach effect type and the acquired reach symbol determination random number, The types of decorative symbols 1153 of “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are determined.

  For example, when the type of reach effect determined is “losing reach”, the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 13/100. It is a number combination of “1 · 1”, a number combination of “2 · 2” with a probability of 14/100, and a number combination of “3 · 3” with a probability of 8/100, A probability combination of “4 · 4” with a probability of 15 and a combination of numbers “5 · 5” with a probability of 13/100 and a combination of numbers “6 · 6” with a probability of 14/100 Then, the number combination of “7 · 7” is set to the probability of 8/100, and the number combination of “8 · 8” is set to the probability of 15/100.

  Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “specific 1 reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 5/100. The number combination is “1 · 1”, the probability is 5/2/100, the number is 2/2, the probability is 38/100, the number is 3/3, and 100 minutes. A probability combination of “4 · 4” with a probability of 2, a probability combination of “5 · 5” with a probability of 5/100, and a number combination of “6 · 6” with a probability of 5/100 Then, the number combination of “7 · 7” is obtained with a probability of 38/100, and the number combination of “8.8” is obtained with a probability of 2/100.

  That is, when the type of reach production determined is “specific 1 reach”, the game after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot game is performed because the first long open jackpot is won. The state is controlled to the above-described external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, in order to suggest that it is controlled to the above-described external advantageous gaming state, in the reach design determination table, the selection rate of “3.3” or “7/7”, which is a combination of the red decorative design 1153, It is set to be significantly higher than the selection rate of other number combinations.

  However, in this embodiment, when the first long open jackpot is won in the external normal game state, the promotion effect during the so-called jackpot game is performed with a certain probability. That is, in the reach design determination table, the “specific 1 reach” includes “3.3” and “7.7”, which are combinations of red decorative symbols 1153, and pink decorative symbols 1153. Combinations such as “1, 1”, “2, 2”, “5, 5”, “6, 6”, and combinations of blue decorative patterns 1153 such as “4, 4”, “8, 8”, etc. The reach design random numbers are also assigned to the number combinations. Therefore, when the combination of the pink and blue decorative symbols 1153 is selected, it is controlled to the external normal game state before the jackpot game corresponding to the first long open jackpot is performed. First, it is falsely suggested by a display such as a pink or blue decorative pattern 1153 (display mode in which the numbers of decorative patterns 1153 in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” are stopped together). After that, during the period in which the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed, information suggesting that the false information is controlled in the form of the above-described external advantageous gaming state is derived ( Promotional promotion during the jackpot game).

  In this embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 79, the combination of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is more than the combination of the blue decorative pattern 1153 selected (2/100). When selected (5/100), the probability that information indicating that the game is controlled to the above-described external advantageous gaming state is derived during the period when the jackpot game is played (the promotion effect during the jackpot game is performed) (Probability) is set to be high. Thereby, even in the external normal game state, the pink decorative pattern 1153 can be present as an advantageous pattern rather than blue.

  Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “specific 2 reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 20/100. Is a number combination of “1 · 1”, a probability of 20/100 is a combination of numbers “2 · 2”, a probability of 0/100 is a combination of numbers “3 · 3”, and 100 minutes With a probability of 10 and a number combination of “4 · 4”, a probability of 20/100 with a number combination of “5 · 5”, a probability of 20/100 with a number combination of “6.6” The number combination of “7 · 7” is set to a probability of 0/100, and the number combination of “8 · 8” is set to a probability of 10/100.

  In other words, when the type of reach effect determined is “special 2 reach”, since the second long open jackpot is won when in the external normal gaming state, the jackpot according to the jackpot The game state after the game is played is controlled to the above-mentioned external normal game state. Therefore, in order to suggest that the game is controlled to the external normal gaming state, in the reach design determination table, “1.1”, which is a combination of pink decorative symbols 1153 out of the eight types of numeric combinations, Only “6, 2”, “5, 5”, “6, 6”, and the combination of numbers of “4, 4” and “8, 8”, which are combinations of blue decorative design 1153, can be selected. Yes.

  However, in this embodiment, when the second long open jackpot is won in the external normal gaming state, the selection of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is more than the selection rate (20/100) of the blue decorative pattern 1153. The rate (80/100) is set to be several times higher. That is, for a predetermined period after winning the second long open jackpot, the winning probability B, which is higher than the winning probability A employed at the initial stage, is adopted as the winning probability for the jackpot. Therefore, according to such a selection ratio setting mode, the pink decorative design 1153 can be present as a more advantageous symbol for the player than the blue decorative design 1153.

  Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “non-specific reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 15/100. Is a number combination of “1 · 1”, a probability of 20/100 is a combination of numbers “2 · 2”, a probability of 0/100 is a combination of numbers “3 · 3”, and 100 minutes With a probability of 15 and a number combination of “4 · 4”, a probability of 15/100 with a number combination of “5 · 5” and a probability of 20/100 with a combination of numbers of “6 · 6” The number combination of “7 · 7” is set to the probability of 0/100, and the number combination of “8 · 8” is set to the probability of 15/100.

  In other words, when the type of reach effect determined is “non-specific reach”, the third long open jackpot is won when the player is in the normal external gaming state, and therefore the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot The game state after the game is played is controlled to the above-mentioned external normal game state. Therefore, in this case as well, in order to suggest that the game is controlled to the external normal gaming state, in the reach design determination table, among the eight types of numeric combinations, the combination of the pink decorative design 1153 is “1 · 1 ”,“ 2 ・ 2 ”,“ 5 ・ 5 ”,“ 6 ・ 6 ”, and the combination of blue decoration pattern 1153“ 4 ・ 4 ”and“ 8 ・ 8 ” Selectable.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, even when the third long open jackpot is won in the external normal game state, the selection of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is more than the selection rate (30/100) of the blue decorative pattern 1153. The rate (70/100) is set to be more than doubled. As a result, the display rate of the blue decorative symbol 1153 suggesting that the game is controlled to the external normal game state can be lowered, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed. In addition, since the selection rate of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is set low compared with the case where the second long open jackpot is won in the external normal game state, the pink color for the blue decorative pattern 1153 is set. The superiority of the decorative design 1153 is suitably maintained.

  Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “open change losing reach”, the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are 12/100. The probability is a number combination of “1 · 1”, the probability of 13/100 is the number combination of “2 · 2”, the probability of 15/100 is the number combination of “3 · 3”, and 100 The probability is a combination of numbers “4 · 4” with a probability of 10 / minute, a number combination of “5 · 5” with a probability of 12/100, and a number of “6.6” with a probability of 13/100 The number is a combination of numbers “7 · 7” with a probability of 15/100 and a number combination of “8.8” with a probability of 10/100.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, the winning probability (1/3) at the time of rushing (transition) to the external advantageous gaming state by winning the big winning in the external normal gaming state, and the big winning in the external advantageous gaming state This is very different from the continuation probability (3/5) at the time of shifting (continuing) again to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state by winning, and the merit in the external advantageous gaming state is extremely large. In this respect, in this embodiment, in the “open change lost reach” when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot performed in the external advantageous gaming state is a loss (out), in the external normal gaming state The combination of “3.3” and “7.7”, which is a combination of red decorative symbols 1153, rather than “open change loss reach” when the result of the lottery process performed for the jackpot is a loss. In addition to increasing the selection rate, the selection rates of “4 · 4” and “8.8”, which are combinations of the blue decorative pattern 1153, are set to be low. As a result, when the game is in an external advantageous game state, even if the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is a loss, it is possible to actively appeal the high continuation rate to the player. , A decrease in the interest of the game in the chance game state is suppressed.

  When the determined reach effect type is “open change specific 1 reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 are 5/100. With a probability of “1 · 1”, with a probability of 3/100 as a combination of numbers with “2 · 2”, with a probability of 40/100 as a combination of numbers with “3 · 3”, It is a combination of numbers “4 · 4” with a probability of 2/100, a combination of numbers “5 · 5” with a probability of 5/100, and a number “6.6” with a probability of 3/100 The combination is a number combination of “7 · 7” with a probability of 40/100, and a number combination of “8.8” with a probability of 2/100.

  In addition, in this “open change specific 1 reach”, when any of “4 · 4” and “8 · 8”, which is a combination of numbers of the blue decorative design 1153, is selected, the first long open big hit Before the big hit game corresponding to the game is performed, the display of the blue decorative symbols 1153 and the like (the “left column”, “middle column”, “right column”) First, it is falsely suggested by the display mode in which the numbers of the decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together. After that, during the period in which the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed, information suggesting that the false information is controlled in the form of the above-described external advantageous gaming state is derived ( Promotional promotion during the jackpot game). However, on the other hand, when any one of “1.1”, “2-2”, “5.5”, “6.6”, which is a combination of numbers of the pink decorative pattern 1153, is selected, Promotion promotions during such jackpot games are not performed. As a result, in the external advantageous gaming state, it can be made clear that the pink decorative symbol 1153 has been upgraded to the same level of superiority as the red decorative symbol 1153.

  When the type of reach effect determined is “open change specific 2 reach”, the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are 20/100. With a probability of “1 · 1”, a probability of 15/100 with a number of “2 · 2”, a probability of 0/100 with a number of “3 · 3”, It is a number combination of “4 · 4” with a probability of 15/100, a number combination of “5 · 5” with a probability of 20/100, and a number of “6.6” with a probability of 15/100 The number is a combination of numbers “7 · 7” with a probability of 0/100, and a number combination of “8 · 8” with a probability of 15/100.

  That is, as described above, when the second long open jackpot is won in the external advantageous gaming state, the gaming state after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is also set to the external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the determined reach production type is “open change specific 2 reach”, not only the combination of the pink decorative pattern 1153 but also the combination of the red decorative pattern 1153 is selected. You may do it. However, in this embodiment, when the second long open jackpot is won in the external advantageous gaming state, the combination of the red decorative symbols 1153 is not selected in performing the “open change specific 2 reach” (100 0), by selecting the combination of the pink decorative pattern 1153, it is suggested that the game is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state. This makes it easier for the player to feel that “the game state when the pink decorative pattern 1153 appears was good in the external advantageous game state” and proactively appealed to the player about the merits of being in the chance game state. Will be able to.

  In addition, in this “open change specific 2 reach”, when any of “4 · 4” and “8 · 8”, which is a combination of numbers of the blue decorative design 1153, is selected, the second long open big hit Before the big hit game corresponding to the game is performed, the display of the blue decorative symbols 1153 and the like (the “left column”, “middle column”, “right column”) First, it is falsely suggested by the display mode in which the numbers of the decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together. After that, during the period in which the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed, information suggesting that the false information is controlled in the form of the above-described external advantageous gaming state is derived ( Promotional promotion during the jackpot game).

  Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “open change non-specific reach”, the decorative symbols 1153 of “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are 50/100. With a probability of “4 · 4” and a probability of 50/100 with a number combination of “8.8”.

  Next, the middle symbol determination process in which the type of the “middle row” decorative symbol 1153 in the effect display device 115 is determined will be described in detail.

In the middle symbol determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the “middle row” in the effect display device 115 is the same symbol as the determined “left column” and “right column”. That is, in the above reach symbol determination process, “specific 1 reach”, “specific 2 reach”, “non-specific reach”, “open change specific 1 reach”, “open change specific 2 reach”, “open change nonspecific reach” When it is determined that any one of the above should be performed, the same symbol (number) as the number combination determined in the processing is adopted as the symbol of the “middle row”. Thereby, in the effect display device 115, a display mode in which the numbers of the decorative symbols 1153 in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” are stopped together appears, indicating that the game has been won. It will be suggested to the person.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the above reach design determination process that either “hasle reach” or “open change husle reach” should be performed, how many symbols are determined from the symbols (number combinations) determined in the process? It is determined whether to display a pattern (number) that is shifted by a certain amount, and the pattern corresponding to the determination is adopted as the “middle row” symbol. That is, in this case, the effect display device 115 has only the numbers of the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and the “right column” among the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”. Thus, the irregularity of the numbers in the “middle row” decoration symbol 1153 suggests to the player that the jackpot has not been won.

  By the way, in this embodiment, when the type (number) of the “middle row” decorative symbols 1153 is the same decorative symbol 1153 as the “left column” and “right column”, these decorative symbols 1153 are jackpots. When displaying (decision stop) on the effect display device 115 in the display mode at the time, a decoration symbol 1153 that is not necessarily the same as the determined decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily displayed on the effect display device 115 (temporary stop). Whether or not a re-lottery effect is to be performed is determined. When it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be performed, the following re-lottery effect is performed. As for this re-lottery effect, when the type (number) of the “middle row” decorative symbol 1153 is the same decorative symbol 1153 as the “left column” and “right column”, the re-lottery effect is performed. You may make it surely perform without determining whether or not.

  Next, processing relating to such a re-lottery effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 shows a table (re-lottery symbol determination table) used for processing relating to the re-lottery effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), the re-lottery symbol determination table is in a first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1 used in the external normal gaming state and in the external advantageous gaming state. It has a second re-lottery symbol determination table ST2 that is sometimes used. In these re-lottery symbol determination tables ST1 and ST2, a total of “100” is re-established for each type determined as the decorative symbol 1153 to be determined and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”. The random number for determining the lottery symbol is one of the eight number combinations of “1, 1, 1”, “2, 2, 2,”, “7, 7, 7”, “8, 8, 8” Are associated with each other.

  For example, in the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “1 · 1 · 1” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays a numerical combination of “1 · 1 · 1” with a probability of 70/100 (temporary stop). The number combination of “4/4/4” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 15/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “8/8/8” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 15/100 (temporary stop). Is stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “1, 1, 1” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “1, 1, 1” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the combination of numbers “4, 4, 4” and “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-mentioned “1.1” is changed from the displayed number combination. A re-lottery effect is displayed in which the number combination of “1” is displayed (determination is stopped). As described above, when the pink decorative pattern 1153 is displayed in a form that is changed from the blue decorative pattern 1153, the player may see the second long open jackpot as viewed from the player, or during the jackpot game Since the possibility of performing the promotion promotion is increased, a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

  Further, in the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “2.2.2” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays a numerical combination of “2.2-2.2” with a probability of 60/100 (temporary stop). The number combination of “4/4/4” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 20/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “8/8/8” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 20/100 (temporary stop). Is stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “2, 2, 2” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “2, 2, 2” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the number combination of “4, 4, 4” or “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-described “2. 2” is changed from the displayed number combination. A re-lottery effect in which the number combination of “2” is displayed (determination is stopped) is performed.

  Similarly, in the external normal gaming state, “3, 3. 3” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be confirmed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”. When it is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays the number combination of “1 · 1 · 1” with a probability of 5/100 (temporary stop). ), The number combination of “2, 2, 2” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 5/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “3, 3, 3” is displayed once with a probability of 70/100 ( (Temporary stop), the number combination of “4/4/4” is displayed once (provisional stop) with a probability of 5/100, and the number combination of “5/5/5” is once displayed with a probability of 5/100 It is displayed (temporary stop), and “6/6. Number combination of "is once displayed (temporarily stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “3, 3, 3” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “3, 3, 3” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, combination of numbers such as “1 ・ 1 ・ 1”, “2 ・ 2 ・ 2”, “4 ・ 4 ・ 4”, “5 ・ 5 ・ 5” and “6 ・ 6 ・ 6” is temporarily displayed. ), A re-lottery effect is performed in which the number combination of “3, 3 and 3” is displayed (determination is stopped) in a manner changed from the displayed number combination.

  Further, in the above-mentioned external normal gaming state, when “4/4/4” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be confirmed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 always displays the number combination “4 · 4 · 4” once. Then, a re-lottery effect is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination is maintained.

  In the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “5, 5, 5” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 once displays a numerical combination of “4/4/4” with a probability of 15/100 (temporary stop). The number combination of “5 · 5 · 5” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 70/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “8 · 8 · 8” is displayed with a probability of 15/100 (temporary stop). Is stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “5, 5, 5” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “5, 5, 5” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the number combination of “4, 4, 4” or “8, 8, 8” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-described “5.5” is changed from the displayed number combination. A re-lottery effect is displayed in which the number combination “5” is displayed (determination is stopped).

  In the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “6, 6. 6” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays a numerical combination of “4/4/4” with a probability of 20/100 (temporary stop). The number combination of “6, 6, 6” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 60/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 20/100 (temporary stop). Is stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “6, 6, 6” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “6, 6, 6” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the numerical combination of “4, 4, 4” or “8, 8, 8” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-mentioned “6.6” is changed from the displayed numerical combination. A re-lottery effect in which the number combination of “6” is displayed (determination stop) is performed.

  Further, in the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “7/7/7” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays the number combination of “4 · 4 · 4” with a probability of 5/100 (temporary stop). The number combination “7/7/7” is displayed once (provisionally stopped) with a probability of 90/100, and the number combination “8/8/8” is displayed once (provisional) with a probability of 5/100. Is stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “7, 7, 7” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “7, 7, 7” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the number combination of “4, 4, 4” or “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-mentioned “7.7” is changed from the displayed number combination. A re-lottery effect in which the number combination of “7” is displayed (determination is stopped) is performed.

  In the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “8, 8, 8” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be confirmed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is apparent from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 always displays the number combination “8, 8, 8” once. Then, a re-lottery effect is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination is maintained.

  On the other hand, the details of the re-lottery effect in the external advantageous game state are omitted, but basically, the re-lottery effect in the external normal game state is performed in a manner corresponding to the above-described re-lottery effect. However, in this external advantageous game state, as shown in the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST2, the blue symbols ("4 / 4.4", "8.8. 8 ”), the probability that a re-lottery effect in which the pink symbol is displayed (determination is stopped) is higher than that in the external normal gaming state. As a result, it is possible to actively appeal to the player the merit in the external advantageous gaming state. Furthermore, in this external advantageous game state, the type of the decorative symbol 1153 that is fixedly stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” is a red symbol (“3.3.3”). , “7 · 7 · 7”), the pink design is not displayed once when the red design is displayed (determination stop). As a result, it is possible to clarify that the pink decorative pattern 1153 has been upgraded to the same level of superiority as the red decorative pattern 1153.

  Hereinafter, a series of effect contents appearing on the effect display device 115 when the reach effect is performed with the pink decorative pattern 1153 will be described in order. 81 to 83 are effect images showing a series of effect contents appearing on the effect display device in the external normal gaming state, and FIG. 84 is an effect image showing a series of effect contents appearing on the effect display device in the external advantageous game state. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (A), during the variable display effect in the external normal gaming state, the same decorative symbol (here, the pink decorative symbol “here” is the “left column” and “right column”). 5 ") If 1153 is stopped, a reach effect that is an effect until the decorative symbol 1153 that is variably displayed in the remaining column (middle column) is stopped and displayed is performed. As a result of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), when the same decorative symbol is not stopped in the “middle row” (when other decorative symbols are stopped). Because the decorative symbols 1153 in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” are stopped because they are not aligned (display mode at the time of losing), the result of the lottery processing for the jackpot is losing. It will be suggested.

  On the other hand, as a result of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), when the same decorative design is stopped in the “middle row”, the “left column”, “middle row” ”And“ right row ”decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together (display mode at the time of jackpot), it is suggested that the jackpot has been won. In particular, the pink decoration image 1153 is displayed in the display mode at the time of the jackpot in conjunction with the background image HG1 that suggests that the game is in the external normal game state. It is suggested that the game state after the big hit game is controlled is controlled to the external normal game state.

  However, as described above, in FIG. 81C, the decorative symbols 1153 appearing in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” may be temporarily stopped. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the decorative symbol 1153 that is in a temporarily stopped state is variably displayed again (re-lottery effect). As a result, when the pink decorative pattern 1153 that appears in the temporarily stopped state reappears, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), the pink decorative pattern 115 is displayed as a big hit. Thus, it is suggested that the gaming state after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is controlled to the external normal gaming state. Then, as shown in FIG. 82A, an effect image such as “big hit” is displayed on the effect display device 115. At this time, in the pachinko machine 1, a big hit game is started.

  Here, during the execution period of the jackpot game, as described above, a promotion effect during the jackpot game may be performed. As an example, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), in this embodiment, a plurality of predetermined songs (here, “3”) are displayed on the effect display device 115, and the plurality of songs are displayed. The promotion effect is performed by causing the player to select one of them.

That is, as shown in FIG. 82B, one of the plurality of pieces of music is not displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 82 (C) and 83 (C), when this hidden song is selected by the player, a specific song (here, “D song”) is selected at the selected location. If appears, an effect image such as “UFO mode” suggesting that the game is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state is displayed on the upper left in the screen of the effect display device 115 (promotion effect). Then, when the jackpot game is over while the effect image such as “UFO mode” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the “UFO mode” suggests that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state. Immediately after the image such as "" is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 115, the player enters the external advantageous gaming state.

  However, when the non-displayed music is selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 82D, the selected music (here, “D music”) is different from the specific music (here “D music”). Then, "F music") may appear. In this case, as shown in FIG. 82E, an effect image such as “UFO mode” suggesting that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state is not displayed on the screen of the effect display device 115. The effect image during the jackpot game is displayed lightly. When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 82 (F), an image such as “medley chance” indicating that the game is controlled to the external normal game state is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 115. Immediately after being played, the game is shifted to the external normal gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the above-described promotion effect may not be performed. In such a case, the effect image shown in FIG. 82 (D) appears directly from the effect image shown in FIG. 82 (A). That is, also in this case, after the effect images shown in FIGS. 82 (E) and (F) appear, the state is shifted to the external normal gaming state.

  Further, as a result of the re-drawing effect, as shown in FIG. 81 (F), a red decorative pattern 1153 is displayed in a form changed from the pink decorative pattern 1153 that appears in the temporary stop state. The red decorative pattern 115 is confirmed and stopped in the display mode at the time of the jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is thereby performed is the external advantageous gaming state. It is suggested that it is controlled. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), an effect image such as “super big hit” more advantageous than the effect image shown in FIG. 82 (A) is displayed on the effect display device 115. At this time, in the pachinko machine 1, a big hit game is started.

After that, an effect image during the jackpot game appears. However, when the red decorative pattern 115 is confirmed and stopped in the display mode at the time of the jackpot, a so-called promotion effect during the jackpot game is not performed. That is, an effect image such as “UFO mode” indicating that the game is controlled to the above-described external advantageous game state is displayed on the upper left in the screen of the effect display device 115 from the beginning. In this state, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a plurality of predetermined songs (here, “3”) are displayed on the effect display device 115, and among the plurality of songs. A selection effect that allows the player to select one is performed. As a result, when one of the songs is selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the music corresponding to the selected music is acoustically output through the speaker, and the music is associated with the music. The effect image to be made appears. And when the jackpot game ends, FIG.
As shown in (D), immediately after an image such as “UFO mode” indicating that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 115, the external advantageous game state is entered. It becomes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), during the variable display effect in the external advantageous gaming state, the same “left column” and “right column” have the same decorative symbol (here, the pink decorative symbol “ 5 ") When 1153 is stopped, a reach effect which is an effect until the decorative symbol 1153 variably displayed in the remaining column (middle column) is stopped and displayed is performed. As a result of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), when the same decorative design is not stopped in the “middle row” (when other decorative design is stopped). Because the decorative symbols 1153 in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” are stopped because they are not aligned (display mode at the time of losing), the result of the lottery processing for the jackpot is losing. It will be suggested.

  On the other hand, as a result of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 84C, when the same decorative design is stopped in the “middle row”, the “left column”, “middle row” ”And“ right row ”decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together (display mode at the time of jackpot), it is suggested that the jackpot has been won. In particular, the pink decoration image 1153 is displayed in the display mode at the time of the jackpot together with the background image HG2 that suggests that the game is in the external advantageous gaming state, so that the jackpot is won. It is suggested that the gaming state after the jackpot game is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, of the three types of decorative symbols 1153, the character image (character character body) is a decorative image common to the red decorative symbol 1153 and the pink decorative symbol 1153. The drawn decorative image (KG) is added so that the red decorative pattern 1153, the pink decorative pattern 1153, and the blue decorative pattern 1153 have different decorative forms. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that the pink decorative symbol 1153 in the external advantageous gaming state is a symbol having the same advantage as the red decorative symbol 1153, and the jackpot game is given to the player. The game state after being played can be suggested more appropriately. In this embodiment, unlike the character image KG, a character image MG on which the characters “PINKLADY” are drawn is added to the blue decorative pattern 1153.

  Thereafter, as in the case where the red decorative pattern 1153 is displayed in the big hit display mode in the external advantageous gaming state (FIG. 81 (F)), as shown in FIG. 83 (A), An effect image such as “super jackpot” more advantageous than the effect image shown in FIG. An effect image during the jackpot game will appear, but when the pink decorative pattern 115 is confirmed and stopped in the display mode at the time of the jackpot in the external advantageous game state, the so-called promotion effect during the jackpot game is performed. Absent. That is, an effect image such as “UFO mode” indicating that the game is controlled to the above-described external advantageous game state is displayed on the upper left in the screen of the effect display device 115 from the beginning. In this state, the above-described selection effect shown in FIG. 83 (B) is performed. Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), music corresponding to the music selected in the selection process is acoustically output through the speaker, and an effect image reminiscent of the music appears. When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 83D, an image such as “UFO mode” indicating that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 115. Immediately after that, the player enters the external advantageous gaming state.

  Note that the above-described re-lottery effect may also be performed when the pink decorative pattern 1153 appears as a big hit display mode in this external advantageous gaming state. However, in this external advantageous game state, as shown in FIGS. 84 (D) and 84 (E), only the re-lottery effect is performed in the form in which the pink decorative pattern 1153 is maintained.

  Thus, the gaming machine represented by the pachinko machine 1 described in the present embodiment has the following technical idea. In addition, the following technical thoughts 1-8 are comprised independently or in combination as appropriate.

[Technology 1]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 is
A game board having a game area and into which a game ball is driven toward the game area;
A discharge port that is formed on the most downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball and discharges the game ball driven into the game area;
A flow mode changing means for irregularly changing the flow mode of the game ball flowing down toward the discharge port;
A first receiving port that can receive a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area one by one by the flow mode changing means;
First acceptance detection means for detecting acceptance of a game ball in the first acceptance port;
A first winning determination process for determining whether or not to win based on a first probability in response to detection of acceptance of a game ball at the first receiving port by the first receiving detection means; and A first lottery means for performing a first winning type determining process for determining the winning type when the winning determination is determined in the one winning determination process;
A second receiving port capable of accepting a game ball driven toward the game area;
Second receiving detection means for detecting acceptance of a game ball in the second receiving port;
A closed state provided in the vicinity of the second receiving port, in which it is impossible or difficult to receive a game ball into the second receiving port, and an open state in which the game ball can be received into the second receiving port; A movable member capable of opening and closing between,
Movable control means for controlling the opening and closing operation of the movable member;
A second winning determination process for determining whether or not to win based on the first probability in response to detecting the reception of the game ball at the second receiving port by the second receiving detection means; and A second lottery means for performing a second winning type determining process for determining the winning type when it is determined to be a winning in the two winning determination process;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while controlling to the normal gaming state in which the movable member is controlled in a normal state in which there is little expectation that the game ball will be received at the second receiving port or the expectation is not given to the player In addition, the movable member is controlled in a promotion mode in which the reception of the game ball at the second receiving port is promoted more than the normal mode, and the second probability is higher than the first probability instead of the first probability. Gaming state control means capable of controlling the advantageous gaming state in which the first winning determination process and the second winning determination process are performed based on a probability;
An opening and closing device that can be opened and closed between a closed state in which a game ball driven toward the game area cannot be received and an open state in which the game ball can be received;
An opening / closing control means for controlling an opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device;
When it is determined that the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process is won, the opening / closing device that is always maintained in the closed state is the first winning type determination process or the second winning type determination. A winning game execution means capable of executing a winning game to be shifted to an open state according to the winning type determined by the process;
Open / close acceptance detecting means for detecting acceptance of a game ball in the open / close device;
A prize ball granting means capable of giving a game ball as a prize to a player in response to detecting the reception of the game ball to the opening / closing device by at least the opening / closing acceptance detection means;
A gaming machine comprising
When the winning type determined in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process and determined by the first winning type determination process or the second winning type determination process is a grand prize, A game per winning game for displacing the opening / closing device to an open state for facilitating acceptance is executed by the winning game executing means, and the game state after the winning game is executed is the normal game state or the advantageous game. While controlled by the state
When the winning type determined in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process and determined by the first winning type determination process or the second winning type determination process is per small prize, A game per prize is executed by the winning game execution means for displacing the opening and closing device in an open state in a manner in which it is more difficult to accept the game ball than when the game is executed, and the game per prize is executed. The gaming state after being controlled is controlled to a gaming state in which the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process is performed based on the second probability,
The gaming machine further includes:
A specific condition establishment determination means for determining whether or not a specific condition that can be established with a predetermined probability is satisfied in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process;
The specific condition establishment determination means determines whether the specific condition is satisfied with one probability regardless of which probability the first winning determination process and the second winning determination process are performed based on. Is determined,
The switchgear is
Controlled by the open / close control means to operate in a manner similar to the game per prize according to the establishment of the specific condition,
When the game state control means controls the normal game state, the operation in a mode similar to the game per prize is performed at a higher frequency than when the game state is controlled to the advantageous game state. It is a gaming machine characterized by being displayed.

  The gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 includes a game board (game effect unit 4) in which a game area (game area 20) is formed, and a game ball that is driven into the game area is a discharge port (out port 471). ).

  In the game area, flow mode changing means (obstacle nail 410, windmill, etc.) capable of irregularly changing the game ball that is driven toward the game area is formed, and the game ball is moved by the flow mode change means. Each ball can be received at the first receiving port (first starting port 600). Note that the game ball that has flowed down to the most downstream side, such as the first receiving port and the second receiving port (third starting port 604) described later, and has flowed down to the most downstream side, is the most downstream in the flow direction of the gaming ball. It is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) from a discharge port provided on the side.

  The game ball received at the first receiving port is detected by the first receiving detecting means (first start port sensor 780, main control board 710), and in response thereto, the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 900). ) Lottery process is performed. The first lottery means performs a first winning determination process (step S1311) for determining whether or not to win and a first winning type determination process (step S1312) for determining the winning type.

  In the first winning determination process, the winning is always based on the first probability (probability when the probability variation function is not activated) in response to detecting the acceptance of the game ball to the first receiving port by the first receiving detecting means. Such a determination is made. Further, in the first winning type determination process, the winning type is determined when it is determined that the first winning determination process is a win. The winning type that can be determined in the first winning type determination process includes a grand prize (first to third long open big hit) in which a game per grand prize that can be given to the player in a large amount of game balls as a prize is executed, There are small prizes (first and second short open big hits) that have fewer game balls as prizes that can be given to the player than when the game per big prize is executed. However, the winning type is not limited to this, and for example, other winnings may be provided such that the number of game balls as a prize that can be given to the player is located between the big prize and the small prize. In addition, in the aspect as “a game per small prize that can be given to the player as a prize less than when the game per grand prize is executed”, it can not be expected at all that game balls will be given. Embodiments are also included. In addition, “always determine whether to win based on the first probability” means that the winning is based on the first probability unless a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as a game per grand prize or a game per small prize. This means that the determination related to is performed. That is, normally, the gaming state is controlled to a normal gaming state described later, and is controlled to an advantageous gaming state described later when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  On the other hand, a movable member (a pair of movable pieces 606) that can be opened and closed is provided in the vicinity of the second receiving port. When the movable member is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to receive the game ball at the second receiving port. When the movable member is in the open state, the receiving of the game ball at the second receiving port is closed. It becomes easier than the case of the state. The opening / closing operation of the movable member is controlled by an opening / closing control means (movable piece opening / closing control means 928).

  By the way, the game ball received in the second receiving port is detected by the second receiving detecting means (second starting port sensor 782, main control board 710), and in response to this, the second lottery means (second special symbol lottery). A lottery process by means 910) is performed. The second lottery means performs a second winning determination process (step S1311) for determining whether or not to win and a second winning type determination process (step S1312) for determining the winning type.

  In the second winning determination process, in response to the detection of the reception of the game ball to the second reception port by the second reception detection means, as in the case of detecting the reception of the game ball to the first reception port, always Is determined based on the first probability (probability when the probability variation function is not activated). In the second winning type determination process, the winning type is determined when it is determined that the second winning determination process is a win. In addition, the winning type that can be determined in the second winning determination process is the same as the winning type that can be determined in the first winning determination process, and a game per grand prize that allows a player to receive a large amount of game balls as a prize is executed. The number of game balls that can be awarded to the player is less than that when the game is executed or the game ball is given as an award. There is a small prize (first and second short open big prize) in which a game per small prize that cannot be expected at all is executed. However, the winning type is not limited to this, and for example, other winnings may be provided such that the number of game balls as a prize that can be given to the player is located between the big prize and the small prize. Note that “always determine whether to win based on the first probability” means that the winning is based on the first probability unless a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as a game per grand prize or a game per small prize. This means that the determination related to is performed. That is, normally, the gaming state is controlled to a normal gaming state described later, and is controlled to an advantageous gaming state described later when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Note that the winning type that can be determined in the first winning type determination process and the winning type that can be determined in the second winning type determination process are not necessarily the same, and only some of the winning types overlap or You may make it mutually determine mutually different winning classification. For example, the amount of profit given to the player may be different between the case where the first lottery means is won and the case where the second lottery means is won.

  In addition, the winning probability in the first winning determination process may be the same as or different from the winning probability in the second winning determination process, but is preferably the same. That is, it is preferable that the first probability and the second probability in the first winning determination process are the same as the first probability and the second probability in the second winning determination process, respectively. If the winning probability is different between the case where the game ball is received at the first entrance and the case where it is received at the second entrance, the game contents become complicated and the player is confused, as well as the lottery process. This is because the control becomes complicated.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the movable member is controlled in a normal manner by the movable control means, and is always controlled to this normal gaming state. The “normal mode” is a mode in which the player is not given a sense of expectation that a game ball can be received at the second receiving port. For example, the mode in which the movable member is always kept closed, or the movable member is in the open state. Even if it becomes, it means an aspect in which the acceptance frequency of the game ball to the movable member is almost the same as in the closed state. “A mode in which the reception frequency of the game ball to the movable member is almost the same as that in the closed state” means, for example, that the game ball is opened for a moment so that the game ball cannot be won. It means an aspect that is open to the extent that it does not affect the winning frequency.

  The advantageous gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to a player who is controlled when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the movable member is controlled to be promoted by the movable control means, and is replaced with the first probability. This is a gaming state in which the first winning determination process and the second winning determination process are performed based on a second probability (probability when the probability variation function is activated) higher than the first probability. The “promotion mode” is a mode in which the reception of the game ball at the second receiving port is promoted more than the normal mode, for example, the frequency of receiving the game ball at the second port is higher than that in the normal mode. As described above, the movable member is maintained in an open state for a certain period of time, or the movable member is opened and closed multiple times.

  In addition, this gaming machine includes an opening / closing device 500 that can be opened and closed between a closed state in which a game ball that is driven into the game area cannot be received and an open state in which the game ball can be received. (The open / close operation is specifically performed by the big prize opening / closing door 500b). This opening / closing device is always maintained in a closed state, and the opening / closing operation is controlled by the opening / closing control means when a game per prize or a game per prize is executed or a specific condition described later is satisfied. When a game ball is received by the opening / closing device, it is detected by the opening / closing acceptance detecting means, and a game ball as an award is given to the player. The number of game balls given as a prize in response to detection by the open / close acceptance detection means is constant, so if the number of game balls accepted by the switchgear increases, the amount of game balls given as a prize will increase accordingly. The amount also increases (a game ball corresponding to a multiplier between the number of game balls accepted by the switchgear and a certain amount is given). The processing described in the technical idea 1 “controlled by the opening / closing control means so as to operate in a manner similar to a game per prize according to the establishment of a specific condition” This corresponds to the process (step S250).

  When winning by the lottery by the first lottery means or the lottery by the second lottery means (specifically, when it is determined that the winner is determined in the first winning determination process, or it is determined that the winner is determined in the second winning determination process) When the game is played, the winning game is executed by the winning game executing means. The winning game is a game in which the opening / closing device that is always maintained in the closed state is displaced to the open state according to the winning type determined by the first winning type determining process or the second winning type determining process.

  By the way, when the winning type determined in the first winning determination process and the winning type determined by the first winning type determining process is a win, or determined in the second winning determination process and determined by the second winning type determination process. When the winning type is per grand prize, a game per grand prize is executed. This grand prize winning game is a game in which the opening / closing device is displaced to an open state so as to facilitate the reception of a relatively large number of game balls in order to give a large amount of game balls to the player as a prize. For example, it is a game in which the opening / closing device is opened for 15 rounds until nine game balls are won or until 30 seconds have passed (this is referred to as one round). In this way, when a game is won per grand prize, a large number of game balls can be easily received by the opening / closing device, so that a large amount of game balls can be given to the player. The gaming state after the game per prize is executed is controlled to be either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state according to the type of further award per prize.

  Also, when the winning type determined in the first winning determination process and the winning type determined by the first winning type determining process is per prize, or in the second winning determination process, the winning is determined and determined by the second winning type determination process. When the selected winning type is per prize, a game per prize is executed. The game per prize is not intended to give a large number of game balls to the player as a prize, and the switchgear is opened in a state in which it is more difficult to accept game balls than when a game per prize is executed. It is a game to displace to. For example, a game in which a state (also referred to as one round) that is in a closed state after 0.6 sec at the maximum of the opening and closing device is opened continues for two rounds. As described above, even if a game per small prize is played, the player cannot have a sense of expectation for a large amount of game balls being awarded as prizes. However, since the gaming state after the game per prize is executed is controlled to the gaming state in which the first winning determination process and the second winning determination process are always performed based on the second probability, it is relatively fast. You can play games with a sense of expectation that you will win in stages.

  Further, this gaming machine includes specific condition satisfaction determining means (step S1314) for determining whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. This specific condition can be established with a predetermined probability only when it is determined that the first winning determination process is lost or when it is determined that the second winning determination process is lost. When it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition establishment determination means, the opening / closing control means displaces the open / close device to the open state in a manner very similar to the case where the small prize winning is executed. However, even if the switchgear is displaced in a manner that is very similar to the case where a small prize is executed, the gaming state is not changed.

  Therefore, when the opening / closing device is displaced to an open state in a manner in which it is more difficult to receive a game ball than when a game per winning a prize is executed, the player only has to visually recognize the operation of the opening / closing device to It is not possible to grasp whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

  In addition, when a game per prize is performed, the gaming state after that includes a gaming state in which the first winning determination process is performed based on the second probability and a gaming state in which the second winning determination process is performed. It is controlled to any game state. On the other hand, when the specific condition is satisfied, the switchgear simply operates and does not change the gaming state (that is, the gaming state when the specific condition is satisfied is continued).

  As a result, in the normal gaming state, when the opening / closing device is displaced to the open state in such a manner that it is more difficult to accept the game ball than when the game per winning prize is executed, the player subsequently operates based on the first probability. Whether the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process is performed or whether the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process is performed based on the second probability cannot be grasped. Therefore, there is a merit that the game can be continued with a high expectation for the player, and there is an advantage that the operation rate is improved for the hall.

  The “similar aspect” means the same aspect, that is, the same aspect or a very similar aspect. In other words, even if the switchgear operates in a manner that makes it more difficult to accept a game ball than a game per grand prize, whether the operation of the switchgear is based on a game per prize or based on the establishment of a specific condition It is only necessary that the two are similar to the extent that the player cannot distinguish between the two.

  By the way, when the specific condition establishment determination means loses in the first winning determination process, the specific winning condition determination unit always has one regardless of whether the first winning determination process is performed based on the first probability or the second probability. It is determined whether or not a specific condition is established based on the probability. Similarly, when winning in the second winning determination process, the specific condition always has one probability regardless of whether the second winning determination process is performed based on the first probability or the second probability. Whether or not is established can be determined. Note that “determining whether or not a specific condition is always established with one probability” means that the specific condition is established in the first winning determination process and the second winning determination process is lost. Does not mean that the probability of establishment of the specific condition is the same, and that the probability of establishment of the specific condition in the case of a loss in the first winning determination process is always one probability, and / or This means that the probability of establishment of the specific condition is always one probability in the case of winning in the winning determination process. Here, “one probability” means, for example, an invariable (constant) probability that is not accompanied by a probability fluctuation.

  In addition, if the second winning determination process is lost, the specific condition may not be satisfied. As a mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied, in the second winning determination process, when the specific condition is established, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is set to zero, for example, 0/653. Any aspect in which the establishment determination itself is not performed is included.

  As described above, even when the winning combination is not won in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process (when the player wins), if the specific condition is satisfied, it is very similar to the case where the game per prize is executed. Since the opening / closing device is displaced to the open state in this manner, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process is performed based on the second probability. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in the normal game state where the game tends to be monotonous, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal game state. In addition, since the specific condition establishment determination means always determines whether or not the specific condition is satisfied with one probability, the first winning determination process and the second winning determination process are performed based on the probability of the first probability. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform different processing depending on the probability of the second probability and the case of performing the second probability, and the control load is reduced.

  Further, when the specific condition establishment determining means is lost in the first winning determination process so that the operating frequency of the opening / closing device in the case of being controlled in the normal gaming state is higher than in the case of being controlled in the advantageous gaming state The establishment probability of the specific condition is determined with a higher establishment probability than the establishment probability of the specific condition when the second winning determination process is lost. That is, the opening / closing in the case of being controlled in the normal gaming state by the fact that the establishment probability of the specific condition when winning in the first winning determination process is higher than the establishment probability of the specific condition when winning in the second winning determination process The frequency of operation of the device is higher than when it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the normal gaming state is controlled, the switchgear operates at a relatively higher frequency than when the advantageous gaming state is controlled, so the first winning determination process based on the second probability. Or a second winning determination process may be given to the player, and a decrease in interest in a normal gaming state that tends to be monotonous can be suppressed. This further increases the possibility that the game will continue to be played without getting the player bored. In addition, when it is controlled to the advantageous game state, it will be in a state of waiting for winning the lottery without reducing the so-called holding ball, so it is not actually won in the first lottery means or the second lottery means Nevertheless, it is not necessary to frequently open and close the switchgear.

  When the movable control means is controlled to the normal gaming state by the gaming state control means 934, it is more difficult for the movable member to accept the game ball from the first receiving opening as a normal mode to the second receiving opening. It is preferable to control the mode.

  For example, two nails (generally referred to as two nails) are arranged in the horizontal direction along the first receiving port immediately above the first receiving port. A ball is bounced and accepted at the first entrance. On the other hand, the second receiving port is disposed immediately below the first receiving port (just below the gap through which the game ball passes), and a movable member (a pair of movable pieces 606) that can be opened and closed is the second receiving port. It is provided in the vicinity of the receiving port. When the movable member is in the closed state, it is impossible to receive the game ball into the second receiving port. When the movable member is in the open state, the receiving of the game ball into the second receiving port is promoted (first step). It is easier to accept game balls than a single entrance).

  As described above, when the normal gaming state is controlled, the movable member is made to be in an advantageous gaming state by making it a normal state in which it is more difficult to receive the game ball to the second receiving port than to the first receiving port. The frequency with which the specific condition is satisfied is higher than when the control is being performed. Therefore, since the frequency with which the opening / closing device is opened in the normal gaming state is relatively high, the frequency of giving the player a sense of expectation in the normal gaming state, which tends to be monotonous, is increased, and the decrease in interest in the normal gaming state is suppressed. it can.

  In addition, as another aspect of the second receiving port, for example, two nails are arranged in the horizontal direction along the second receiving port immediately above the second receiving port, and further directly above the two nails. In some cases, another nail (these three nails are generally called three nails) is arranged so as to form a substantially equilateral triangle with these two nails. Even in such a case, by providing a movable member that can be opened and closed in the vicinity of the second receiving port, when the movable member is in the closed state, the game ball is more than the first receiving port of the two nails. When the movable member is in an open state, it is difficult to receive the game ball, and the game ball is more easily received than the first receiving port.

[Technology 2]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1,
An effect display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect image;
Effect display control means for performing display control of effect images displayed on the effect display device according to the lottery result by the first lottery means or the second lottery means;
Further comprising
The effect display control means includes:
In accordance with the establishment of the specific condition, an effect image very similar to that when winning per prize is displayed on the effect display device, and when controlled to the normal gaming state, The gaming machine is characterized in that an effect image very similar to that in the case of winning is displayed at a higher frequency than in the case of being controlled to the advantageous gaming state.

The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 includes an effect display device (effect display device 115) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and effect display control means (effect control) for performing display control of the effect image displayed on the effect display device. Means 962).

  Then, when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition establishment determination means, the effect image displayed on the effect display device when the lottery result by the first lottery means or the second lottery means is per prize The effect image (hereinafter referred to as “very similar effect image”) is displayed on the effect display device. However, even if the similar effect image is displayed on the effect display device, the gaming state is not changed.

  Accordingly, even if the effect image displayed on the effect display device is visually recognized, it cannot be determined whether the game per prize is performed or whether the specific condition is satisfied.

  In addition, when a game per prize is performed, the gaming state after that includes a gaming state in which the first winning determination process is performed based on the second probability and a gaming state in which the second winning determination process is performed. It is controlled to any game state. On the other hand, when the specific condition is satisfied, the similar effect image is only displayed on the effect display device, and the game state is not changed (that is, the game state when the specific condition is satisfied is continued). .

  Thereby, in the normal gaming state, when the effect image or the similar effect image indicating that the prize has been won per prize is displayed on the effect display device, the player subsequently selects the first probability based on the first probability. Whether the winning determination process or the second winning determination process is performed or whether the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process is performed based on the second probability cannot be grasped. Therefore, there is a merit that the game can be continued with a high expectation for the player, and there is an advantage that the operation rate is improved for the hall. In particular, since a player generally plays a game while watching the effect display device, when an effect image or a similar effect image indicating that the player has won a prize per prize is displayed on the effect display device, The player can be surely notified of the winning or the establishment of the specific condition. Thereby, the fall of the interest in a normal game state can be suppressed. Further, even if the display of the effect image or the similar effect image indicating that the prize is won in the effect display device is missed, the displacement of the opening / closing device performed thereafter can be visually recognized. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process may be performed based on the probability of. This further increases the possibility that the game will continue to be played without getting the player bored.

  Note that the “similar effect image” means the same effect image, that is, the same effect image or an extremely similar effect image. In other words, if the players are similar to the extent that the player cannot distinguish whether the prize is won per prize or only the specific condition is satisfied only by visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the effect display device. good.

[Technology 3]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 is
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2,
The effect display control means is controlled to the normal gaming state by the gaming state control means,
When winning per prize, change the display mode displayed on the effect display device triggered by winning per prize,
When the specific condition is satisfied, the display mode displayed on the effect display device when the specific condition is satisfied is changed to a display mode very similar to the case where the prize is won per prize. It is a gaming machine.

  When the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is controlled to the normal gaming state (more specifically, the second normal gaming state to be described later in which the probability variation function is deactivated) by the gaming state control means, the first winning determination process Or, if the winning type determined in the second winning determination process and the winning type determined by the first winning type determining process or the second winning type determining process is per prize, a game per prize based on winning per the prize As a trigger, the display mode displayed on the effect display device is changed from a display mode as a normal gaming state to a display mode that gives the player a sense of expectation (a display mode that suggests a time limit mode). Will be changed by.

  Further, when the game state control means controls the normal game state (more specifically, the second normal game state to be described later in which the probability changing function is deactivated), the first win determination process or the second win determination process loses. And when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition establishment determining means, the display mode displayed on the effect display device is triggered by the operation of the opening / closing device based on the establishment of the specific condition. The display mode is changed by the effect display control means to a display mode (a display mode that suggests the time limit mode, hereinafter simply referred to as “similar display mode”) that is similar to the case of winning.

  The “similar display mode” means the same display mode, that is, the same display mode or a very similar display mode. In other words, whether the change of the display mode is based on the achievement of the specific condition or the change of the display mode when the display mode is changed in response to the establishment of the specific condition or per prize. It is only necessary that the two are similar to the extent that the player cannot distinguish. In the present invention, the “effect image” indicates the lottery result by the first lottery means or the second lottery means, and the “display mode” indicates the gaming state.

  As described above, even when the winning condition is determined in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process, when the specific condition is satisfied, the display mode displayed on the effect display device is won per prize It is changed to the display mode that is very similar. Here, since the operating frequency of the switchgear is higher when controlled in the normal gaming state than when controlled in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to further suppress a decrease in interest in the normal gaming state.

[Technology 4]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 or 3,
The effect display control means, when being controlled to the advantageous gaming state by the gaming state control means, when winning per prize or when the specific condition is satisfied, Without changing the display mode displayed on the effect display device in response to the establishment of the specific condition, continuously displaying the display mode before winning the prize or before the specific condition is satisfied. It is a featured gaming machine.

  When the gaming machine according to the above technical idea 4 is controlled in the advantageous gaming state by the gaming state control means, when winning per prize or when a specific condition is satisfied, winning per prize or Without changing the display mode that suggests that it is an advantageous gaming state displayed on the effect display device when the specific condition is satisfied, before the winning of winning per prize or before the specific condition is satisfied Is continuously displayed. That is, even when winning per prize or when a specific condition is established, a display mode that suggests that the player is in an advantageous gaming state is continuously displayed.

  In addition, the effect display device displays a combination of decorative symbols composed of a plurality of columns in order to instruct the player of the lottery result by the first lottery means or the second lottery means. Even if winning or a specific condition is established, the decorative symbols are stopped in a manner that indicates that they are out of order so as not to actively suggest them to the player. In the present embodiment, as shown by the variation numbers 97 and 98 shown in FIG. 55 and FIG.

  By the way, when controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the movable member is in the promotion mode and the first winning determination process and the second winning determination process are performed based on the second probability, so the lottery is performed without reducing the so-called holding ball. It will be in a state to wait for winning. In such a state, the player is often informed that a prize has been won per prize or that a specific condition has been established, even though the first lottery means or the second lottery means is not actually won. When suggested, the player feels annoyed. For this reason, without winning the winning per prize or establishment of a specific condition, the display before winning the winning per prize or before the specific condition is satisfied without changing the display mode displayed on the effect display device By continuously displaying the mode, the player is not actively suggested to win a prize per prize or to establish a specific condition.

  In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied, a player may have won a small prize that cannot be expected to be given a game ball as a prize even though he / she has not actually won a small prize. Will be recognized. When it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it may indicate that there is a possibility of winning per prize even though it is not actually won per prize, and there is a sense of useless loss due to not winning per prize. It will be given to the player. Therefore, when the game state is controlled to the advantageous game state, the unnecessary loss feeling given to the player is suppressed by suppressing the operation frequency of the opening / closing device that is opened in a manner similar to the case where a game per prize is executed. Can be reduced and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When the game state control means controls the effect display control means to the normal game state (more specifically, the second normal game state described later in which the probability variation function is inactive), the winning per winning prize is determined. As a trigger, the display mode displayed on the effect display device changes from the display mode as the normal gaming state to the display mode that gives the player a sense of expectation (in this embodiment, the display mode suggesting the time limit mode). It is preferably changed by the control means. Further, when the game state control means controls the normal game state (more specifically, the second normal game state described later in which the probability changing function is inactivated), the display on the effect display device is triggered by the establishment of the specific condition. It is preferable that the display mode to be displayed is changed by the effect display control means to a display mode that is very similar to the case of winning per prize.

  As described above, even when the winning condition is determined in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process, when the specific condition is satisfied, the display mode displayed on the effect display device is won per prize By changing to a display mode that is very similar to the above, it is possible to further suppress a decrease in interest in a normal gaming state that tends to be monotonous.

[Technology 5]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 2 to 4,
The gaming state control means includes
The winning type determined in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process and determined by the first winning type determination process or the second winning type determination process is further a normal small prize among the small prizes. When winning, the game state after the game per prize based on the normal prize is executed, the movable member is controlled to the normal mode, and the effect image as the normal game state is the effect display In spite of being displayed on the device, the first win determination process and the second win determination process are controlled based on the second probability instead of the first probability. With
When it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition satisfaction determining means, the game state after the opening / closing device is operated based on the satisfaction of the specific condition is controlled so that the movable member is in the normal mode. In addition, the effect image as the normal gaming state is displayed on the effect display device, and the first winning determination process and the second winning determination process are controlled to the second normal gaming state performed based on the first probability. It is a gaming machine that is characterized by

  In the gaming machine according to the above technical idea 5, the winning combination is determined in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process in the normal gaming state (more specifically, the second normal gaming state in which the probability variation function is not activated), and the first winning type When the winning type determined by the determination process or the second winning type determining process is further per ordinary small prize (second short opening big hit) out of the small prizes (first short opening big hit, second short opening big hit) The game state after the game per prize based on the normal prize is executed is controlled to the first normal game state (external normal game state B). In addition, if the winning condition is determined in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process in the normal gaming state (more specifically, the second normal gaming state in which the probability variation function is not activated) and the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition establishment determining means When the determination is made, the gaming state after the opening / closing device is displaced based on the establishment of the specific condition is controlled to the second normal gaming state (external normal gaming state A).

  Here, in the first normal gaming state, the first winning determination process and the second winning determination are performed although the movable member is controlled in the normal mode and the effect image as the normal game state is displayed on the effect display device. In this gaming state, processing is performed based on the second probability instead of the first probability.

  On the other hand, in the second normal gaming state, the movable member is controlled in the normal state, the effect image as the normal gaming state is displayed on the effect display device, and the first winning determination process and the second winning determination process are the first. It is a gaming state performed based on the probability.

Thus, in the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, the operation mode of the movable member and the display mode displayed on the effect display device are the same mode (however, they are physically completely the same). It is not necessary, and the display mode may be the same as the player cannot distinguish between the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state). On the other hand, the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process is performed based on the second probability in the first normal gaming state, whereas the first winning determination is performed based on the first probability in the second normal gaming state. Processing or second winning determination processing is performed. Therefore, even though the probability of winning in the first win determination process or the second win determination process is completely different, it becomes even more difficult for the player to distinguish the normal game state (more specifically, the external normal It is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest in the gaming state).

  When the winning type determined in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process in the advantageous gaming state and determined by the first winning type determination process or the second winning type determination process is a normal small prize, The game state after the game per prize based on the normal prize is executed is controlled to the advantageous game state. In the present embodiment, when the second short open jackpot is won during the promotion mode, the promotion mode is continued in the subsequent gaming state. In addition, even when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition establishment determination means in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process in the advantageous gaming state, the opening / closing device is based on the establishment of the specific condition. The gaming state after the displacement is controlled to the advantageous gaming state. This is because the operation of the condition device is not accompanied when the winning is determined in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process. Therefore, even if the specific condition is established in the advantageous gaming state, the opening / closing device is based on the establishment of the specific condition. This is because the advantageous gaming state is continued as it is.

[Technology 6]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 5,
While the probability of winning in the first winning determination process and the specific condition being satisfied is more than 10 times the probability of winning per prize in the first lottery means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the probability of winning in the second winning determination process and the specific condition being satisfied is not more than five times the probability of winning per prize in the second lottery means.

  In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 6, the probability of winning in the first winning determination process and the specific condition being satisfied is 10 times or more the probability of winning per prize in the first lottery means. Therefore, when a game ball is received at the first reception entrance, the frequency at which the similar display mode is displayed based on the establishment of the specific condition is the frequency at which the display mode indicating that the prize is won per prize is displayed. More than double. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the first winning determination process and satisfying the specific condition is 4/653, whereas the probability of winning in the first lottery means per prize is 20/65300. Therefore, the frequency at which the similar display mode is displayed based on the establishment of the specific condition is 20 times the frequency at which the display mode indicating that the prize is won per prize is displayed. On the other hand, the probability of winning in the second winning determination process and satisfying the specific condition is not more than five times the probability of winning per prize in the second lottery means.

  Accordingly, when a game ball is received at the first entrance, the frequency at which the similar display mode is displayed on the effect display device is at least 10 times the frequency at which the display mode indicating that the prize is won per prize is displayed. Become. Thereby, in the normal gaming state, the very similar display mode is displayed with a probability of 10 times or more than the probability of actually winning per prize. In this way, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation at a high frequency in the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, the probability of winning in the second winning determination process and satisfying the specific condition is 1/653, whereas the probability of winning per prize in the second lottery means is 20/65300. Therefore, the frequency at which the similar display mode is displayed based on the establishment of the specific condition is five times the frequency at which the display mode indicating that the prize is won per prize is displayed.

[Technology 7]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 7 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 6,
The gaming state control means includes
The special prize is further selected from among the prizes that are won in the first winning determination process or the second winning determination process and determined by the first winning type determination process or the second winning type determination process. When winning, the gaming state after the game per prize based on the special prize is executed according to the winning type determined in the first winning type determining process or the second winning determining process Thus, the gaming machine can be controlled to an amplified gaming state that amplifies the value as the hit.

The gaming machine according to the above technical idea 7 is won in the first winning determination process and when the winning type determined by the first winning type determining process is further per special special prize out of the small prizes, or in the second When the winning type determined in the winning determination process and the winning type determined by the second winning type determination process is further per special prize among the prizes, the game per prize based on the special prize is executed. This gaming state is controlled to the amplified gaming state (promotion mode) by the gaming state control means. In this amplified gaming state, the first winning determination process is won per winning and the winning per win is determined by the first winning type determining process (the gaming state after the winning game is executed is the first normal winning state). It is determined that the winning is per winning in the second winning determination process, and the winning per winning is determined by the second winning type determining process in the second winning determination process. At this time, after the game per winning a prize based on winning of the first normal winning a prize is executed (after completion), the gaming state is controlled to the advantageous gaming state instead of the normal gaming state. In this way, when the winning is based on the first normal grand prize, the gaming state after the game based on the first normal grand prize is executed, the normal gaming state (specifically, the second normal gaming) By controlling to the advantageous gaming state, the value as a win is amplified. Note that this amplified gaming state is a kind of advantageous gaming state, and when the player wins the first normal grand prize in the amplified gaming state, the amplified gaming state is again controlled as the advantageous gaming state. This amplified gaming state corresponds to the promotion mode (that is, the external advantageous gaming state B) of the present embodiment. Also, in this amplified gaming state, even if a prize is won per normal prize, the gaming state after the game per prize based on the winning per normal prize (after completion) is the normal game Instead of the state (first normal gaming state), the advantageous gaming state is controlled.

  As described above, when a prize is won per special prize, the game state after the game per prize based on the special prize is executed becomes an amplified game state. In this amplified gaming state, even if the winning is based on the first normal grand prize or the normal small prize, in the subsequent gaming state, the winning determination process is performed with the second probability instead of the first probability, and the movable member is Since it becomes a promotion aspect and the value of jackpot is amplified, the fall of interest can be suppressed. As a result, when a special small prize that cannot be expected to be awarded as a prize is won, a predetermined amount of game balls will be awarded to the player as a prize ball even though it has been won in the winning judgment process. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest caused by the absence of

  In addition, there is a correlation between the winning probability in the winning determination process and the game ball given as a winning ball at the time of winning a game (that is, if the winning probability is increased, it is given to the player as a winning ball at the time of winning the winning prize) The number of game balls must be reduced, and if the number of game balls given to a player as a prize ball at the time of winning the grand prize is increased, the winning probability needs to be lowered). In other words, the winning probability can be increased by providing a small prize per game ball that is awarded as a prize ball rather than a special grand prize. On the other hand, according to the invention described in the technical idea 7, the winning value can be increased by providing the small prize, but the winning value in the subsequent gaming state can be amplified. Therefore, instead of being discouraged due to the small number of prize balls given to a player when winning a small prize, it is instead advantageous game that should be controlled to the normal game state in the subsequent game state. Since it is controlled to the state (external advantageous game state B), it gives a player a sense of expectation, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

[Technology 8]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 8 is
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 7,
The gaming state control means includes
Even when the first lottery means or the second lottery means is won per prize without winning per prize, the gaming state after the game per prize is executed based on the prize per prize A gaming machine characterized in that it can be controlled to a restarting game state that can be controlled again to the amplified gaming state according to the winning type determined in the first winning type determining process or the second winning determining process. is there.

  In the gaming machine according to the above technical idea 8, even if the first lottery means or the second lottery means does not win a prize per prize (that is, if the amplified gaming state is not originally performed). In other words, the game state control means controls the restart game state (retraction mode) that can be controlled again to the amplified game state. In other words, when the first lottery means is won per first normal grand prize or per ordinary prize, or when the second lottery means is won per first normal grand prize or per normal prize, the grand prize based on the per grand prize is awarded. The gaming state after the winning game based on the winning game or the winning prize is executed is controlled to the restarting gaming state. The restarting gaming state is a gaming state in which the amplified gaming state can be pulled back according to the winning type determined in the first winning type determining process or the winning type determined in the second winning determining process. Then, the restarting game executing means wins the first normal grand prize or the normal small prize in the first lottery means in the amplified game state, or the first lottery means per the first normal grand prize or the normal small prize. When winning, the game state after the game per prize based on winning the first normal grand prize or the prize per prize based on the normal prize (after completion) is changed to the normal game state (first normal prize) Instead of the gaming state, control is made to the amplified gaming state. In this way, when the winning per first normal grand prize or the normal small prize is won, the gaming state after the game per prize or small prize is executed is the normal gaming state (specifically, the first gaming state in detail). By controlling what is controlled to the normal gaming state) to the amplified gaming state, a gaming state in which the value as a win can be amplified again.

  In this way, if the player wins the second normal grand prize in the restart game state, the game shifts to the amplified game state again, so that it is possible to expect a continuous occurrence of the jackpot (continuous change) and suppress the decrease in interest. It becomes possible.

  In particular, even if the result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means in the amplified game state is per second normal grand prize, after the game per second normal grand prize is over, the player enters the restarting game state and again It can be controlled to an amplified gaming state. In other words, even when the player wins the second normal grand prize, there is a possibility that the player enters the amplified game state again without returning to the normal game state. Moreover, as described in Technical Thought 7, when the first lottery means or the second lottery means wins per grand prize and the grand prize is per first normal grand prize, the winning per first normal grand prize is won. The game state after the game based on the grand prize is executed is controlled to the advantageous game state instead of the normal game state. Therefore, once the amplified gaming state is entered, the probability that the advantageous gaming state continues is increased, and a great expectation can be given to the continuous occurrence of jackpots (continuous change).

  Although the present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It is. That is, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a slot machine, or the like may be used. The present invention can be applied.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game production | presentation unit 5 Door frame 6 Lower decoration board 6a Decoration cover board 6C Fixing protrusion 6D Fixing hole 6E Fixing screw 6F Guide board 7 Upper support metal fitting 7E Hanging piece part 8 Lower support Metal fitting 8C Mounting hole 10 Upper frame plate 10B Engagement notch 10C Insertion hole 11 Lower frame plate 11B Engagement notch 11C Insertion hole 12 Side frame plate 12a Outer wall portion 12b Thickness portion 12A Outer frame inner space 12B Installation hole 12C Installation hole 12D Mounting hole 12E Mounting hole 12F Groove portion 12G Space portion 12H Recess 13 Side frame plate 13a Outer wall portion 13b Thickness portion 13A Outer frame space 13B Mounting hole 13C Mounting hole 13D Mounting hole 13F Groove portion 13G Space portion 13H Recess 14 Connecting member 15 Connecting hole 15B Connecting screw 16 Connecting hole 16B Connecting screw 17 Mounting screw 18 Mounting screw 19 Supporting protruding piece 19A Supporting saddle hole 20 Game area 20a Image display area 20b Sphere falling area 21 Support protrusion 22 Closing protrusion 22B Mounting screw 23 Closing protrusion 23B Mounting screw 24 Peripheral control board box 25 Main control board box 30 Game effect unit installation recess 32 Plate part 33 Upper security double groove 34 Side security groove 35 Security recess 37 Protrusion 38 Launch rail 39 Prize ball payout stopper mechanism 40 Launcher mounting portion 40a Handle connection window 41 Fastening hole 42, 43 Engagement groove 44 Rail connection member 46 Game effect unit fixture 47 Upper shaft support Bracket 48 Lower shaft support bracket 49 Shaft support side 50 Prize ball tank 51 Tank rail member 52 Ball passage unit 53 Ball delivery device 54 Board unit 55 Delivery control board box 56 External terminal plate 57 Launching device 58 Back cover 59 Ball supply passage 60 Locking device 61 Dispensing motor 63 Ball feed mechanism 70 Rear opening 78 Guide rail 80 LED display area 82 Normal symbol indicator 84 First special symbol indicator 86 Second special symbol indicator 88 First special symbol hold indicator 90 Second special symbol hold indicator 92 Normal symbol hold indicator 100 Door frame main body 101 Game window 102 Speaker opening 103 Prize ball passage opening 104 Opening 105 Cover opening 106 Lock hole 107 Slide unit mounting recess 108 Lever 110 Mounting opening 111 Engagement protrusion 112 Door frame protrusion 115 Effect display device 116 Attachment / detachment protrusion 118 Attachment / detachment Stop part 119 Display device control board box 120 Door lens unit 121 Lens base body 122 Upper reflector 123 Cathode tube support piece 125 Electrode support part 127 Electrode cover 128a, 128b Speaker through hole 130a, 130b Side reflector 131a, 131b Electrode support part 132 Upper cold cathode tube 133 Curve 134a, 134b Side cold cathode tube 135a, 135b Rubber sleeve 136 Inverter board 137 LED board 137 LED board 138a, 138b LED board 140 Lens cover 141 Upper lens cover part 141c Leading lens part 142a, 142b Side lens cover part 142c Leading lens portion 143a, 143b Speaker mounting hole 144a, 144b Speaker 145a Speaker cone 146a, 146b Speaker cover 147a, 147b Mesh cover 148a, 148b Decoration member mounting region 149a, 149b Decoration member 150 Red lens portion 151 Cover base plate 152 LED Substrate 154 Speaker frame 155 Decoration base plate 156 LED substrate 158 Decoration frame 159a, 159b Decoration plate 160 Reinforcement sheet metal 161 Upper reinforcement sheet metal 162 Axle support Reinforcing sheet metal 163 Opening side reinforcing sheet metal 164 Lower reinforcing sheet metal 165 Upper bent protrusion piece 166 Lower bent protrusion piece 167 Characteristic bent protrusion piece 172 Shaft support side short bent protrusion piece 173 Open side outer bent protrusion piece 174 Open Side inner bent protrusion 175 Engagement opening 176 Hook cover 177 Prize ball passing port covering portion 178 Lower bent protrusion 179 Upper bent protrusion 180 Vertical bent protrusion 190 Glass unit 191 Unit frame 194 Stopping piece 195 Engagement Projection piece 199 Crime prevention projection plate part 200 Engagement groove 201 Glass plate 210 Crime prevention cover 211 Abutting recess 212 Pre-crime projection piece 213 Mounting elastic piece 214 Crime prevention rear piece 215 Crime prevention rear end projection piece 220 Mounting base 221 Prize ball passing Mouth opening 222 Unit mounting recess 223 Lid opening 224 Standing wall 226 Unit 227 Ball flight guide surface 230 Slide unit 231 Slide engagement / disengagement piece 240 During frame decoration Terminal plate 241 Relay board cover 280 Back cover support cylinder 290 First peripheral wall 291 Second peripheral wall 292 Third peripheral wall 293 Fourth peripheral wall 294 Open side rear wall 295 Upper rear wall 296 Shaft support side rear wall 300 Dish unit 301 unit frame 302 upper surface cover portion 302a vertical cover portion 303 front cover portion 304 front decorative plate 305 dish body upper surface opening portion 306 operation button unit concave space portion 307 decorative space portion 310 space portion forming member 310a connector 310b wiring storage opening 313 One ball removal button 313a First ball removal button opening 314 Slide support members 315a, 315b Speaker openings 316a, 316b Speaker cover 317 Handle mounting hole 318 Handle unit 318a Rotating operation member 319 Engaging cam 320 Second ball removal button Opening 322 ball outlet 323 Opening for ball rental button unit 324 Ball rental unit 325 Fastener insertion hole 326 Operation button unit 327 Operation button 330 Lower speaker unit 331 Speaker box body 337 Ball exit passage front bar 338 Guide bar 341a, 341b Speaker 350 Lock mounting hole 351 Lock Stop hole 352 Door hook hole 353 Lock mounting hole 354 Cylinder lock through hole 360 Dish body 361 Storage portion 362 Guide passage portion 364 Ball extraction passage portion 365 Slide valve 366 Rotating member 367 Rotating shaft 369 Spring 375 Ball extraction valve 383 Side opening Lid 388 Ball extraction opening 395 Power supply board 400 Second ball extraction link unit 401 Second ball extraction button 409 Game panel 409a Fitting hole 409b Long hole 409c Engagement step portion 409d Inner rail fixing hole 409e Opening portion 409f Lower hole 410 Obstacle nail 414 First link 415 Drainage connection passage 419 Second link 430 Dish lid body 431 Prize ball communication rod 432 Opening lid mounting window 433 Ball removal passage rear rod 434 Upper guide rod 435 Lower guide rod 436 Guide hole 438 Ball inlet 440 Ball outlet 462 Inner rail unit 463 Backflow Prevention member 464 Rail security groove 465 Security projection 466 Positioning recess 467 Game production unit stop 468 Speaker notch 469 Fastening part 471 Out port 472 Outer rail unit 473 Foul port 476 Stop part 477 Connection notch 478 Passage notch 482 Guide rail 500 Opening / closing device 500a Large winning opening 500b Large winning opening / closing door 504 Panel back plate 504a Screw hole 504b Positioning hole 504c Locking claw 504d Recessed portion 504e Opening 505 Substrate holder 505a Game ball discharge port 505b Bottom plate 505c Relief portion 505d Substrate support 505e Fixed boss 505f Through hole 505g Opening receiving portion 508 Lamp drive board box 510 Back unit 510G Production space 514 Back box 514a Opening 514b Fixing portion 514c Positioning protrusion 515 First screw 516 Removable groove 518 Removable mechanism 520 Light decorative body 521 Decorative plate 530 Wing-shaped decorative body 535 LED substrate 540 Panel holder 540a Fitting step 540b Through hole 540c Engaging projection 540d Engaging claw 540e Protruding pin 540f Boss insertion hole 540g Mounting support 540h Housing recess 540i Locking portion 540j First mounting hole 540k Second mounting hole 540l Positioning hole 540m Thickening portion 540n Positioning portion 540o Communication hole 540p Communication hole 550 Second warp passage 554 Second warp outlet 560 Second stage 560a Front stage 560b Rear step 562 Special receiving port 564 Normal receiving port 566 Second warp outlet side end 568 Second warp counter-exit side end 580 Rotating and distributing role 580a Magnetically attached portion 590 Disc-shaped portion 591 Main body portion 592 Lower electrical decoration body 594 Upper electrical decoration body 596 Middle electrical decoration body 600 1st starting opening 602 2nd starting opening 604 3rd starting opening 606 Movable piece 612 Passing gate 614 General winning opening 620 Center accessory 621 Opening 621a Transparent plate 622 Frame-shaped decorative body 630 Blade-type decorative body 632 Blade-type decorative body 632a Window portion 650 First warp passage 652 First warp inlet 654 First warp outlet 658 Warp guide piece 660 First stage 662 Mountain portion 664 Valley portion 666 First warp outlet side end 668 First warp opposite exit side end 680 Front component 680a Opening 680c Positioning fixing boss 680d Positioning protrusion 685 Shaped base 685a side 685b side 700 main substrate 702 first special symbol display control section 704 second special symbol display control means 710 main control board 711 CPU
712 ROM
713 RAM
714 Special electric player operation processing means 715 Big hit game execution means 715a Long open big hit game execution means 715b Short open big hit game execution means 716 Normal symbol display control means 718 Normal symbol hold display control means 720 Discharge control board 722 CPU
724 ROM
726 RAM
730 Drain full switch 731 732 Drawer connector 733 Fitting hole 736 Inner frame opening switch 738 Door opening switch 750 Panel relay terminal plate 751, 752 Drawer connector 754 Opening / closing device relay terminal plate 760 Gate sensor 762 General winning opening sensor 768 Normal design Special symbol display board 774 Normal electric accessory solenoid 776 Opening / closing device count sensor 778 Opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 780 First start sensor 782 Second start sensor 784 Third start sensor 800 Peripheral board 810 Peripheral control board 811 CPU
812 ROM
813 RAM
816 Display Device Control Board 818 Sound Source IC
819 ROM
832 CPU
834 RAM
836 ROM
838 VDP
839 Image ROM
842 Frame decoration lamp 850 Lamp drive board 852 Panel decoration lamp 853 Center decoration lamp 854 Discharge port detection sensor 860 Hook through opening 861 Screw fixing portion 862 Locking protrusion 863 Insertion hole 864 Rivet 865 Fraud prevention notch 866 Lock attachment piece 867 Lock insertion Hole 868 Cylinder lock 869 Lock attachment board 870 Screw 871 Attachment hole 872 Lock shaft 873 Engagement cam 874 Engagement protrusion 875 Engagement protrusion 876 Screw 877 Insertion vertical opening 878 Insertion vertical opening 879 Spring locking piece 880 Horizontal hole 882 First Fraud prevention member 882a Inclined portion 883 Oscillating shaft hole 884 Projection piece insertion hole 885 Stopper piece portion 886 Guide pin 887 Pin hole 888 Connection hole 889 Restriction protrusion 890 Second fraud prevention member 892 Connection hole 893 Connection pin 894 Spring 896 Spring engagement Blind hole 897 abutment portion 898 Stop hole 900 First special symbol lottery means 902 First special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 903 First special symbol hold counter 904 First special symbol success / failure determination means 906 First normal special symbol determination table 907 Second normal special symbol Judgment table 908 First probability variation special symbol determination table 909 Second probability variation special symbol determination table 910 Second special symbol lottery means 912 Second special symbol validity determination random number acquisition means 913 Second special symbol hold counter 914 Second special symbol validity determination Means 920 Normal symbol lottery means 922 Normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 923 Normal symbol hold means 924 Normal symbol success / failure determination means 926 Normal general symbol determination table 927 Open extended normal symbol determination table 928 Movable piece opening / closing control means 930 First special symbol Hold display control means 932 Second special symbol hold display control means 934 Game state control Means 938 Opening / closing operation control means 940 Reservation order storage means 946 Command transmission means 950 Command reception means 960 Production lottery means 962 Production control means 971 Door frame sliding rod 973 Door frame hook portion 974 Rivet slot 976 Guide protrusion 978 Play hole 979 Lifting engagement hole 980 Spring hook portion 981 Abutting elastic piece 982 Spring 983 Notch portion 984 Body frame sliding rod 985 Upper hook member 986 Lower hook member 987 Connecting wire rod 988 Hook portion 989 Rivet slot 991 Projection One moving hole 993 Spring hook part 994 Connecting hole 995 Connecting hole 996 Rivet long hole 997 Lowering engagement hole 998 Play hole 999 Projecting piece moving hole 1000 First special symbol corresponding pattern 1002 Second special symbol corresponding pattern 1004 Timer 1014 Hook part 1015 Contact portion 1016 Contact 1017 Engagement cutout portion 1150 Hold display area 1151 First hold display area 1151a First hold storage display section 1151b Second hold storage display section 1151c Third hold storage display section 1151d Fourth hold storage display section 1152 2nd hold display area 1152a 5th hold storage display portion 1152b 6th hold storage display portion 1152c 7th hold storage display portion 1152d 8th hold storage display portion 1153 Decorative design 1153a Left design row 1153b Middle design row 1153c Right Symbol sequence 1160 Optical vortex image 5131 Random number storage area 5132 for determination of success / failure Processing area

Claims (3)

A first receiving port capable of receiving a game ball driven toward the game area;
First lottery means for performing lottery including winning determination based on the reception of game balls to the first receiving port;
Symbol variation display means for performing symbol variation display in a predetermined display area based on the result of the lottery,
A winning probability changing means capable of changing from a low probability state in which the winning probability in the hit determination is set to be relatively low to a high probability state set to be relatively high;
Ball winning means that facilitates the reception of game balls by the operation of a predetermined movable body,
When the result of the lottery is the first win, the winning ball is obtained by changing the high probability state by the winning probability changing unit and facilitating the acceptance of the game ball by the ball winning unit by operating the movable body. A first profit granting means for granting a player a first profit that provides an opportunity to obtain;
When the result of the lottery is a second win, the winning ball obtained in comparison with the change to the high probability state by the winning probability changing means and the case where the first profit is given is reduced. A second profit granting means for actuating the movable body to give the player a second profit having a value lower than the first profit;
In the lottery, a small hit condition establishment determining means capable of performing determination related to establishment of a small hit condition that can be established with a certain probability regardless of whether the low probability state or the high probability state;
When it is determined that the small hit condition is satisfied as a result of the determination related to the establishment of the small hit condition, the second profit is granted although the probability change by the winning probability changing means is not involved. As in the case where the first profit is given, specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit for operating the movable body in a manner that the number of prize balls obtained is less than when the first profit is given,
A gaming machine comprising
A second receiving port in which a game ball that is driven toward the game area is set in a normal mode that is unacceptable or difficult, or in an easy-to-accept promotion mode;
Based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second entrance, it is possible to make a hit determination with the same winning probability as the winning determination by the first lottery means in either the low probability state or the high probability state Second lottery means,
Further comprising
The small hit condition establishment determining means includes
In the lottery by the first lottery means, the determination on the establishment of the small hitting condition is performed so that the small hitting condition can be satisfied with the certain probability, but in the lottery by the second lottery means, the small hitting condition To ensure that
The symbol variation display means includes:
A normal losing fluctuation display means for performing a variability display on any one of a plurality of normal losing fluctuation displays having different fluctuation times as a normal losing fluctuation display that is performed without a reach display when the result of the lottery is a losing; and wherein the first or lottery result of the lottery by means is the second contact or the when a small hit condition is established, the plurality of regular long special than either of losing variable display in a first state in which hardly become the promoting aspect although performing variable display of the symbols over per time varying, said in the second state is changed to easily rather and the high probability state becomes the accelerator mode than in the first state, the lottery by the first selecting means results the or said a second per even a small hit condition is established, before in less time than the special per time varying A gaming machine characterized by having special hit fluctuation display means for displaying a fluctuation of a symbol. A first receiving port capable of receiving a game ball driven toward the game area;
First lottery means for performing lottery including winning determination based on the reception of game balls to the first receiving port;
Symbol variation display means for performing symbol variation display in a predetermined display area based on the result of the lottery,
A winning probability changing means capable of changing from a low probability state in which the winning probability in the hit determination is set to be relatively low to a high probability state set to be relatively high;
Ball winning means that facilitates the reception of game balls by the operation of a predetermined movable body,
When the result of the lottery is the first win, the winning ball is obtained by changing the high probability state by the winning probability changing unit and facilitating the acceptance of the game ball by the ball winning unit by operating the movable body. A first profit granting means for granting a player a first profit that provides an opportunity to obtain;
When the result of the lottery is a second win, the winning ball obtained in comparison with the change to the high probability state by the winning probability changing means and the case where the first profit is given is reduced. A second profit granting means for actuating the movable body to give the player a second profit having a value lower than the first profit;
A gaming machine comprising
A second receiving port in which a game ball that is driven toward the game area is set in a normal mode that is unacceptable or difficult, or in an easy-to-accept promotion mode;
Based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second entrance, it is possible to make a hit determination with the same winning probability as the winning determination by the first lottery means in either the low probability state or the high probability state Second lottery means,
In the lottery by the first lottery means or the second lottery means, a determination is made regarding the establishment of the small hit condition that can be established with a certain probability regardless of whether the state is the low probability state or the high probability state. A small hit condition establishment determination means that can be performed;
When it is determined that the small hit condition is satisfied as a result of the determination related to the establishment of the small hit condition, the second profit is granted although the probability change by the winning probability changing means is not involved. As in the case where the first profit is given, specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit for operating the movable body in a manner that the number of prize balls obtained is less than when the first profit is given,
Further comprising
The small hit condition establishment determining means includes
The determination regarding the establishment of the small hit condition performed in the lottery performed by the first lottery means is performed with a higher probability than the determination regarding the establishment of the small hit condition performed in the lottery performed by the second lottery means. To do so,
The symbol variation display means includes:
A normal losing fluctuation display means for performing a variability display on any one of a plurality of normal losing fluctuation displays having different fluctuation times as a normal losing fluctuation display that is performed without a reach display when the result of the lottery is a losing; and wherein the first or lottery result of the lottery by means is the second contact or the when a small hit condition is established, the plurality of regular long special than either of losing variable display in a first state in which hardly become the promoting aspect although performing variable display of the symbols over per time varying, said in the second state is changed to easily rather and the high probability state becomes the accelerator mode than in the first state, the lottery by the first selecting means results the or said a second per even a small hit condition is established, before in less time than the special per time varying A gaming machine characterized by having special hit fluctuation display means for displaying a fluctuation of a symbol. The first lottery means and the second lottery means obtain a random number based on the reception of game balls at the first receiving port and the second receiving port, respectively, and perform the lottery using the acquired random number. The game machine according to claim 1 or 2.